Home

Agilent Technologies Portable Generator 8360 User's Manual

1. ALC Bandwidth Select Low Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also ALC This softkey sets the swept CW generator to the ALC low bandwidth position 10 kHz In this mode the ALC bandwidth operates in a narrow bandwidth for all sweep and modulation conditions An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI Sending the swept CW generator an ALC bandwidth frequency value of lt 10 kHz causes it to select the low ALC bandwidth mode POWer ALC BANDwidth AUTO OFF 0 POWer ALC BANDwidth lt freq gt freq suffix or MAXimum MINimum Analyzer NONE ALC ALC BW Menu Optimizing Swept CW Generator Performance in Chapter 1 ALC BW Menu Function Group Menu Map Description ALC This softkey reveals the softkeys of the ALC bandwidth select menu Sets the ALC bandwidth to be automatically chosen by the swept CW generator depending on the current sweep and modulation conditions Sets the ALC bandwidth to the high bandwidth position 100 kHz and to remain there for all sweep and modulation conditions ALG Bandwidth Select Auto ALC Bandwidth Select High Operating and Programming Reference A 11 ALC BW Menu See Also ALC Bandwidth Select Low Sets the ALC bandwidth to the low bandwidth position 10 kHz and to remain there for all sweep and modulation conditions a Optimizing Swept CW Generator Performance in Chapter 1
2. Power Offset Changes the displayed power to include an offset but does not change the output power of the swept CW generator Power Slope Activates the linear power per frequency mode of power output and makes RF slope dB GHz the active function Power Sweep Activates power sweep mode and makes power sweep dB swp the active function Set Atten Activates uncoupled attenuator as the mode of operation and makes the attenuator value the active function Tracking Menu Accesses the softkeys in the tracking calibration menu Uncoupl Atten Uncouples the attenuator from the ALC system Up Dn Power Allows you to enter values for the power level step size All RF power functions except for power level flatness on off and RF on off are contained in the power menu Operating and Programming Reference P 5 POWER MENU Programming Codes See Also SCPI NONE Analyzer NONE Softkeys listed previously under this menu key ALC FLTNESS ON OFF POWER LEVEL and RF_ON OFF Introducing the Agilent 8360 L Series Swept CW Generators in Chapter 1 and Getting Started Advanced in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 Power Offset Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER This softkey changes the mapping of absolute power parameters on input to the swept CW generator It does not change the RF output produced by the swept CW genera
3. 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Access User Flatness Correction Menu Press POWER MENU Select Fltness Menu Select Delete Menu Delete All This step insures that the flatness array is empty Press PRIOR Leave the delete menu and return to the previous softkey menu Select Copy List This step copies the frequency list into the correction table in sequential order Select Freq Follow This sets the swept CW generator to CW frequency mode to facilitate taking correction information As you scroll through the correction cells the swept CW generator produces the corresponding CW frequency at 0 dBm Select Enter Corr This allows correction value entry Press FLTNESS ON OFF This step enables user flatness correction For 5 GHz set the appropriate power sensor cal factor on the power meter Use the swept CW generator rotary knob to adjust for a measurement of 0 00 dBm on the power meter Notice that a correction value is entered at 5 GHz Use the up arrow key to increment to the next correction cell For 11 GHz set the appropriate power sensor cal factor on the power meter Use the swept CW generator rotary knob to adjust for a measurement of 0 00 dBm on the power meter Repeat this sequence of steps until all the frequency points have a correction value entered Activate List Mode Press SWEEP menu Select Sweep Mode List The flatness correction array is ready to be
4. Bit 0 BONDMoP WN FR SPR Serer oP WNMFr oo Fault Name PEAK TRACK RAMP SPAN V GHZ ADC EEROM PWRON CALCO PLLZERO PLLWAIT FNFXER CALYO CALMAN TMR CNFLCT SEARCH Operating and Programming Reference F 1 Fault Menu Analyzer NONE See Also Softkeys listed above Fault Info 1 Function Group SERVICE Menu Map 6 Description This softkey displays the latched status of the following fault messages PEAK FAIL TRACK FAIL RAMP FAIL SPAN FAIL V GHZ FAIL ADC FAIL F 2 Operating and Programming Reference Indicates that the peak algorithm is unable to align the YTM passband to the frequency of the YO This fault indication is possible only if a peaking or autotrack routine has been initiated Indicates that the autotrack algorithm is unable to calculate the calibration constants needed to track the YTM passband to the frequency of the YO This fault indication is possible only if an autotrack routine has been initiated Indicates that the ramp algorithm is unable to adjust the sweep ramp voltage to 10 00 V at the end of the sweep Initiate a full self test to gather more information if this fault is indicated Indicates that the span algorithm is unable to adjust the YO to achieve the correct frequency at the end of a band This fault indication is possible only if a sweep span routine has been initiated Indicates that the internal YO V GHz line adjusted at power on or at preset is
5. Externally Leveling the Swept CW Generator in Chapter 1 Working with Mixers Reverse Power Effects in Chapter 1 Working with Spectrum Analyzers Reverse Power Effects in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference A 9 ALC Bandwidth Select Auto Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also ALC This softkey sets the swept CW generator to choose the ALC bandwidth automatically depending on the current sweep and modulation conditions An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI POWer ALC BANDwidth AUTO ON 1 Analyzer NONE ALC BW Menu Optimizing Swept CW Generator Performance in Chapter 1 ALC Bandwidth Select High Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also ALC This softkey sets the swept CW generator to the ALC high bandwidth position 100 kHz In this mode the ALC bandwidth operates in a wide bandwidth for all sweep and modulation conditions An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI Sending the swept CW generator an ALC bandwidth frequency value of gt 10 kHz causes it to select the high ALC bandwidth mode POWer ALC BANDwidth AUTO OFF 0 POWer ALC BANDwidth lt freq gt freq suffix or MAXimum MINimum Analyzer NONE ALC ALC BW Menu Optimizing Swept CW Generator Performance in Chapter 1 A 10 Operating and Programming Reference ALC BW Menu
6. Press RECALL 2 Press MARKER The active entry area displays gt RECALL REGISTER 1 RECALLED Notice the sweep end points power level and the asterisks next to the marker 1 and 2 key labels You can save instrument states in registers 1 through 8 Register 0 saves the last instrument state before power is turned off When power is turned on register 0 is automatically recalled SAVE RECALL of STRUVENT Si savel Figure 1 9 Saving and Recalling an Instrument State Save Recall 1 Set up swept CW generator as desired 1 Press RECALL 2 Press SAVE 2 Press a number 0 through 8 3 Press a number 1 through 8 Getting Started Basic 1 17 Power Sweep and Power Slope Operation Power Sweep Operation 1 18 Getting Started Basic The power sweep function allows the power output to be swept positive or negative when the swept CW generator is in the CW frequency mode The power output of the swept CW generator determines the maximum leveled power sweep that can be accomplished For this example refer to the Menu Map section Zero and calibrate the power meter Connect the instruments as shown in Figure 1 10 Press Gi O Gi Press POWER LEVEL 0 dBm Press SWEEP TIME 2 sec SINGLE Set the power meter to dB REF mode The swept CW generator is ready to produce a 4 GHz CW signal at 0 dBm power out with a 2 second sweep rate whenever a single sweep is exec
7. Sets and queries the state of the RF attenuator coupling switch Programming a specified attenuation sets POWer ATTenuation AUTO OFF ON insures that the amplitude level of the ALC is kept within optimal limits OFF the attenuator setting is set to the value of POW ATT and left there The RST value is ON e POWer CENTer lt num gt lvl suffix MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN e POWer CENTer MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the center power for power sweep Default units and units for query response are determined by the UNIT POWer command The coupling equations for power sweep are exactly analogous to those for frequency sweep Power sweep is allowed to be negative unlike frequency sweeps See FREQ CENT for a description RST value is 0 dBm e POWer LEVel lt num gt lvl suffix MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN e POWer LEVel MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the output level Default units and units for the query response are determined by the UNIT POWer command Maximum and minimum levels refer to the leveling mode at the time the command is sent For example RST POWer LEVel MIN ALC SOURce MMHead has different effects from RST POWer ALC SOURce MMHead POWer LEVel MIN After RST the value is 0 dBm e POWer MODE FIXed SWEep e POWer MODE Sets and queries the setting of the power sweep mode switch If in the sweep mode then the output level is controlled by the start stop center and span functions If in the
8. AUTO Sets and queries the CW center frequency coupling switch This switch keeps the two functions coupled together when ON Changing one of them changes both RST setting is OFF See FREQ CENTER for more information S 30 Operating and Programming Reference SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY e FREQuency MANual lt num gt freq suffix MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN e FREQuency MANual MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the manual frequency This controls the output frequency in swept manual mode The limits are START and STOP RST value is the same as FREQ CENTER See FREQ CENTER for more information e FREQuency MODE FIXed CW SWEep LIST e FREQuency MODE Sets and queries the switch that selects either swept CW or list operation RST value is CW e FREQuency MULTiplier lt num gt MAXimum MINimum e FREQuency MULTiplier MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the frequency multiplier The numeric value is rounded to the nearest integer This function changes mapping of frequency parameters on input to and output from the swept CW generator Changing this does not affect the output frequency of the swept CW generator Only the displayed parameters and query responses are changed The equation implied by this is Entered displayed frequency Hardware Freq Multiplier Offset After RST the value is 1 e FREQuency MULTiplier STATe ON OFF 1 0 e FREQuency MULTiplier STATe Queries and turns the frequency multiplier off and
9. DELete POINts RESult TINT The following are the commands implemented by the 8360 L Series swept CW generators which are not part of the SCPI definition a CALibration ADJust A4 VCO A5 LGAin A6 VCO A6 SMATch A6 LGAin A6 1F Gain A9 OF FSet A10 MGAin A13 REFerence A13 GAIN Al4 SRAMp CONStants DEFault NAME RECall SAVE CONStants PEA King AUTO AUTO EXECute FINE PMETer ATTenuation Operating and Programming Reference S 7 SCPI Conformance Information ATTenuation DETector INITiate NEXT FLATness INITiate NEXT RANGe RANGe PO Wer ARRay POINts ARRay AT Tenuation ATTenuation EX Ternal ARRay POINts ARRay RANGe RANGe TYPE TYPE VA Lue VA Lue ZERO TYPE VA Lue VA Lue RANGe RANGe RECall SAVE ZERO ALL SECurity CODE STATe STATe SPAN AUTO AUTO EXECute TRACk m CORRection ARRay i ARRay i FLATness POINts FLATness S 8 Operating and Programming Reference SCPI Conformance Information SOUR cei SOUR celi STATe STATe a FREQuency MULTiplier STATe STATe MULTiplier OFFSet STATe STATe OFFSet STEP AUTO AUTO INCRement INCRement a INITiate CONTinuous CONTinuous IM Mediate a LIST MANual MANual MODE MODE PO Wer CORRection POINts CORRection TRIGger SOURce SOURce a MARKer n AMPLitude ST
10. Description oD This softkey activates pulse modulation mode and sets the internal pulse generator to produce 27 778 kHz square wave pulses 18 us pulse width 36 us pulse period The rise and fall times of the RF envelope are approximately 2 us These pulses allow proper operation with Agilent scalar network analyzers in ac detection mode An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active Operating and Programming Reference P 15 Pulse On OffScalar Programming Codes SCPI PULSe SOURce SCALar PULSe STATe ON OFF 1 0 Analyzer SHPM function on PMO function off See Also alc moD Chapter 3 Pwr Mtr Range Function Group 4c Menu Map _ Description This softkey lets you specify a range of operation Programming Codes See Also from 20 to 60 dBm for an external power meter when a power meter is used to level power externally The factory preset value is 0 dBm The value specified for Pwr Mtr Range directly affects the power level range for power meter leveling points When this feature is active its current value is displayed in the active entry area SCPI POWer RANGe lt num gt power suffix MAXimum MINimum Analyzer NONE Leveling Point PwrMtr Optimizing Swept CW Generator Performance in Chapter 1 P 16 Operating and Programming Reference RECALL Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SYSTEM This hardkey retriev
11. ENTER is always used in conjunction with OUTPUT such as 100 OUTPUT 719 programming codes 110 ENTER 719 response data ENTER statements are commonly formatted which requires the secondary command USING and the appropriate image items The most used image items involve end of line EOL suppression binary inputs and literal inputs For example 100 ENTER 719 USING B A B C suppresses the EOL sequence and indicates that variables A B and C are to be filled with binary B data As another example 100 ENTER 719 USING 123A A suppresses EOL and indicates that string variable A is to be filled with 123 bytes of literal data 123A Getting Started Programming 1 61 Note Be careful when using byte counting image specifiers If the requested number of bytes does not match the actual number available data might be lost or the program might enter an endless wait state The suppression of the EOL sequence is frequently necessary to prevent a premature termination of the data input When not specified the typical EOL termination occurs when an ASCII LF line feed is received However the LF bit pattern could coincidentally occur randomly in a long string of binary data where it might cause a false termination Also the bit patterns for the ASCII CR carriage return comma or semicolon might cause a false termination Suppression of the EOL causes the computer to accept all bit pat
12. Refer to user defined preset Refer to user defined preset Installation 3 25 Table 3 9 Programming Language Comparison continued Description Network Analyzer SCPI Language Language HP IB only functions Output status byte OS STB See SCPI common commands Status byte mask RM lt num gt SRE See SCPI common commands Extended status byte mask RE lt num gt ESE See SCPI common commands Clear status byte CS CLS See SCPI common commands Output learn string OL LRN See SCPI common commands Mode string OM Advance to next bandcross BC Display updating DU DISP ON OFF Activate fast phaselock mode FP Enable front panel knob EK SYST KEY 132 enable up SYST KEY 133 enable down Increment frequency IF TRG See SCPI common commands Input learn string IL SYST ILRN Keyboard release KR Select network NA analyzer mode Output active value OA See SCPI Command Summary Output next bandcross OB DIAG OUTP BAND frequency Output coupled parameters OC FREQ STAR CENT SWE TIME Output diagnostics OD DIAG OUTP FREQ UNL YOD Y TMD Output fault information OF DIAG OUTP FAUL Output identity OI IDN See SCPI common commands Output last lock frequency OK DIAG OUTP FREQ Output interrogated value OP See SCPI Command Summary Output power level OR POW LEV 3 26 Installation Table 3 9 Programming Language Comparison continued Descripti
13. See Also ANALYZER STATUS REGISTER Bit 2 Oven for the reference crystal oscillator is not at operating temperature Bit 3 External reference frequency is selected Bit 4 RF is unlocked UNLOCK appears in the message line Use OF to determine the source of the unlocked output This bit remains latched until this status byte has been read or until cleared by the CS or CLEAR 719 commands Bit 5 ac line power interruption has occurred since the last Instrument Preset This bit also remains latched until read or cleared Bit 6 RF is unleveled use OR to determine present power level This bit also remains latched until read or cleared Bit 7 FAULT message is displayed Use OF to determine the cause of the fault SCPI STATUS REGISTER Chapter 3 Operating and Programming Reference A 15 Arrow Keys Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also ENTRY NONE This group of entry keys lets you manipulate numerical values in the active entry line and G arrow keys identify by underlining the digit to be changed For example if CW frequency is in the active entry line and the display indicates gt CW 10005 000000 MHz you may wish to change the 5 to a 6 Press the G five times until the underline is under the 5 Now use the rotary knob or the if to change the 5 to a 6 The underlined digit remains the active character in this function until the swept CW generator is preset
14. for a frequency point the swept CW generator display indicates Undefined The range of acceptable values is 40 to 40 dB An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active Operating and Programming Reference E 1 Enter Corr Programming Codes See Also SCPI NONE see Fltness Menu Analyzer NONE Fltness Menu Optimizing Swept CW Generator Performance in Chapter 1 Enter Freq Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER This softkey lets you enter a frequency point into the flatness correction array When the Power Fltness Menu is selected Enter Freq is automatically activated Frequency points must be entered before correction values can be accepted into the array Frequency points can be entered in any order and the swept CW generator automatically reorders them beginning with the lowest frequency One frequency correction pair is the minimum and 801 is the maximum number of points that can be entered An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI NONE see Fltness Menu Analyzer NONE Fltness Menu Optimizing Swept CW Generator Performance in Chapter 1 Enter List Dwell Function Group Menu Map FREQUENCY E 2 Operating and Programming Reference Description Programming Codes See Also Enter List Freq This softkey lets you enter a dwell time for a frequency point in the frequency list arra
15. 1 111 Contents 13 Contents 14 1 37 1 38 1 39 1 40 1 41 1 42 A 1 A 2 C 1 C 2 C 3 F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 2b 1 2b 2 2b 3 2b 4 2b 5 2b 6 2b 7 2b 8 2b 9 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 Inside the Initiate State Inside an Event Detection State Inside the Sequence Operation State The INIT Trigger Configuration The TRIG Trigger Configuration 8360 Simplified Trigger Model ALC System Simplified Block Diagram Typical External Leveling Hookup Auxiliary Interface Connector GPIB Connector and Cable Interface Signals of the Source Module Connector Basic User Flatness Configuration Using an HP Agilent 437B Power Meter User Flatness Correction Table as Displayed by the Swept CW Generator The Sources of ALC Calibration Correction Data Array Configuration when the Correction Data Frequency Span is a Subset of the Swept CW Generator Frequency Span 1 How PRIOR Works Connections Required for a Two Tone Scalar Network Analyzer Measurement System ALC Menu Frequency Menu Marker Menu Modulation Menu Power Menu Service Menu Sweep Menu System Menu User Cal Menu AC Power Cables Available Rear Panel GPIB Switch a Removing the Side Straps and Feet Chassis Slide Kit Rack Mount Flanges for Swept CW Generators with Handles Removed Rack Mount Flanges for Swept CW Generators with Handles Attached Replacing the Line Fuse 4 2 Re
16. ATTEN X dB MODULE LEVEL X XX dBm where X represents a numeric value The data display area indicates Power dBm MDL X XX In ALCoff there is no feedback voltage to level the power so power level is uncalibrated A leveling point is not specified in this mode The POWER LEVEL key controls the linear modulator directly from 0 to approximately 80 dB The attenuator if present is automatically uncoupled from the ALC system When you press POWER LEVEL the active entry area displays gt ATTEN X dB REFERENCE X XX dB where X represents a numeric value The data display area indicates Ref dB OFF X XX and the message line indicates UNLVLED In Search any of the leveling points can be specified and used as the comparison feedback voltage Basically this mode operates the same as ALCoff after the searched for power level is reached The active entry area displays different information depending on the leveling point chosen SCPI POWer LEVEL lt num gt lvl suffix or MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN Analyzer PL P 4 Operating and Programming Reference See Also POWER Function Group Menu Map Description POWER MENU atc CONNECTORS Det Cal Menu FLTNESS ON OFF Set Atten racking Menu Uncoupl Atten Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 POWER This hardkey accesses the power function softkeys Fitness Menu Accesses the softkeys in the flatness correction menu
17. Bandwidth External Detector Mode 10 or 100 kHz sweep speed and modulation mode dependent nominal Power Meter Mode 0 7 Hz nominal internally leveled typical lt 20 GHz 1 6 1 SWR lt 40 GHz 1 8 1 SWR lt 50 GHz 2 0 1 SWR 6 Typically 2 0 1 SWR at frequencies below 50 MHz Typical ALC Linearity Frequencies lt 20GHz T O 5 c 5 20 10 O 10 20 ALC Level dBm Spectral Purity Specifications apply in CW step list and manual sweep modes of operation Spurious Signals Harmonics Output 83623L 83630L 83640L 83650L Frequencies lt 2 0 GHz Standard 257 30 30 30 gt 2 0 and lt 26 5 GHz Standard 45 50 50 50 gt 26 5 GHz Standard 40 40 Subharmonics Output 83623L 83630L 83640L 83650L Frequencies lt 7 GHz None None None None gt 7 and lt 20 GHz 50 50 50 50 gt 20 and lt 40 GHz 50 40 40 gt 40 GHz 358 T Specification is 20 dBc below 50 MHz 8 Specification typical below 0 dBm Specifications 2c 7 Non Harmonically Related Output Frequencies lt 2 0 GHz 60 gt 2 0 and lt 20 GHz 60 gt 20 GHz and lt 26 5 GHz 58 gt 26 5 and lt 40 GHz 54 gt 40 GHz 52 Specification applies at output levels 0 dBm and below Power Line Related lt 300 Hz offset from carrier 10 MHz to lt 7 GHz 55 7 GHz to lt 13 5 GHz 49 13
18. Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SWEEP When this softkey is selected the swept CW generator automatically triggers a sweep This is the fastest way to accomplish the sweep retrace cycle An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI TRIGger SOURce IMMediate Analyzer T1 CONT SINGLE Sweep Menu Start Sweep Trigger Bus Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SWEEP When this softkey is selected the swept CW generator waits for an GPIB trigger to trigger a sweep An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI TRIGger SOURce BUS Analyzer TS CONT SINGLE Sweep Menu Operating and Programming Reference S 55 Start Sweep Trigger Ext Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SWEEP When this softkey is selected the swept CW generator waits for an external hardware trigger to trigger a sweep Connect the trigger pulse to TRIGGER INPUT It is activated on a TTL rising edge An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI TRIGger SOURce EXT Analyzer T3 CONT SINGLE Sweep Menu Step Control Master Function Group Menu Map Description FREQUENCY This softkey lets you designate the swept CW generator as the master control in a dual swept CW generator measurement system A dual swe
19. Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SYSTEM This softkey lets the swept CW generator recognize a printer address between 0 and 30 The swept CW generator can act as a controller for a printer during self test if the log to a printer feature is initiated SCPI DIAGnostic INSTrument PRINTer ADDRess lt num gt Analyzer NONE Adrs Menu Selftest Full Operating and Programming Reference P 11 PRIOR Function Group MENU SELECT Menu Map NONE Description This hardkey lets you view previous menus All menus visited from the last preset are remembered and displayed in a last visited first seen order Refer to Figure P 1 and follow the arrow paths as indicated FREQUENCY SOME OTHER PREVIOUS MENU o s o BLANK EYLABEL K AREA Up Dn Size Freq Freq more List Step Swp CW CF more Swept cw Offset Mult 1 2 Zoom Menu Menu Coupled 2 2 eesesenens Enter List PRIOR Offset Dwell Menu PRIOR We He All Current CD CD Figure P 1 How Works The sequence of keystrokes that created the movement shown in Figure P 1 is FREQUENCY more 1 2 List Menu PRIOR PRIOR ERIOR 1 2 3 4 Delete Menu 5 6 7 P 12 Operating and Programming Reference Programming Codes Programming Language CIIL SCPI NONE Analyzer NONE See Also more n m Programming Language Analyzr Function Group SYSTEM Menu Map 8 D
20. POW STAT OFF NEXT I PRINT Finished sending commands to source PRINT Note that execution is continuing for four cycles END Run the program Program Comments 10 Assign the source s GPIB address to a variable 20 to 50 Abort any GPIB activity and initialize the GPIB interface 60 Clear the computer s display 70 Set the source to its initial state for programming 80 Set the source up for a sweep from 4 GHz to 5 GHz 90 Set the sweep time to 2 second In SCPI suffixes are optional if you program in fundamental units for sweep time that would be seconds 100 Send an OPC to the source 110 Enter the query response to the OPC into a variable X The program execution will halt here until the source has finished processing all the commands up to this point Once complete the source will respond to the OPC with a 1 120 Begin a FOR NEXT loop that is repeated four times 130 Initiate a sweep on the source Getting Started Programming 1 101 140 Send a WAI command to the source This command causes the source to stop executing new commands until all prior commands and operations have completed execution In this case there is a sweep in progress so no further commands will be executed until the sweep finishes 150 Turn the RF output of the source ON 160 Initiate a sweep on the source 170 Send another WAT to the source Although the WAI command causes EXECUTION of commands
21. all means for protection are intact only Position the instrument according to the enclosure protection provided This instrument does not protect against the ingress of water This instrument protects against finger access to hazardous parts within the enclosure vi CAUTION Note Before switching on this instrument make sure that the line voltage selector switch is set to the voltage of the power supply and the correct fuse is installed Always use the three prong ac power cord supplied with this instrument Failure to ensure adequate earth grounding by not using this cord may cause instrument damage Before switching on this product make sure that the line voltage selector switch is set to the voltage of the power supply and the correct fuse is installed Assure the supply voltage is in the specified range Ventilation Requirements When installing the instrument in a cabinet the convection into and out of the instrument must not be restricted The ambient temperature outside the cabinet must be less than the maximum operating temperature of the instrument by 4 C for every 100 watts dissipated in the cabinet If the total power dissipated in the cabinet is greater than 800 watts then forced convection must be used This product is designed for use in Installation Category II and Pollution Degree 2 per IEC 1010 and 664 respectively The detachable power cord is the instrument disconnecting device It dis
22. all selftests passed 1 Cannot diagnose diagnosis routine failed to isolate failure software fault lt test failure gt is the test number of the most relevant failure 999 if parameter is not used as in lt result gt of 1 lt manual entry point gt is a string response that identifies the paragraph number in the Agilent Technologies 8360 B Series Swept Operating and Programming Reference S 27 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY Signal Generator 8360 L Series Swept CW Generator Service Guide to begin the troubleshooting procedure e DIAGnostics TEST CONTinue Causes the selftest execution to continue when paused for raw data examination Does nothing in other conditions e DIAGnostics TEST DATA DESC Returns the description string of the raw data examined during a selftest It returns in other conditions e DIAGnostics TEST DATA MAXimum Returns the upper test limit for the raw data point examined Returns 0 in other conditions e DIAGnostics TEST DATA MINimum Returns the lower test limit for the raw data point examined Returns 0 in other conditions e DIAGnostics TEST DATA VALue Returns the raw data value for the raw data point examined Returns a 0 in other conditions e DIAGnostics TEST DISable lt num gt 1 ALL Prevents the listed selftests from being selected If ALL is sent then all of the selftests are disabled RST causes DIAG TEST ENAB ALL to execute e DIAGnostics TE
23. difference change The last active marker in this case marker 3 changes frequency value not the reference marker SWEEP OUTPUT Z AXIS BLANK MKR Soo oooo oooo00 aogoo ooa SHEPT CH OSCILLOSCOPE GENERATOR Marker Operation RF OUTPUT 10DB ATTENUATOR DETECTOR Figure 1 8 Marker Operation Delta Marker Operation 1 Press MARKER 1 Press MARKER 2 Select a marker key M1 MS 2 Select a marker key M1 MB 3 Enter value 3 Enter value 4 Press terminator key 4 Press terminator key 5 Select a different marker key M1 M5 6 Enter value 7 Press terminator key 8 Select Delta Mkr Ref 9 Select one of the previously chosen markers 10 Press PRIOR 11 Select Delta Marker Getting Started Basic 1 15 Saving and Recalling an Instrument State 1 16 Getting Started Basic The save recall registers store and access a previously set instrument state For example set the swept CW generator to sweep from 3 to 15 GHz at a 10 dB power level with markers 1 and 2 set at 4 5 and 11 2 GHz Press START Press STOP O O EH Press POWER LEVEL 2 0 dB m Press MARKER Select Marker M1 4 Q G Ghz Select Marker M2 Q O Ghz To save this instrument state in register 1 press SAVE 2 To verify that the swept CW generator has saved this state Press PRESET
24. gt 20 GHz Maximum leveled output power over the 35 to 55 C temperature range typically degrades by less than 2 dB Accuracy dB 4 Specifications apply in CW step list manual sweep and ramp sweep modes of operation Frequency GHz Power lt 2 0 gt 2 0 and lt 20 gt 2 0 and lt 40 gt 40 gt 10 dBm 41 2 1 3 gt 10 dBm 0 6 0 7 0 9 41 7 gt 60 dBm 0 9 1 0 41 2 2 0 lt 60 dBm 41 4 1 5 41 7 2 5 Flatness dB Specifications apply in CW step list manual sweep and ramp sweep modes of operation Frequency GHz Power lt 2 0 gt 2 0 and lt 20 gt 2 0 and lt 40 gt 40 gt 10 dBm 0 9 1 0 gt 10 dBm 0 5 0 6 0 8 1 5 gt 60 dBm 0 7 0 8 1 0 1 7 lt 60 dBm 1 1 1 2 1 4 2 1 Specification applies over the 15 to 35 C temperature range for output frequencies lt 50 MHz 5 Specification applies over the 15 to 35 C temperature range and are degraded 0 3 dB outside of that range Specifications 2c 5 Analog Power Sweep External Leveling Source Match 2c 6 Specifications Typical 83650B L Power Flatness dB 0 01 26 5 50 Frequency GHz Range 20 dBm to maximum available power can be offset using step attenuator Range At External HP Agilent 33330D E Detector 36 to 4 dBm At External Leveling Input 200 uV to 0 5 volts
25. in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference L 1 Leveling Mode Normal Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also ALC This softkey lets you set the leveling mode of the swept CW generator to continuous leveling at the desired leveling point In this mode the RF OUTPUT is controlled by the automatic level control ALC circuit otherwise referred to as the leveling loop The attenuator works in conjunction with the ALC to achieve the full range of power levels At factory preset ALC normal is the default state An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI POWer ALC STATe ON 1 Analyzer A1 internal normal A2 external normal A3 external power meter normal SHA2 source module normal T Leveling Mode Search Function Group Menu Map Description ALC This softkey causes the ALC to switch off once the desired power level is reached When this leveling mode is activated or when power or frequency is changed the swept CW generator switches to CW frequency and closes the ALC system until the desired power level is reached The swept CW generator reverts to its original frequency modulation state and opens the ALC system This mode is similar to ALC off mode and is useful for narrow pulse applications An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active L 2 Operating and Programming Reference Programming Codes See
26. 11 discrete parameters discussed in detail 1 85 explained briefly 1 75 discrete response data discussed in detail 1 86 display 1 4 display blank B 1 display clean 4 6 display clear B 1 display status D 5 display status of phase lock loops U 1 display zero frequency Z 1 doubler amp mode auto D 6 doubler amp mode off D 7 doubler amp mode on D 8 doubler amp softkeys D 1 down arrow A 16 dual source control S 56 dwell coupled D 8 dwell time frequency point E 2 list array all points G 1 stepped frequency mode S 59 dwell time coupled D 8 EEROM fail F 3 EEROM failed lost CAL message 2a 2 EEROM failed message 2a 2 enable register 1 107 in general status register model 1 106 END 1 64 ENDJend 1 81 ending frequency flatness correction A 21 frequency list A 21 enter correction E 1 enter frequency value flatness E 2 enter list dwell E 2 enter list frequency E 3 enter list offset E 3 enter statement 1 61 entry area 1 4 E 4 entry keys E 4 entry on LED 1 5 entry on off E 4 EOI 1 64 1 81 EOL suppression of 1 61 equipment supplied 3 1 erase active array entry D 2 erase array D 2 erase array entries D 1 erase memory C 2 erase undefined entry D 3 erase user defined menu U 5 erase user defined softkey U 5 error messages 2 1 2a 1 8 error queue clear S 12 ESE S 12 ESR 5 12 event commands 1 72 event detection trigger state details of operation 1 112 in ge
27. 120 kQ damage level 15 volts See RF output specifications BNC female front panel Trigger Input Activated on a TTL rising edge Used to externally initiate an analog sweep or to advance to the next point in step or list mode Damage level 5 5 0 5 volts BNC female rear panel Trigger Output Outputs a one microsecond wide TTL level pulse at 1601 points evenly spaced across an analog sweep or at each point in step or list mode BNC female rear panel 10 MHz Reference Input Accepts 10 MHz 100 Hz 0 to 10 dBm reference signal for operation from external time base Nominal input impedance 50 ohms Damage level 10 5 volts BNC female rear panel 10 MHz Reference Output Nominal signal level 0 dBm nominal output impedance 50 ohms BNC female rear panel Sweep Output Supplies a voltage proportional to the sweep ranging from 0 volts at start of sweep to 10 volts at end of sweep regardless of sweep width In CW mode voltage is proportional to percentage of full instrument frequency range Minimum load impedance 3 kilohms Accuracy 0 25 10 mV typical BNC female rear panel Stop Sweep Input Output Sweep will stop when grounded externally TTL high while sweeping TTL low when Agilent 8360 stops sweeping Damage level 5 5 0 5 volts BNC female rear panel Specifications 2c 11 Models Options 2c 12 Specifications Z Axis Blanking Markers Output Supplies pos
28. 15P Black 100V or 200V 8120 1378 Straight NEMA5 15P Jade Gray Mexico Philippines 8120 1521 90 Jade Gray Taiwan 8120 1676 Straight NEMA5 15P Jade Gray 8120 2104 Straight SEV1011 1959 Switzerland 24507 Type 12 8120 0698 Straight NEMA6 15P United States Canada 8120 1957 Straight DHCK 107 Denmark 8120 2956 90 8120 1860 Straight CEE22 VI System Cabinet Use E Earth Ground L Line N Neutral Part number for plug is industry identifier for plug only Number shown for cable is Part Number for complete cable including plug Figure 3 1 AC Power Cables Available Installation 3 5 3 6 Language Selection Note Remember Installation Note You can operate the swept CW generator using one of three external interface languages SCPI Analyzer language or CHL Option 700 How to View or Change a Language Selection from the Front Panel To set a programming language from the front panel the instrument language on the rear panel GPIB switch L1 L2 and L3 shown in Figure 3 2 must be set to 7 all 1s The GPIB menu provides access to the swept CW generator s programming language 1 Press SYSTEM MENU 2 Select GPIB Menu 3 The swept CW generator displays the three language softkeys Programming Language SCPI Programming Language Analyzr and Programming Language CIIL An asterisk indicates the selected language 4 Select the desired softkey If the swept CW generator d
29. 2 HP Agilent 437B 1 34 power meter 1 36 user flatness correction F 4 HP Agilent 437B measure M 7 M 8 power meter measure M 13 user flatness correction commands example program 1 103 user preset P 10 user preset save S 2 Index 23 Index 24 vector network analyzer connections 3 21 V GHz fail F 2 view interface address 3 8 view previous menu P 11 volts GHz connector C 5 WAI S 15 wait for sweep complete command S 15 WAI use of example program 1 101 WAI wai 1 111 warmup time 3 8 whitespace proper use of 1 69 without front panel change interface address 3 8 wrong password message 2a 5 Z axis blank markers connector C 5 zero frequency Z 1 zoom Z 1
30. 3 20 Front Panel Operation re 3 20 Instrument Preset Conditions re 3 20 System Connections Loe 3 21 The HP Agilent 8510 Network Analyzer oe 3 21 The HP Agilent 8757C E Scalar Network Analyzer 3 22 Contents 11 Contents 12 The HP Agilent 83550 Series Millimeter wave Source Modules The HP Agilent 8970B Noise Figure Meter Remote Operation o oa Language Compatibility Network Analyzer Language Test and Measurement System Language Control Interface Intermediate Language Converting from Network Analyzer Language to SCPI Numeric Suffixes Status Bytes Operator s Check and Routine Maintenance Operator s Checks Service Information Local Operator s Check Description Preliminary Check Main Check Routine Maintenance How to Replace the Line Fuse How to Clean the Fan Filter How to Clean the Cabinet How to Clean the Display Filter Instrument History Index 3 22 3 22 3 23 3 23 3 23 3 23 3 23 3 23 3 24 3 24 4 1 4 1 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 6 Figures 0 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 10 1 11 1 12 1 13 1 14 1 15 1 18 1 19 1 20 1 21 1 22 1 23 1 24 1 25 1 26 1 27 1 28 1 29 1 30 1 31 1 32 1 33 1 34 1 35 1 36 Typical Serial Number Label a The 8360 L Series Swept CW Generator Display Entry Area CW Operation and Start Stop Frequency Sweep Center Frequency and Span O
31. ALC level is useable from 20 to 25 dBm it is most accurate from 10 to 10 dBm This fact is reflected in the performance specifications of the swept CW generator Coupled Operation Since many applications require power output less than 20 dBm an optional step attenuator has a range of 0 to 90 dB in 10 dB steps With this option power output down to 110 dBm is achieved when the Step Attenuator and Level Control Circuits work in conjunction see Figure A 1 With the attenuator the ALC level is normally used over the smaller more accurate portion of its range Since ALC level accuracy suffers below 10 dBm and at some frequencies only 1 dBm of RF output is available the ALC level is set between 10 and 0 dBm For power less than 100 dBm the attenuator is set to 90 dB and the ALC level is used from 10 to 20 dBm At frequencies where power output above 0 dBm is desired the attenuator is set to 0 dB and the ALC level is used from 0 to 25 dBm or whatever power is available at the RF frequency in use Coupled operation is assumed by the swept CW generator unless Uncoupl Atten or Leveling Mode ALCoff is selected The proper combination of ALC level and attenuator setting is decided by the firmware In coupled operation when desired power output is set via A 6 Operating and Programming Reference AO POWER LEVEL the ALC level and attenuator are set automatically to provide the most accuracy for the pow
32. AUTO ON OFF 1 0 Analyzer RP1 function on RPO function off Auto Track Peak RF Once Tracking Menu Optimizing Swept CW Generator Performance in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference P 1 Peak RF Once Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER USER CAL 5 9 This softkey appears in two locations the POWER Tracking Menu and the USER CAL Tracking Menu The operation is the same in both locations This softkey causes an instantaneous one time execution of the peaking function when the swept CW generator is in the CW or manual sweep mode It aligns the output filter SYTM so that its passband is centered on the RF output SCPI CALibration PEAKing EXECute Analyzer SHAK Auto Tracking Peak RF Always Tracking Menu Optimizing Swept CW Generator Performance in Chapter 1 POWER LEVEL Function Group Menu Map Description POWER NONE This hardkey lets you control the output power level of the swept CW generator The swept CW generator has different power leveling modes and leveling points and as such the POWER LEVEL key controls different aspects of the power level ALC system The following is an explanation of power level operation in the different ALC system configurations In Normal Internal the key controls the output power level of the swept CW generator directly The attenuator if present is controlled together with the complete range
33. Altrnate Regs Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SYSTEM This softkey causes the swept CW generator to alternate on successive sweeps between the present instrument state and a second instrument state stored in an internal register 1 to 8 Select Altrnate Regs once to turn it on a second time to turn it off An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI SYSTem ALTernate STATe ON OFF 1 0 SYSTem ALTernate lt num gt MAXimum MINimum Analyzer ALin where n 1 through 8 function on ALO function off RECALL Saving and Recalling an Instrument State in Chapter 1 A 12 Operating and Programming Reference ANALYZER STATUS REGISTER Ampl Markers Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also MARKER Active markers are normally displayed as intensified dots on a CRT display With Ampl Markers selected active markers are displayed as amplitude spikes an abrupt discontinuity in the sweep trace The marker amplitude can be varied The swept CW generator displays gt AMPLITUDE MARKER SIZE XXXX dB where XXXX represents an amplitude value Use the rotary knob the step keys or the numerical entry keys with the dB m terminator key to set the desired value If a small change is required the left and right arrow keys can be used to underline the digit to be changed Select Ampi Markers again to return to the normal intensifie
34. C 10 8360 Adrs E 1 8360 as controller 3 7 ABORt command defined 1 118 effect on trigger state 1 111 example using 1 115 ABORt abort affect on trigger state 1 110 abort statement 1 57 ac power switch L 5 active entry area 1 4 active entry area on off E 4 active entry arrow 1 4 adapters 3 1 GPIB C 6 adapter three prong to two prong 3 4 ADC fail F 2 address swept CW generator A 1 E 1 address changes no front panel 3 8 address changes prevent 3 8 address changes to 3 8 addresses factory set interface 3 7 address menu A 1 address printer P 11 address programming power meter M 8 Agilent 8340 status register A 13 airflow 3 9 Index 1 Index 2 ALC bandwidth menu A 11 select auto A 9 select high A 10 select low A 10 ALC bandwidth selection 1 50 ALC disabled theory of A 8 ALC leveling internal L 3 mm wave module L 4 normal L 1 power meter L 4 search L 2 ALC menu A 2 4 ALC off L 1 ALC off mode 1 32 ALC open loop L 1 ALC search mode 1 32 align output filter A 22 P 1 alternate registers A 12 altitude pressure 3 9 always calibrate sweep span S 66 amplitude markers 1 14 A 12 analog sweep mode S 65 analyzer compatibility P 13 analyzer language P 13 analyzer programming language A 13 angle brackets 1 64 apply flatness correction F 10 arrow keys A 16 assign softkey A 17 attenuator uncouple U 1 attenuator value set S 51 auto fill increment A
35. CONT ON execute sequence operations continuously INIT CONT OFF stop sequence operations after the current one is complete Getting Started Programming 1 115 The TRIG Configuration Instruments using the TRIG configuration include one event detection state named TRIG and a corresponding TRIGger subsystem And all SCPI instruments implement the required INITiate and ABORt subsystems TRIG Event Detection ante Actions Operation Figure 1 41 The TRIG Trigger Configuration 1 116 Getting Started Programming Description of The 8360 L Series Swept CW Generators follow the SCPI model Triggering in the of triggering It is a layered model with the structure shown in 8360 L Series Swept CW Figure 1 42 Generators Idle State Sweep Initiated Waiting for the Trigger Signal to be True Sweep Started Sweep State Perform a Sweep Frequency Power Stepped List or Analog Figure 1 42 8360 Simplified Trigger Model The process of sweeping involves all 3 of these states The IDLE state is where the sweep begins The IDLE state is left when the sweep is initiated This can happen on a continuous basis INIT CONT ON or on a demand basis INIT CONT OFF The functions of continuous and single sweeps are handled by this command When the INIT CONT ON command is given the sweep is continuously re initiated When in the OFF state the sweep is initiated with the INIT IMMediate command Once initiated the wait
36. Characterizing and Compensating for a Detector Connect the power meter as shown Zero and calibrate the power meter sensor Enter the appropriate power sensor calibration factors into the power meter Enable the power meter sensor cal factor array For operating information on the HP Agilent 437B power meter refer to its operating and service manual Connect the power sensor to the output of the coupler or splitter On the swept CW generator set the power level and start stop frequency information as desired Press USER CAL Select Ext Det Cal The power meter is now under swept CW generator control and is performing the sequence of steps necessary to generate the compensation information If an GPIB error message is displayed verify that the interface connections are correct Check the GPIB address of the power meter and ensure that it is the same address the swept CW generator is using address 13 is assumed Refer to the menu Getting Started Advanced 1 47 1 48 Getting Started Advanced map 8 System for the key sequence necessary to reach softkey Meter Adrs When the operation is complete a message is displayed disconnect the power meter sensor The swept CW generator has stored the compensation information in its memory and is using it to calibrate the detector s output voltage relative to power Using the Tracking Feature Note Peaking Peaking is the function that
37. Codes See Also FREQUENCY This softkey couples the CW function to the center frequency function Any change initiated in either one of these parameters causes a change in the other SCPI FREQuency CW AUTO ON OFF 1 0 Analyzer NONE CENTER GH Operating and Programming Reference C 13 Dblr Amp Menu Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER This softkey accesses the doubler amp mode softkeys These softkeys are applicable to instrument models with a doubler installed The doubler has an integral amplifier whose operation is controlled by the instrument firmware Its use depends on the frequency of operation and on the calibration constants set at the factory The instrument defaults after preset to this automatic mode of operation which is the specified operation Softkeys in this menu will allow you to turn the doubler amplifier always on or always off These two modes are unspecified operation for instruments with a doubler installed These softkeys have no effect on instruments without a doubler Doubler Amp Mode AUIO Doubler Amp Mode On Doubler Amp Mode Off SCPI NONE Analyzer NONE Softkeys listed above Sets the doubler amp mode to AUTO This is the default after preset and must be used for specified performance Turns the doubler amplifier on regardless of the frequency of operation Using this mode results in unspecified performance Turns the doubler amplifi
38. Error Bit bit 4 in the Event Status Register One of the following events has occurred a A data element following a header was evaluated by the swept CW generator as outside of its legal input range or is inconsistent with the swept CW generator s capability a A valid program message can not be properly executed due to some instrument condition Execution Errors are reported by the swept CW generator after rounding and expression evaluation operations have taken place Errors that generate Execution Errors do not generate Command Errors Device specific Errors or Query Errors 240 Hardware error Rear panel GPIB switch 224 Illegal parameter value 222 Data out of range Expected 0 1 222 Data out of range 221 Settings conflict 221 Settings conflict List Arrays Invalid 221 Settings conflict Power And Level Mode 221 Settings conflict Power and attenuator 221 Settings conflict mm Module Mismatch 220 Parameter error Value not allowed 213 Init ignored 200 Execution error No more room in EEROM 200 Execution error Option Not Installed Error Messages From 199 to 100 These error messages indicate that a SCPI syntax error has been detected by the swept CW generator s parser An error of this type sets the Command Error Bit bit 5 in the Event Status Register One of the following events has occurred a A syntax error has been detected Possible errors are a data element
39. Level 0 dBm Power Step Size 10 dB Power Sweep Slope 0 dB Storage Registers Retain current values HP IB Address Retains current value Status Byte Mask Unchanged Extended Status Byte Mask Unchanged Language Mode Unchanged System Connections Note The 8510 Network Analyzer The 8360 L Series swept CW generator is compatible with any HP Agilent 8510 network analyzer with firmware revision 4 0 or higher To upgrade firmware for an existing 8510 an HP Agilent 11575C Revision 4 0 Upgrade Kit or an HP Agilent 11575D Revision 5 0 Upgrade Kit is required HP Agilent 8510 revisions prior to 6 0 not inclusive require that you use the following connections a SWEEP OUTPUT a STOP SWEEP IN OUT a HP IB INTERFACE a AUXILIARY INTERFACE HP Agilent 8510 revisions 6 0 and greater use the connections as designated on the rear panel of the swept CW generator They are a TRIGGER OUTPUT a STOP SWEEP IN OUT a HP IB INTERFACE a AUXILIARY INTERFACE The dedicated HP Agilent 8510 versions of the 8360 may be configured to power up to one of two possible system languages network analyzer language or SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments This configuration is controlled via a switch located on the rear panel of the instrument The factory default setting for this switch is network analyzer language at an GPIB address of 19 To interface with a network analyzer the language selected must be Analyzer language Refer to
40. Most instruments are electronic measurement or stimulus devices but this is not a requirement Similarly most instruments use an GPIB interface for communication The same concepts apply regardless of the instrument function or the type of interface used A program message is a combination of one or more properly formatted SCPI commands Program messages always go from a controller to an instrument Program messages tell the instrument how to make measurements and output signals A response message is a collection of data in specific SCPI formats Response messages always go from an instrument to a controller or listening instrument Response messages tell the controller about the internal state of the instrument and about measured values A command is an instruction in SCPI You combine commands to form messages that control instruments In general a command consists of mnemonics keywords parameters and punctuation A query is a special type of command Queries instruct the instrument to make response data available to the controller Query mnemonics always end with a question mark Getting Started Programming 1 63 Standard Notation This section uses several forms of notation that have specific meaning Command Mnemonics Many commands have both a long and a short form and you must use either one or the other SCPI does not accept a combination of the two Consider the FREQuency command for example The short form
41. Print messages on the computer display 1 98 Getting Started Programming Looping and Clear and reset the controller and type in the following program Synchronization Example Program 6 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 Source 719 ABORT 7 LOCAL 7 CLEAR Source REMOTE Source CLS OUTPUT Source RST OUTPUT Source FREQ START 4 GHZ STOP 5 GHZ MODE SWEEP OUTPUT Source POWER LEVEL 1 DBM STATE ON OUTPUT Source SWEEP TIME 1 OUTPUT Source 0PC ENTER Source X REPEAT DISP Enter number of sweeps to take 0 to exit INPUT N IF N gt O THEN FOR I 1 TO N DISP Taking sweep number I OUTPUT Source INIT IMM 0PC ENTER NEXT I END IF UNTIL N 0 END Run the program Program Comments 10 Assign the source s GPIB address to a variable 20 to 50 Abort any GPIB activity and initialize the GPIB interface 60 Clear the computer s display 70 Set the source to its initial state for programming 80 Set up the frequency parameters using a compound message 90 Set up the source s power level and state using a compound message 100 Set up the source s sweep time to 1 second 110 Send the OPC command to the source to ensure that the previous commands are completed and the source is ready to begin controlled sweeps 120 Enter the response to the OPC into the variable X The response should be a 71
42. Programming Codes See Also MARKER See MARKER M1 SCPI MAR Ker5 FREQuency lt num gt freq suffix or MAXimum MINimum MARKer5 STATe ONJOFF 1 0 Analyzer M5 function on MO function off Ampl Markers MARKER MkrRef Menu Marker Operation in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 M 6 Operating and Programming Reference Measure Corr All Markers All Off Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also MARKER This softkey lets you turn all the markers off The frequency value given to the markers remains in memory and will be recalled when the marker softkeys are pressed again Softkeys Ampl Markers Center Marker and Mi M2 Sweep are not affected by turning the markers off The function or the frequency values is retained as the swept CW generator settings SCPI MARKer AOFF Analyzer SHMO Ampl Markers Center Marker MI M2 Sweep MARKER Marker Operation in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 Measure Corr All Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER This softkey enables the swept CW generator to act as a controller to command an HP Agilent 437B power meter to measure flatness correction values at all frequency points defined in the flatness array SCPI NONE Analyzer NONE Fltness Menu Mtr Meas Menu Creating and Applying the User Flatness Correction Arr
43. RF output is coincident with a marker frequency AUXILIARY INTERFACE connector provides control signals to the 8516A S parameter test set switch doubler This connector is a 25 pin D subminiature receptacle located on the rear panel It is also used for dual swept CW generator measurement systems two tone systems Refer to Step Control Master for more information Operating and Programming Reference C 5 CONNECTORS Table C 1 Pin Description of the Auxiliary Interface Pin Function In Out Signal Level 1 No Connection 2 Z Axis Blanking Markers Out Blank 5 V Marker 5 3 Spare 4 Spare I O TTL 5 Low Stop Sweep I O TTL 6 5 2 V Out TTL 7 No Connection 8 Divider Sync Out TTL 9 External Trigger In TTL 10 Spare Out TTL 11 Spare Out TTL 12 Low Retrace I O TTL 13 No Connection 14 Low Marker Out TTL 15 Low Qualified Stop Sweep Out TTL 16 Spare Out TTL 17 Spare Out TTL 18 Sweep Output Out 0to 10 V ramp 19 Ground 20 Low Blank Request In TTL 21 Spare 22 No Connection 23 Spare 24 Low Source Settled Out TTL 25 No Connection AUXILIARY INTERFACE 13 1 o GEEZ 25 14 RS 232 CABLE Figure C 1 Auxiliary Interface Connector C 6 Operating and Programming Reference CONNECTORS GPIB connector allows the swept CW generator to be connected to any other instrument or device on the interface bus All GPIB instruments can be connected with GPIB cables
44. SYSTEM MENU MENU SELECT amp QJ Auto we Pook RF Swp Span Cal Track Always Once Always Once C eam C C c USER CAL MENU 9 2c Specifications This section lists the specifications for the Agilent 8360 L Series Swept CW Generator In a effort to improve these swept CW generators Agilent Technologies has made changes to this product which are identified with changes in the serial number prefix To check if your swept CW generator specifications are the same as those listed in this section 1 Locate your instrument model number and serial prefix number in the Instrument History Changes table in Chapter 5 2 Check the right column of this table to determine whether any changes apply to your instrument s model number serial prefix number combination 3 If a change is listed check this change to determine if specifications other than those listed in this section apply The changes are included in Chapter 5 Specifications describe warranted instrument performance over the 0 to 55 C temperature range except as noted otherwise Specifications apply after full user calibration and in coupled attenuator mode of operation ALC level greater than 10 dBm Supplemental characteristics denoted typical or nominal are intended to provide information useful in applying the instrument but are non warranted parameters Specifications 2c 1 Frequency Range Resolution Frequency Bands for CW
45. an asterisk appears next to the key label but only one marker can be active at a time The active marker is indicated in the active entry area Softkeys listed above Marker Operation in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference M 3 Marker M1 Function Group MARKER Menu Map 3 Description The softkeys labeled Marker M1 through Marker M5 function identically The softkey turns the marker off on When an asterisk appears next to the key label it indicates that the marker is on but not necessarily active A marker is only active when it is indicated in the active entry area The active entry area displays the active marker and its frequency value Use the rotary knob the ARROW keys or the entry keys to set the frequency Markers are displayed normally as Z axis intensity dots but can be changed to amplitude pulses Ampl Markers When a marker is turned off the frequency value of that marker is retained in memory If the marker is reactivated the stored frequency value is recalled for that marker The frequency value of M1 and of M2 can also be used to define parameters in two other marker features Mi M2 Sweep and Start M1 Stop M2 Programming Codes SCPI MARKer 1 FREQuency lt num gt freq suffix or MAXimum MINimum MARKer 1 STATe ON OFF 1 0 Analyzer M1 function on MO function off See Also Ampl Markers MI M2 Sweep MARKER MkrRef M
46. and Programming Reference SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY e SYSTem ALTernate lt num gt MAXimum MINimum e SYSTem ALTernate MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the save recall register number to alternate the foreground state of the instrument The RST value is 1 e SYSTem ALTernate STATe ON OFF 1 0 e SYSTem ALTernate STATe Sets and queries the state of the Alternate State function RST setting is OFF e SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB ADDRess lt n gt Changes the GPIB s General Purpose Interface Bus address The RST value is 19 e SYSTem DUMP PRINter Causes a dump of the display contents to be made to the GPIB e SYSTem ERRor Returns the next message in the error queue The format of the response is lt error number gt lt error string gt where the error number is as shown in the Error Messages section and error string is lt Generic HP SL string gt lt More specific information gt An example response to SYST ERR is 23 NUMERIC OVERFLOW YOU PUT IN A NUMBER TOO BIG e SYSTem LANGuage SCPI CIIL COMPatible Causes the instrument to perform a language switch to another language system e SYSTem MMHead SELect AUTO ON OFF O 1 e SYSTem MMHead SELect AUTO Sets and queries automatic selection of the millimeter source module interface connector If the instrument finds a source module connected at both the front and the rear connectors the source module at the front connector is selected Progra
47. applied to your setup Disconnect the power meter sensor The power produced at the point where the power meter sensor was disconnected is now calibrated at the frequencies and power level specified above Note Swept mm wave Measurement with Arbitrary Correction Frequencies Example 3 The focus of this example is to use user flatness correction to obtain flat power at the output of the HP Agilent 83550 series mm wave source modules In this case we will use non sequential correction frequencies in a swept 26 5 to 40 GHz measurement with an HP Agilent 83554 source module The time it takes for a large quantity of power meter measurements can be long therefore we selected non sequential correction frequencies to target specific points or sections of the measurement range that we assume are more sensitive to power variations This greatly expedites setting up the user flatness correction table The amount of interpolated correction points between non sequential correction frequencies varies This example uses the HP Agilent 437B to automatically enter correction data into the array Turn off the swept CW generator before connecting to the source module interface SMI cable or damage may result Getting Started Advanced 1 39 SWEPT CH 437B GENERATOR POWER METER aa poo0o0o0o00 oooooo SOURCE MODULE INTERFACE TEST PORT SWEPT CW 437B GENERATOR POWER METER F amp O aaan nannan ea B808 SOURC
48. eight different measurement setups including correction tables in the internal storage registers of the swept CW generator SWEPT CW GENERATOR l SOURCE MODULE INTERFACE RF OUTPUT fe 437B CABLES AND OTHER POWER METER Ui DEVICES Ww 7 FLATNESS CORRECTED OUTPUT PORT l POHER SENSOR flattl Figure F 1 Basic User Flatness Configuration Using an HP Agilent 437B Power Meter F 6 Operating and Programming Reference Fltness Menu Frequency MHz Correction gt 10 000000 Undefined 110 000000 Undefined 210 000000 Undefined vee een cease eensees Auto Fill wc eee more Start Stop Pts Incr 2 3 L 3 Figure F 2 User Flatness Correction Table as Displayed by the Swept CW Generator Theory of operation The unparalleled leveled output power accuracy and flatness of the Agilent 8360 L Series swept CW generator This is achieved by using a new digital versus analog design to control the internal automatic leveling circuitry ALC An internal detector samples the output power to provide a dc feedback voltage This voltage is compared to a reference voltage which is proportional to the power level chosen by the user When there is a discrepancy between voltages the power is increased or decreased until the desired output level is achieved For comprehensive theory on the ALC system
49. fixed power mode then the output is controlled by the POW LEVEL command The RST value is FIXed Operating and Programming Reference S 37 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY e POWer OFFSet lt num gt DB MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN e POWer OFFSet MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the power offset This function changes mapping of absolute power parameters on input to and output from the swept CW generator Changing this does not affect the output power of the swept CW generator Only the displayed parameters and query responses are changed The equation implied by this is The entered or displayed power Hardware Power Offset After RST the value is 0 POWer OFFSet STATe ON OFF 1 0 e POWer OFFSet STATe Queries and turns the power offset off and on After RST the setting is OFF e POWer RANGe lt num gt 1vl suffix MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN e POWer RANGe Sets and queries the setting of the power meter range This is used when the command POWer ALC SOURce is set to PMETer e POWer SEARch ON OFF 1 0 ONCE e POWer SEARch Sets and queries the power search switch This has an interaction with POWer ALC STATe as described below POWer ALC STATe POWer SEARch Power Switch Action ON ON ALC is momentarily closed to level at the requested power and then the modulator is set to the same voltage in open loop mode This repeats automatically any time that the power level or frequency is changed Normal mode O
50. for MATE system compatibility Option 806 Rack Slide Kit Used to rack mount 8360 while permitting access to internal spaces Option 908 Rack Flange Kit Used to rack mount 8360 without front handles Option 910 Extra Operating amp Service Guides Provides a second copy of operating and service guides Option 013 Rack Flange Kit Used to rack mount 8360 with front handles Front handles are standard on the 8360 Option W30 Two Years Additional Return To Agilent Service Does not include biennial calibration Specifications 2c 13 3 Installation This chapter provides installation instructions for the Agilent 8360 L Series swept CW generator and its accessories It also provides information about initial inspection damage claims preparation for use packaging storage and shipment CAUTION This product is designed for use in Installation Category IT and Pollution Degree 2 per IEC 1010 and 664 respectively Initial Inspection Inspect the shipping container for damage If the shipping container or cushioning material is damaged it should be kept until the contents of the shipment have been checked for completeness and the swept CW generator has been checked mechanically and electrically The contents of the shipment should agree with the items noted on the packing slip Procedures for checking the basic operation of the swept CW generator are in Chapter 4 Operator s Check and Routine Maintenance
51. for trigger state is entered Here the trigger signal selected by the TRIG SOURce command is examined until a TRUE condition is detected These trigger signals are IMMediate This signal is always TRUE EX Ternal This is the external trigger input jack A positive transition on this jack constitutes a TRUE signal BUS This signal is the GPIB lt get gt Group Execute Trigger message or a TRG command When a TRUE signal is found the sweep is actually started The act of producing the sweep in some cases involves the use of trigger signals For example the stepped and list sweeps have modes that allow triggering for point to point advancement through the sweep These trigger signals are selected by individual TRIG SOURce commands in the appropriate subsystems i e LIST TRIGger SOURce and SWEep TRIGger SOURce The definition of these signals in the swept CW generator cause the sweep Getting Started Programming 1 117 to jump to the next point when the signal becomes TRUE therefore the first point in the list or stepped sweeps is produced immediately upon starting the sweep Receiving a trigger signal at the last point causes the IDLE state to be re entered Analog sweeps do not use the trigger signals during the sweep although the trigger signals are needed to start the sweep as described The ABORt command resets any sweep in progress and immediately returns the instrument to the IDLE state The WAI O0PC and OPC com
52. forcing this input high will not cause damage or disrupt normal operation 10 MHz REF INPUT accepts a 10 MHz 100 Hz 0 to 10 dBm reference signal for operation referenced to an external time base Nominal input impedance is 50 Q 10 MHz REF OUTPUT provides a 0 dBm 10 MHz signal derived from the internal frequency standard of the swept CW generator This input is a 500 connector that can be used as the master clock reference output for a network of instruments TRIGGER INPUT activated on a TTL rising edge Used to externally initiate an analog sweep or to advance to the next point of a step list or a frequency list TRIGGER OUTPUT produces a 1 us wide TTL level pulse at 1601 points evenly spaced across an analog sweep or at each point in a step list or a frequency list VOLTS GHz supplies a voltage that is proportional to the RF output frequency with a ratio of 0 5 volt output for every 1 GHz of RF frequency factory setting This ratio is switchable to either 0 25 or 1 volt The switch is located on the A12 SYTM assembly see Adjustments in the Agilent Technologies 8360 B Series Swept Signal Generator 8360 L Series Swept CW Generator Service Guide for information This output is designed to drive into 2 kQ or greater Z AXIS BLANK MKRS supplies a positive rectangular pulse approximately 5 V into 2 kQ during the retrace and switch points when the swept CW generator is sweeping This output also supplies a 5 V pulse when the
53. frequency is calculated using the equation f mim fnref where fm is the frequency of the active marker and fmref is the frequency of the reference marker SCPI MARKer REFerenc lt marker number gt Analyzer MD1 function on MDO function off Delta Marker Marker Operation in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 Disp Status Function Group Menu Map Description SYSTEM This softkey causes the status of various features to be displayed For example this is what the swept CW generator displays as its status after a factory preset Pls Off Lvl Int RF Slp 0ff AM Off ALC On Pwr Swp O0ff FM 0ff UsrCorr 0ff SwpMode Swept Altn Off SwpTrig Auto AutoCal None This key is useful when checking the current operation state of the swept CW generator The following is a listing of the various mnemonics used to indicate status Operating and Programming Reference D 5 Table D 1 Mnemonics used to Indicate Status Function Mnemonic State Mnemonic Pulse Pls Off Off Scalar Scalar AM AM Off Off FM FM Off Off Alternate Registers Altn Off Off On On ALC Leveling Point Lvl Internal Int External Ext Power Meter Mtr Source Module Mod ALC Leveling Mode ALC On On Off Off Search Srch Flatness On Off UsrCorr Off Off On On Start Sweep Trigger SwpTrig Automatic Auto GPIB Bus External Ext Power Slope Rf Slope Off Off On On Power Sweep Pwr Swp Off Off On On Sw
54. generator command S 13 response data discrete 1 86 integer 1 86 response data format example program 1 95 response examples 1 65 response messages defined 1 63 discussed in detail 1 80 syntax 1 82 response message terminators 1 65 defined 1 82 restore instrument state string S 12 reverse power effects 1 30 1 32 RF on off R 2 RF output connector C 10 RF peaking P 1 RF power maximize A 22 RF power functions P 5 right arrow A 16 root defined 1 68 root commands defined 1 68 rotary knob 1 5 R 2 rounding 1 84 routine maintenance 4 4 RPG R 2 RST S 13 S AV 5 14 save instrument state command S 14 save key S 1 save lock S 1 save recall example program 1 97 save register recall R 1 save registers 1 16 save user preset S 2 scalar network analyzer system connections 3 21 scalar pulse modulation P 15 SCPI conformance information S 2 SCPI error messages 2a 5 SCPI language P 14 search fail F 4 search leveling mode L 2 security functions S 49 selftest command S 15 selftest full S 50 selftest requires system interface off message 2a 4 semicolon examples using 1 69 problems with input statements 1 65 proper use of 1 69 sequence operation trigger state details of operation 1 114 in general programming model 1 110 serial number vii service information 4 1 service keys 2 1 service request enable register S 14 service tags gt 4 6 set attenuator S 51 setting GPIB addresses
55. it Three sections 12 key assignment locations of menu are available for key assignment Any softkey can be assigned to any of the 12 positions A softkey assigned to the user defined menu performs as if it is in its home menu Pressing the PRESET key does not erase the contents of this menu U 4 Operating and Programming Reference Programming Codes See Also UsrMenu Clear SCPI NONE Analyzer NONE ASSIGN PRIOR UsrKey Clear UsrMenu Clear Usrkey Clear Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SYSTEM This softkey lets you recall the user defined menu and remove a single softkey that appears in that menu 1 Select UsrKey Clear The user defined menu appears in the softkey label area The active entry area displays gt Press USER Soft Key to Clear 2 Select the softkey you wish to remove from the menu The active entry area turns off and the softkey is removed from the user defined menu The user defined menu remains in the softkey label area SCPI NONE Analyzer NONE assicn USER DEFINED MENU UsrMenu Clear UsrMenu Clear Function Group Menu Map SYSTEM Operating and Programming Reference U 5 UsrMenu Clear Description This softkey recalls the user defined menu and removes all softkeys assigned to that menu The empty user defined menu remains in the softkey label area Programming Codes SCPI NONE Analyzer NONE See Also ASSIGN USER D
56. leveling m The source module s maximum specified power is set and displayed Press FREQUENCY GED OOO OD GH OO GHz The frequency sweep is set from 26 5 to 40 GHz Press POWER LEVEL 7 dBm The source module power is set to 7 dBm for maximum power to the device under test Access User Flatness Correction Menu Press POWER menu Select Fltness Menu Select Delete Menu Delete All This step insures that the flatness array is empty Press PRIOR Leave the delete menu and return to the previous softkey menu Select Enter Freq 6 Guz to enter 26 5 GHz as the first correction frequency Enter 31 32 5 and 40 GHz to complete the list Notice that the frequencies are arbitrarily spaced Enter Correction Data into Array Select Mtr Meas Menu Measure Corr All The power meter is now under swept CW generator control and is performing the sequence of steps necessary to generate the correction information at each frequency point If an GPIB error message is displayed verify that the interface connections are correct Check the GPIB address of the power meter and ensure that it is the same address the swept CW Getting Started Advanced 1 41 1 42 Getting Started Advanced 13 14 15 generator is using address 13 is assumed Refer to the menu map 8 System for the key sequence necessary to reach softkey Meter Adrs Enable User Flatness Correction When the operation is comp
57. on After RST the setting is OFF e FREQuency OFFSet lt num gt MAXimum MINimum e FREQuency OFFSet MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the frequency offset This function changes the mapping of the frequency parameters on input to and output from the swept CW generator Changing this does not affect the output frequency of the swept CW generator Only the displayed parameters and query responses are changed The equation implied by this is Entered displayed frequency Hardware Freq Multiplier Offset After RST the value is 0 e FREQuency OFFSet STATe ON OFF 1 0 e FREQuency OFFSet STATe Operating and Programming Reference S 31 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY Queries and turns the frequency offset off and on After RST the setting is OFF e FREQuency SPAN lt num gt freq suffix MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN e FREQuency SPAN MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the frequency span See FREQ CENTER for more information e FREQuency STARt lt num gt freq suffix MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN e FREQuency STARt MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the START Frequency See FREQ CENTER for more information RST setting is MIN e FREQuency STEP AUTO ON OFF 1 0 e FREQuency STEP AUTO Sets and queries the function switch that controls the calculation of the frequency step size FREQ STEP INCR If the response is AUTO ON then the swept CW generator selects a step size that is coupled to the frequency spa
58. reference chapter Chapter 2 under the 8360 Adrs entry the examples in this section use 19 as the address for the swept CW generator Other instruments use a variety of procedures for setting the address as described in their operating manuals but typically either a rear panel switch or a front panel code is used An GPIB instrument is categorized as a listener talker or controller depending on its current function in the network Listener A listener is a device capable of receiving data or commands from other instruments Any number of instruments in the GPIB network can be listeners simultaneously Talker A talker is a device capable of transmitting data or commands to other instruments To avoid confusion an GPIB system allows only one device at a time to be an active talker Controller A controller is an instrument typically a computer capable of managing the various GPIB activities Only one device at a time can be an active controller The swept CW generator can be controlled entirely by a computer although the line POWER switch must be operated manually Several functions are possible only by computer remote control Computer programming procedures for the swept CW generator involve selecting an GPIB command statement then adding the specific swept CW generator SCPI Analyzer or CIIL programming codes to that statement to achieve the desired operating conditions The programming cod
59. response messages Program Message These paragraphs examine the construction of SCPI program Syntax messages in more detail Recall that program messages are the messages you send from the computer to an instrument These program messages contain commands combined with appropriate punctuation and program message terminators Figure 1 29 illustrates the simplified syntax of a program message subsystem command common command NOTES line gt A END lt new lt new line gt ASCII character decimal 10 SEND EOI asserted concurrent with last byte Figure 1 29 Simplified Program Message Syntax As Figure 1 29 shows you can send common commands and subsystem commands in the same message If you send more than one command in the same message you must separate them with 1 80 Getting Started Programming mnemonic NOTE SP Figure a semicolon You must always end a program message with one of the three program message terminators shown in Figure 1 29 Use lt new line gt lt END gt or lt new line gt lt END gt as the program message terminator The word lt END gt gt means that EOI is asserted on the GPIB interface at the same time the preceding data byte is sent Most programming languages send these terminators automatically For example if you use the HP BASIC OUTPUT statement lt new line gt is automatically sent after your last data byte If you are using a PC you can usually
60. restore the power value last entered SCPI POWer STATe ON OFF 1 0 Analyzer RF 1 power on RFO power off MOD POWER LEVEL ROTARY KNOB Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also ENTRY NONE The rotary knob is active whenever the entry area is on It controls a rotary pulse generator that allows analog type adjustment of the active entry area Although the rotary knob has the feel of analog control it is actually a digital control that generates 120 pulses per revolution NONE ARROW KEYS ENTRY KEYS Entry Area in Chapter 1 R 2 Operating and Programming Reference Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SYSTEM This hardkey allows up to eight different front panel settings to be stored in memory registers 1 through 8 Swept CW generator settings can then be recalled with the RECALL key A memory register can be alternated with the current front panel setting using the Atrnate Regs softkey The information stored in memory registers is retained in memory indefinitely when ac line power is constantly available or for approximately three years without line power Pressing PRESET does not erase the memory registers 1 through 8 Register 0 is a memory register also It saves the last front panel settings automatically and can not be accessed through the SAVE key Likewise register 9 is reserved for user preset storage and can not b
61. swept CW generator Advanced For the user familiar with swept CW generators but not necessarily familiar with how to use the special features of the 8360 L Series Swept CW Generator Programming For the user wishing to program an 8360 L Series Swept CW Generator This section contains an introduction to Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments language SCPI Agilent s implementation of IEEE 488 2 1987 and an introduction to the Analyzer programming language Note If you are unpacking a new swept CW generator refer to the installation suggestions provided in Chapter 3 Installation Getting Started Introduction 1 1 How To Use This Chapter Equipment Used In Examples 1 2 Getting Started Introduction To use this chapter effectively refer to the tabbed section Menu Maps Menu maps can be folded out to be viewed at the same time as the Getting Started information as illustrated The following table lists the equipment used in the operation examples shown in this chapter You can substitute equipment but be aware that you may get different results than those shown Equipment Used In Examples Equipment Recommended Model Numbers Power Meter Power Sensor Power Splitter Oscilloscope mm Wave Source Module Power Amplifier Coupler Detector HP Agilent 436
62. swept CW generator can mistrack because of excessive reflections at the output SCPI CALibration TRACk Analyzer SHRP Tracking Menu Optimizing Swept CW Generator Performance in Chapter 1 A 22 Operating and Programming Reference Blank Disp Function Group SYSTEM Menu Map 8 Description When this softkey is selected it causes the top four lines of the display to blank and remain blank until the PRESET key is pressed Blanking the display prevents sensitive information from being displayed As an added benefit remote execution time is reduced because the display does not require refreshing This key does not disable any other key functions An asterisk next to the key label indicates this function is active Programming Codes SCPI DISPlay STATe ON OFF0 1 Analyzer SHS11 disables the display SHS10 re enables the display See Also Security Menu Operating and Programming Reference B 1 Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY NONE This hardkey lets you select the center frequency for center frequency frequency span swept operation When you press CENTER the swept CW generator displays gt CENTER XXXXX MHz where XXXXX represents a frequency value Use the entry area to set the desired value Certain center frequency and frequency span combinations cause the swept CW generator to limit the value entered In general any combination that would cause the s
63. system is explained in the following paragraphs General Status These paragraphs explain the way that status Register Model registers are structured in SCPI instruments It also contains an example of how bits in the various registers change with different input conditions Required These paragraphs describe the minimum required Status Groups status registers present in SCPI instruments These status registers cover the most frequently used functions General Status Register The generalized status register model shown in Figure 1 33 is the Model _ building block of the SCPI status system This model consists of a condition register a transition filter an event register and an enable register A set of these registers is called a status group Condition Transition Event Enable Register Filter Register Register Bit O Bit 1 Summary Bit 2 Bit Logical OR Bit 3 Bit Nome aE Bit Number Figure 1 33 Generalized Status Register Model When a status group is implemented in an instrument it always contains all of the component registers However there is not always a corresponding command to read or write to every register Condition Register The condition register continuously monitors the hardware and firmware status of the instrument There is no latching or buffering for this register it is updated in real time Condition registers are read only 1 106 Getting Started Programming There may or may not be a
64. terms are used in the following discussions power output and ALC level Power output means actual output power including the effects of the attenuator ALC level means power levels before the attenuator In swept CW generators without attenuators these two terms are equivalent Internal Leveling Leveling Mode Normal Leveling Point Intrnl In this configuration Figure A 1 power is sensed by a detector internal to the swept CW generator and a dc output from this detector is fed back to the Level Control Circuits The ALC level is limited at the low end by the Level Control Circuits and at the high end by maximum available power Noise and drift limit the range at the low end to 20 dBm or greater The combination of RF frequency and RF components different models of swept CW generator have different RF components limit the ALC range available at the high end The internal instructions firmware of the swept CW generator limit the ALC level range available for request from 20 to 25 dBm If the power level requested is higher than the swept CW generator is capable of producing the maximum available power is produced and the message line displays UNLVLED unleveled When the swept CW generator performs frequency sweeps at certain ALC levels maximum available power can be exceeded during small portions of the sweep in this case a flashing UNLVLED message appears ALC leveling accuracy depends on power level Although the
65. that violates the device listening formats or whose type is unacceptable to the instrument m A semantic error has been detected indicating that an unrecognized header was received a A Group Execute Trigger GET was entered into the input buffer inside a SCPI program message Events that generate Command Errors do not generate Execution Errors Device specific Errors or Query Errors 178 Expression data not allowed 170 Expression error Bad terminator 161 Invalid block data Bad terminator 160 Block data error 160 Block data error Bad block type 151 Invalid string data Bad terminator 144 Character data too long gt 12 chars 141 Invalid character data Bad char in token 138 Suffix not allowed 131 Invalid suffix This one not allowed 123 Exponent too large Decimal number 123 Exponent too large Numeric overflow 122 RESERVED Error Messages 2a 7 121 Invalid character in number 120 Numeric data error Bad format 120 Numeric data error Bad terminator 113 Undefined Header Query not allowed 113 Undefined header Bad mnemonic 109 Missing parameter 108 Parameter not allowed Too many 105 GET not allowed 104 Data type error 104 Data type error Block not allowed 104 Data type error Char not allowed 104 Data type error Decimal not allowed 104 Data type error Non dec not allowed 104 Data type error String not allowed 103 Invali
66. the front panel or transmitted by the swept CW generator over the interface bus Each error message is accompanied by an explanation and suggestions are provided to help solve the problem Where applicable references are given to related chapters of the user s and service guides A list of the messages displayed on the message line of the swept CW generator are included in separate list because they are considered status messages rather than error messages No operator serviceable parts inside Refer servicing to qualified personnel To prevent electrical shock do not remove covers ABILITY TO SAVE A RECALL REGISTER IS LOCKED OUT This message occurs when the save recall registers have been disabled by the save lock feature or by a calibration constant ADDR ERROR EXCEPTION This can only be caused by an internal processor error Refer to Chapter 4 for instructions on contacting a qualified service technician Auto Track Failed Cal Not Updated occurs when auto track has been initiated and for some reason has failed Refer to Chapter 4 and follow the local operator s check procedures BUS ERROR EXCEPTION This can only be caused by an internal processor error Refer to Chapter 4 for instructions on contacting a qualified service technician DEFAULTING LANGUAGE This error message is displayed in conjunction with one of the following messages m Invalid Language set on rear panel switch The GPIB Language switch locat
67. this manual See Replaceable Parts in Agilent Technologies 8360 B Series Swept Signal Generator 8360 L Series Swept CW Generator Service Guide for a complete list of 8360 documentation and ordering numbers Typeface Conventions The following conventions are used in the 8360 L Series documentation Italics Italic type is used for emphasis and for titles of manuals and other publications Computer Computer type is used for information displayed on the instrument For example In this sequence POWER LEVEL is displayed Hardkeys Instrument keys are represented in key cap You are instructed to press a hardkey Softkeys Softkeys are located just below the display and their functions depend on the current display These keys are represented in softkey You are instructed to select a softkey Regulatory Information viii This product has been designed and tested in accordance with IEC Publication 1010 Safety Requirements for Electronic Measuring Apparatus and has been supplied in a safe condition The instruction documentation contains information and warnings which must be followed by the user to ensure safe operation and to maintain the instrument in a safe condition Manufacturer s Declaration Note Note This is to certify that this product meets the radio frequency interference requirements of Directive FTZ 1046 1984 The German Bundespost has been notified that this equi
68. to those of markers M1 and M2 Select M1 M2 Sweep Notice that the swept CW generator now is sweeping from 4 to 5 5 GHz Use this function to focus in on a selected portion of the frequency sweep Select Mi M2 Sweep again This turns the function off and returns the swept CW generator to its original sweep parameters To change the start stop frequencies for the swept CW generator not just temporarily use the softkey Start M1 Stop M2 As an example of the delta marker function Select Marker M3 and enter 6 G Ghz Select Delta Marker The frequency difference between marker 3 and marker 1 is displayed and the CRT trace is intensified between the two markers The active entry area displays gt DELTA MKR 3 1 2700 000000 MHz Marker 1 was chosen because it is selected as the delta marker reference To change reference markers select Delta Mkr Ref Select M2 as the reference Watch the display change to indicate gt DELTA MKR 3 2 1200 000000 MHz You can choose any of the five markers as a reference but when delta marker is on if the reference marker has a frequency value higher than the last active marker the difference between the frequencies is negative and is displayed as such by the swept CW generator The CRT display continues to intensify the difference between the two markers When delta marker is showing in the active entry area the ENTRY area is active Rotate the rotary knob and watch the frequency
69. turned off or the underline is moved completely left or right The ff and Q arrow keys increment or decrement the numeric value by a predetermined amount The increment value depends on the active function and the step value set All increment values are defaulted to their original values when the swept CW generator is preset unless Preset Mode User has defined the default differently SCPI NONE Analyzer NONE Fltness Menu List Menu Entry Area in Chapter 1 Creating and Applying the User Flatness Correction Array in Chapter 1 A 16 Operating and Programming Reference CESEN CEN Function Group USER DEFINED Menu Map NONE Description This hardkey lets you select any softkey and assign its function to 1 of 12 user defined keys in the USER DEFINED Menu The following message appears on the swept CW generator display gt Press MENU KEY to be assigned Complete keypaths are assigned not just the key label For example assigning List Menu to the user defined menu copies the complete structure keypath of that key All of the pages and lower level menus are placed within the user defined menu Programming Codes SCPI NONE Analyzer NONE See Also USER DEFINED MENU Operating and Programming Reference A 17 Auto Fill Incr Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY POWER 2 5 This softkey is used in two locations Fltness Menu and List Menu F
70. unable to calibrate Initiate a full self test to gather more information if this fault is indicated Indicates that the ADC analog to digital converter is not responding to a measurement request within the time out period The ADC is used extensively in the operations of the swept CW generator Initiate a full self test to gather more information if this fault is indicated Programming Codes See Also Fault Info 2 SCPI See Fault Menu Analyzer NONE Fault Menu Fault Info 2 Function Group Menu Map Description SERVICE This softkey displays the latched status of the following fault messages EEROM FAIL PWRON FAIL CALCO FAIL PLLZERO FAIL PLLWAIT FAIL FNXFER FAIL Indicates that the EEROM electrically erasable read only memory has failed to store data properly Whenever any data is stored in EEROM the integrity of the data is checked read back and compared to the data in RAM The EEROM is the main storage location for calibration data If this fault is indicated the present calibration data may be lost Indicates that the test of the processor ROM RAM and I O system performed at power on has failed The front panel INSTR CHECK LED lights Initiate a full self test to gather more information if this fault is indicated Indicates that the internal calibration data has been defaulted either deliberately or due to an FEROM failure Indicates a phase lock loop error caused by eith
71. 1 65 time sweep set automatically S 68 tmr conflet fail F 4 track fail F 2 tracking 1 49 tracking functions T 2 transition filter 1 107 in general status register model 1 106 TRG S 15 TRG trg 1 119 trigger automatic frequency list L 8 stepped sweep automatic S 61 stepped sweep external S 62 sweep mode external 55 trigger commands defined 1 118 trigger functions list mode P 14 trigger group execute command S 15 TRIGGER HP BASIC 1 119 trigger input BNC S 63 trigger input connector C 5 trigger interface bus stepped sweep S 62 trigger out delay T 3 trigger output BNC T 3 trigger output connector C 5 trigger point external list mode L 9 interface bus list mode L 8 trigger states event detection 1 112 idle 1 111 in general programming model 1 109 sequence operation 1 114 trigger system general programming model 1 109 INIT trigger configuration 1 115 TRIG configuration 1 116 Trigger system INIT configuration 1 115 TRIG trigger configuration 1 116 TST S 15 two tone control S 56 typeface conventions viii uncoupled attenuator A 7 U 1 unleveled message 1 10 1 18 unlock information on status U 1 UNLVLD message 1 18 UNLVLED message 1 10 up arrow A 16 user calibration functions U 3 user defined leveling F 4 user defined menu U 4 user defined menu erase U 5 user defined softkey erase U 5 user defined softkeys A 17 user flatness array 1 33 46 frequency value E
72. 130 Start of the loop Getting Started Programming 1 99 140 and 150 Prompt the operator for the number of sweeps to take The number of sweeps to take is stored in the variable N Enter 0 to quit the program 160 Don t take any sweeps if N is less than 0 170 Start a FOR NEXT loop to take N sweeps 180 Display the number of this sweep on the computer display 190 Initiate a single sweep on the source and then wait until the pending operation is complete Return a 71 when the sweep completes 200 Enter the response to the OPC into the variable X The program execution will halt on this ENTER statement until the sweep is finished 210 Repeat the INIT IMM sequence N times 220 End of the IF statement to skip sweeps if N is negative 230 Exit the program if the value of N is 0 1 100 Getting Started Programming Using the WAI Command Example Program 7 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 The following example illustrates the use of the WAI command to cause the swept CW generator to perform a synchronous sweep Source 719 ABORT 7 LOCAL 7 CLEAR Source REMOTE Source CLS OUTPUT Source RST OUTPUT Source FREQ STAR 4GHZ STOP 5GHZ MODE SWE OUTPUT Source SWE TIME 2 OUTPUT Source 0PC ENTER Source X FOR I 1 TO 4 OUTPUT Source INIT OUTPUT Source WAI OUTPUT Source POW STAT ON OUTPUT Source INIT OUTPUT Source WAI OUTPUT Source
73. 18 auto fill number of points A 19 auto fill start A 20 auto fill stop A 21 automatically set sweep time 5 68 automatic sweep time 1 10 automatic trigger stepped sweep S 61 auto track A 22 auto track failed message 2a 1 auxiliary interface connector C 5 auxiliary output connector C 4 bandwidth ALC A 9 A 10 A 11 beginning frequency flatness correction A 20 frequency list A 20 bits in general status register model 1 106 summary bit in general status register model 1 107 blank display B 1 BNC connectors C 4 Boolean parameters discussed in detail 1 85 explained briefly 1 75 brackets angle 1 64 BUS trigger source defined 1 119 cabinet clean 4 5 cables GPIB C 6 calco fail F 3 calibrate sweep span always S 66 calibrate sweep span once S 67 calibration full user F 14 sweep span F 10 calibration failed message 2a 2 calibration user functions U 3 calman fail F 4 calYO fail F 4 center frequency 1 8 C 1 CW coupled C 12 center frequency marker C 1 CF span sweep mode zoom Z 1 change correction value C 3 change interface address 3 8 characterization diode detectors 1 47 checks operator 4 1 CHL language P 13 clean cabinet 4 5 clean display 4 6 clean fan filter 4 5 clear display B 1 clear fault C 2 clear memory C 2 clear point C 3 clear statement 1 59 CLS S 12 colon examples using 1 69 proper use of 1 69 1 85 types of command where used 1 67 command examples 1 6
74. 19 Instrument Markings ISM1 A The instruction documentation symbol The product is marked with this symbol when it is necessary for the user to refer to the instructions in the documentation The CE mark is a registered trademark of the European Community The CSA mark is a registered trademark of the Canadian Standards Association This is a symbol of an Industrial Scientific and Medical Group 1 Class A product This is an ON symbol The symbol ON is used to mark the position of the instrument power line switch This is an ON symbol The symbol ON is used to mark the position of the instrument power line switch This is a STANDBY symbol The STANDBY symbol is used to mark the position of the instrument power line switch This is an OFF symbol The OFF symbol is used to mark the position of the instrument power line switch This is an AC symbol The AC symbol is used to indicate the required nature of the line module input power xi xii Table 0 1 Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Offices UNITED STATES Instrument Support Center Agilent Technologies 800 403 0801 EUROPEAN FIELD OPERATIONS Headquarters Agilent Technologies S A 150 Route du Nant d Avril 1217 Meyrin 2 Geneva Switzerland 41 22 780 8111 Great Britain Agilent Technologies Ltd Eskdale Road Winnersh Triangle Wokingham Berkshire RG41 5DZ England 44 118 9696622 France Agile
75. 4 Index 3 Index 4 commands 1 80 common 1 67 defined 1 63 event 1 72 implied 1 72 query 1 72 subsystem 1 67 syntax 1 81 commands common IEEE 488 2 S 12 commands SCPI programming S 11 command statements fundamentals 1 57 command tables how to read 1 71 how to use 1 71 command trees defined 1 68 how to change paths 1 68 how to read 1 68 simplified example 1 71 using efficiently 1 69 commas problems with commas in input data 1 65 proper use of 1 69 1 82 common commands 1 67 1 69 defined 1 67 compare analyzer language to SCPI 3 24 compensation negative diode detectors 1 47 condition register 1 106 connections to HP Agilent 83550 series mm wave modules 3 22 to HP Agilent 8510 network analyzer 3 21 to HP Agilent 8757C E scalar analyzer 3 21 to HP Agilent 8970B noise figure meter 3 22 connector 10 MHz reference input C 5 10 MHz reference output C 5 auxiliary interface C 5 auxiliary output C 4 external ALC C 4 GPIB C 6 RF output C 10 source module interface C 9 stop sweep in out C 4 sweep output C 4 trigger input C 5 trigger output C 5 volts GHz C 5 Z axis blank markers C 5 connectors C 4 10 connectors mating 3 8 CONT 1 12 C 10 continuous leveling L 1 continuous sweep 1 12 C 10 continuous wave frequency C 12 control attenuator separately U 1 controller defined 1 63 controller definition of 1 56 control power level P 2 conventions typeface viii coolin
76. 5 GPIB syntax error message 2a 3 GPIB trigger stepped sweep mode S 62 sweep mode 55 grounding pin 3 4 Group Execute Trigger 1 119 group execute trigger command S 15 HP Agilent 437B detector calibration E 5 programming address M 8 HP Agilent 437B flatness correction measure all M 7 HP Agilent 437B measure correction M 7 M 8 HP Agilent 437B measure correction functions M 13 HP Agilent 8340 41 system convert to 8360 system 3 19 HP Agilent 83550 series interface connector C 9 HP Agilent 83550 series system connections 3 22 HP Agilent 8510 system connections 3 21 HP Agilent 8516A interface connector C 5 HP Agilent 8970B system connections 3 22 HP Agilent HP Agilent 8757C E system connections 3 21 humidity range 3 9 identify current datecode S 52 identifying string S 12 identify options command S 12 idle trigger state 1 109 details of operation 1 111 1 112 in general programming model 1 110 IDN S 12 IEEE mailing address 1 120 IEEE 488 1 how to get a copy 1 120 IEEE 488 2 how to get a copy 1 120 IEEE 488 2 common commands S 12 IM Mediate set by RST 1 112 trigger command defined 1 118 trigger command discussed 1 112 trigger source defined 1 119 implied commands 1 72 increment key A 16 increment step size CW frequency U 2 power U 1 increment step size swept frequency U 3 initial inspection 3 1 initialize the swept CW generator P 8 INITiate CONTinuous initiatecont usage di
77. 5 GHz to 20 GHz 45 gt 20 GHz to lt 26 5 GHz 43 26 5 GHz to lt 38 GHz 39 38 GHz to 50 GHz 37 2c 8 Specifications Single Sideband Phase Noise Offset from Carrier dBc Hz Band s 100 Hz 1 kHz 10kHz 100kHz 10 MHz to lt 7 GHz 70 78 86 107 7 GHz to lt 13 5 GHz 64 72 80 101 13 5 GHz to 20 GHz 60 68 76 97 gt 20 GHz to lt 26 5 GHz 58 66 74 95 26 5 GHz to lt 38 GHz 54 62 70 91 38 GHz to 50 GHz 52 60 68 89 Typical Phase Noise 10GHz Carrier 40 60 80 dBc 100 120 140 100Hz 1kHz 10kHz 100kHz IMHz JOMHz Offset From Carrier Residual FM CW Mode or Sweep Widths lt n x 10 MHz n x 60 Hz typical RMS 50 Hz to 15 kHz Sweep Widths gt n x 10 MHz n x 15 kHz typical bandwidth 10 Frequency range is 26 5 GHz to 40 GHz on the 83640L Specifications 2c 9 General Environmental Warmup Time Power Requirements Weight amp Dimensions 2c 10 Adapters Supplied Specifications Operating Temperature Range 0 to 55 C Altitude Up to 4572 meters Humidity 5 to 80 relative at 25 to 40 C Enclosure Protection IP20 according to IEC 529 This product is designed for use in INSTALLATION CATEGORY II and POLLUTION DEGREE 2 per IEC 1010 and 664 respectively EMC Within limits of CISPR Pub 11 1990 Group 1 Class A and Mil Std 461C Part 7 RE02 Operatio
78. 7 Select the appropriate triggering scheme 8 Activate the slave mode on the slave swept CW generator 9 Activate the master mode on the master swept CW generator By connecting the master s 10 MHz reference standard to the slave s 10 MHz reference input the master swept CW generator s timebase supplies the frequency reference for both swept CW generators In step sweep measurements if the master swept CW generator is not connected to an external controller it must automatically trigger the steps Set Step Swp Pt Trig Auto on the master When a the scalar network analyzer is the step sweep controller set Step Swp Pt Trig Bus on the master swept CW generator so that the analyzer can trigger the steps SCPI SWEep CONTrol STATe ON OFF 1 0 SWEep CONTrol TYPE MAS Ter Analyzer NONE Step Control Slave Step Swp Menu Operating and Programming Reference S 57 Step Control Slave Function Group Menu Map Description FREQUENCY This softkey lets you designate the swept CW generator as the slave in a dual swept CW generator measurement system A dual swept CW generator system two tone measurement system facilitates accurate device characterizations by providing one timebase reference for both sources Figure 5 1 shows the connections required for a two tone system On the message line the status message EXT REF appears indicating the swept CW generator has an external timebase reference The start and stop frequenc
79. 8 dBm ATTENUATOR LO 10 dB a LO FEED LO LEVEL THROUGH 10 dBm DETECTOR SdBm IF MEASURES 15 dBm REVERSE POWER DETECTOR ALC LEVEL Figure 1 17 Reverse Power Effects Uncoupled Operation with 8dBm Output Getting Started Advanced 1 31 Working with Spectrum Analyzers Reverse Power Effects 1 32 Getting Started Advanced Reverse power is a problem with spectrum analyzers that do not have preselection capability Some analyzers have as much as 5 dBm LO feedthrough coming out of their RF input at some frequencies The effects of reverse power are less in the heterodyne band 0 01 to 2 0 GHz where the power amplifier provides some broadband matching Similarly at frequencies above 2 0 GHz reverse power that is within 10 MHz of the swept CW generator s frequency may be partially absorbed by the YIG filter If the frequency difference is small enough to be within the leveling system bandwidth typically 10 kHz CW 200 kHz sweep or AM the effect of reverse power is amplitude modulation of the swept CW generator s output The AM rate equals the difference in RF frequencies Reverse power problems may be treated by using the unleveled mode There are two unleveled modes ALC off and search To set the swept CW generator to the ALC off mode 1 Refer to menu map 1 2 Press ALC 3 Select Leveling Mode ALCoff In this mode the swept CW generator provides RF power with no ALC correction and ther
80. 95 save recall 1 97 setting up a sweep 1 93 synchronous sweep 1 101 program examples 1 87 105 programmable flatness array C 11 program message examples 1 72 program messages defined 1 63 program message terminators affect on current path 1 68 defined 1 81 syntax diagram 1 80 use in examples 1 64 programming language analyzer P 13 CHL P 18 SCPI P 14 SCPI commands 11 23 programming language comparison 3 24 programming languages definition of H 1 programming language selection 3 6 pulse envelope optimizing 1 49 pulse input BNC P 15 pulse on off scalar P 15 pwron fail F 3 queries defined 1 63 discussed 1 66 queries example program 1 95 query commands 1 72 query only 1 72 query only 1 72 query status byte S 14 Index 17 Index 18 rack flange kit contents 3 13 rack flange kit installation 3 14 rack flange kit no handles 3 13 rack flange kit with handles 3 15 rack mount slide installation 3 11 rack mount slide kit contents 3 10 ramp fail F 2 ramp sweep mode 65 range power meter P 16 RCL S 13 rear panel connectors C 4 recall instrument state command S 13 recall key R 1 recall registers 1 16 recall registers lost message 2a 4 recall save example program 1 97 reference oscillator functions R 1 register accessing of 1 16 register save S 1 related documents 1 63 remote statement 1 57 remove key from user defined menu U 5 replace line fuse 4 4 reset swept CW
81. A 437B HP Agilent 8485A HP Agilent 11667B HP Agilent 1740A HP Agielnt 83556A HP Agilent 8349B HP Agilent 11691D HP Agilent 8474D Getting Started Basic Introducing the The 8360 L Series Swept CW Generators are high performance Agilent 8360 broadband frequency swept CW generators L Series Swept CW Generators SELECT Be e amp es amp PRESET presetl Figure 1 1 The 8360 L Series Swept CW Generator PRESET initializes the front panel settings and runs the swept CW generator through a brief self test In the following examples unless stated otherwise begin by pressing PRESET Getting Started Basic 1 3 Display Area ACTIVE ENTRY AND DATA DISPLAY AREA MESSAGE LINE SOFTKEY LABEL AREA 1 4 Getting Started Basic SOFTKEYS Figure 1 2 Display Active Entry and Data Display Area This area typically displays the frequency and power information of the current instrument state When data entry is expected the swept CW generator uses all or part of this area to record the entries The active entry arrow gt indicates the active entry function and its current value Message Line This line is used to display ALC level status Unlock information Timebase status RF output status Softkey Label Area This area displays the name of the softkey directly below it Softkeys These keys activate t
82. A 1 shipment 3 17 shipping damage 3 1 single 1 12 single frequency C 12 single sweep 1 12 5 51 slave step control S 57 slope power P 6 softkey label area 1 4 software revision 5 52 SOURce in general programming model 1 112 trigger command defined 1 119 source module interface L 4 source module interface connector C 9 M 10 M 11 M 12 source module interface mnemonics C 9 source module leveling L 4 source module selection M 9 M 10 M 11 M 12 space proper use of 1 69 span fail F 2 span frequency 5 52 span key S 52 Index 19 Index 20 span operation 1 8 S parameter test set interface connector C 5 specifications 2 1 spectral purity enhancement of 1 49 spectrum analyzers 1 32 square wave pulses scalar P 15 SRE S 14 SRQ analyzer language A 13 standard event status enable register S 12 standard event status register clear S 12 standard event status register query value S 12 standard frequency chosen automatically T 1 standard frequency external T 1 standard frequency internal T 2 standard frequency none T 2 standard notation 1 64 standard operation status register clear S 12 start frequency S 53 flatness correction A 20 frequency list A 20 start m1 stop m2 S 54 start stop frequency 1 6 start sweep trigger S 54 start sweep trigger bus S 55 start sweep trigger external 55 status display D 5 status byte clear S 12 status byte query S 14 status bytes analyz
83. AGnostics TEST RESult e DIAGnostics TEST RESult lt num gt Queries the result of a selftest by number The response is a string containing either Passed Failed or NotRun If lt num gt is missing an array of selftest results are returned e DIAGnostics TINT lt num gt A test feature that returns the value passed to it This is used to test the GPIB interface e DISPlayl STATe ON OFF 1 0 e DISPlay STATe Sets and queries the display ON OFF switch After RST the value is 1 Any two frequency setting headers STARt STOP CENTer or SPAN may be sent in a single message and the resulting sweep is what was requested The order of the headers in the message does not make any difference in the final result When a message is completed coupling equations are used to fix the unset parameters to the correct values These equations specify that center frequency start stop 2 frequency span stop start If more than two are sent then the last two in the message are used to determine the sweep and no errors are given If only one header is sent in a message then the assumed pairs are center span and start stop In other words if only center is sent then span is kept constant if possible while adjusting center to the Operating and Programming Reference S 29 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY requested value The start stop frequencies are updated to reflect the changes based on the coupling equations The sw
84. ATe STATe VA Lue VA Lue DELTa MODE MODE a POWer ALC CFACtor CFACtor SOURce SOURce STATe Operating and Programming Reference S 9 SCPI Conformance Information STATe AMPLifier STATE AUTO AUTO STATE CENTer CENTer OF FSet STATe STATe OFFSet SEARch SLOPe STATe STATe SLOPe STATe STATe STEP AUTO AUTO INCRement INCRement a STATus MSIB CONDition ENA Ble ENA Ble EVENt NTRansition NTRansition PTRansition PTRansition SREceiver CONDition ENA Ble ENA Ble EVENt NTRansition NTRansition PTRansition PTRansition a SWEep CONTrol STATe TYPE MANual POINt POINt S 10 Operating and Programming Reference SCPI Conformance Information RELative RELative MARKer STATe STATe XFER TRIGger SOURce SOURce a SYSTem DUMP PRINter PRINter ERRor KEY ASSign CLEar CODE CODE DISable ENA Ble LANGuage MMHead SELect AUTO AUTO SELect PRESet EXECute SAVE TYPE SECurity COUnt COUnt a TRIGger ODELay ODELay m TS Weep a UNIT POWer POWer Operating and Programming Reference SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY Introduction IEEE 488 2 Common Commands This entry is organized as follows 1 IEEE 488 2 common commands in alphabetical order 2 Command table of SCPI programming commands 3 Alphabetical listing of com
85. Agilent Technologies 8360 L Series Swept CW Generator Including Option 001 004 and 008 User s Guide Serial Number Prefixes This manual applies to any swept CW generator with the model and serial number prefix combination shown below You may have to modfiy this manual so that it applies directly to your instrument version Refer to the Instrument History chapter Agilent Technologies 83623L 30L 3844A and Below Agilent Technologies 83640L 50L 4040A and Below opie Agilent Technologies Part No 08360 90134 Printed in USA March 2001 Supersedes October 2000 Notice Restricted Rights Legend The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice Agilent Technologies makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Agilent Technologies shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material Use duplication or disclosure by the U S Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights of Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 for DOD agencies and subparagraphs c 1 and c 2 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52 227 19 for other agencies C
86. Also Leveling Pointintrnl SCPI POWer ALC STATe SEARch Analyzer SHA1 atc Pulse Modulation Working with Spectrum Analyzers Reverse Power Effects in Chapter 1 Leveling Point ExtDet Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also ALC This softkey lets you set the swept CW generator to accept an external feedback connection from a negative output diode detector to level power The EXT ALC BNC is the input connection for the required signal An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI POWer ALC SOURCce DIODe POWer ATTenuation AUTO OFF 0 Analyzer A2 a Externally Leveling the Swept CW Generator in Chapter 1 Leveling Point Intrnl Function Group ALC Operating and Programming Reference L 3 Leveling PointIntrnl Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also This softkey lets you set the swept CW generator to level at the output of the directional coupler located inside the swept CW generator An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI POWer ALC SOURce INTernal Analyzer Al a Leveling Point Module Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also ALC This softkey lets you set the swept CW generator to level at the output of an HP Agilent 8355X series millimeter wave source module All models of the 8360 L Series swept CW generator dr
87. Analyzer NONE Freq Cal Menu Using Frequency Calibration Swp Span Cal Once Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also USER CAL This softkey activates sweep span calibration immediately and performs it only once An asterisk next to the key label indicates this feature is active SCPI CALibration 5PAN EXECute Analyzer NONE Freq Cal Menu Using Frequency Calibration Operating and Programming Reference S 67 Sup Span CalOnce SWEEP TIME Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SWEEP This hardkey lets you set a sweep time for frequency sweeps or power sweeps The sweep time range is 10 ms to 200s but the fastest sweep time is constrained by the frequency span The fastest possible sweep can be determined automatically 1 Press SWEEP MENU this reveals the sweep menu keys 2 Select more 1 3 to scroll to the next page of the sweep menu 3 Select SwpTime Auto to set the sweep time to automatic The swept CW generator calculates the fastest possible calibrated sweep time for any sweep span Whenever you press SWEEP TIME the active entry area displays the current sweep time and whether the sweep time is coupled to the frequency span far right hand side displays AUTO If the word AUTO is not displayed then the sweep time auto function is off SCPI SWEep FREQuency TIME lt num gt time suffix or MAXimum MINimum Anal
88. C 625 capability these are common generic terms for GPIB all are electrically equivalent although IEC 625 uses a unique connector This portion of the manual specifically describes interfacing the swept CW generator to one type of instrument a computer The first part of this section provides general GPIB information Later the Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments language SCPI is introduced and example programs are given For information on programming in the Control Interface Intermediate Language CIIL refer to a separate option 700 manual supplement When programming commands relating to modulation are sent to the 8360 L Series swept CW generator the commands are parsed but no action is taken on the command Also no error message is generated Getting Started Programming 1 55 GPIB General Information Interconnecting Cables Instrument Addresses GPIB Instrument Nomenclature Programming the Swept CW Generator Figure C 2 shows the swept CW generator rear panel GPIB connector and suitable cables and describes the procedures and limitations for interconnecting instruments Cable length restrictions also described in Figure C 2 must be observed Each instrument in an GPIB network must have a unique address ranging in value from 00 30 decimal The default address for the swept CW generator is 19 but this can be changed using the My Adrs softkey or rear panel switch as described in the
89. DISPlay STATe state Boolean ON OFF 1 0 FREQuency CENTer center freq extended numeric specified freq range or MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN CW CW freq extended numeric specified freq range or MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN AUTO coupled to Boolean ON OFF 1 0 center freq MANual manual freq extended numeric start stop limits or MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN MODE free mode discrete CW SWEep LIST MULTiplier freq mult extended numeric 36 to 36 or MAXimum MINimum STATe state Boolean ON OFF 1 0 OFFSet freq offset extended numeric 99 999 to 99 999 GHz or MAXimum MINimum STATe state Boolean ON OFF 1 0 SPAN freq span extended numeric 0 to MAX MIN MA Ximum MINimum UP DOWN STARt start freq extended numeric specified freq range or MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN STEP AUTO auto freq step Boolean ON OFF 1 0 INCRement freq step extended numeric range or MA Ximum MINimum STOP stop freq extended numeric specified freq range or MA Ximum MINimum UP DOWN INITiate CONTinuous cont sweep Boolean ON OFF 1 0 IM Mediate sweep immediately S 18 Operating and Programming Reference SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY Table S 1 8360 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY continued Command Parameters Parameter Type Allowed Values LIST DWELI dwell time extended numeric 0 1 to 3200 ms 801 or MA Ximum MINimum 1 801 POINts FREQuency list freq extended numeric specified freq range 801 or MA Ximum MINimum 1 801 POINts num of freq points e
90. E RF OUTPUT fe 437B CABLES AND OTHER POWER METER Ui DEVICES Ww 7 FLATNESS CORRECTED OUTPUT PORT l POHER SENSOR t A DEVICE UNDER TEST flattl Figure 1 18 Creating a User Flatness Array Automatically 1 34 Getting Started Advanced Note No other devices can be connected to the GPIB cable Set up Swept CW Generator Parameters 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 On the swept CW generator press PRESET FREQUENCY START 4 GHz STOP 2 0 GHz POWER LEVEL 0 dB m Access User Flatness Correction Menu Press POWER MENU Select Fltness Menu Select Delete Menu Delete All This step insures that the flatness array is empty Press PRIOR Leave the delete menu and return to the previous softkey menu Enter the frequency points at which the correction information will be taken Choose either the point by point entry method Enter Freq or the automatic frequency point generation Auto Fill Start For this example select Auto Fill Start 4 GHz Select Auto Fill Stop 4 0 GHz Auto Fill Incr C Ghz Notice that a frequency list starting at 4 and ending at 10 GHz with an increment value of 1 GHz is created Enter Correction Data into Array Select Mtr Meas Menu Measure Corr All The power meter is now under swept CW generator control and is performing the sequence of steps necessary to generate the correction information at each fr
91. E MODULE INTERFACE TEST PORT smflatl Figure 1 20 Creating Arbitrarily Spaced Frequency Correction Pairs in a Swept mm wave Environment For this example refer to menu map 5 POWER 1 The equipment setup shown in Figure 1 20 assumes that you have followed the steps necessary to correctly level the configuration If you have questions about external leveling refer to Externally Leveling the Swept CW Generator Set up Power Meter 2 Zero and calibrate the power meter sensor 3 Connect the power sensor to test port 4 Enter and store in the power meter the power sensor s cal factors for correction frequencies to be used 1 40 Getting Started Advanced Note U V and W band power sensors are not available from Agilent For these frequencies use the Anritsu ML83A Power Meter with the MP715 004 40 to 60 GHz the MP716A 50 to 75 GHz or the MP81B 75 to 110 GHz power sensors Since the Anritsu model ML83A Power Meter is not capable of internally storing power sensor cal factors you must manually correct the data entry Refer to example 2 for information on manual entry of correction data 10 11 12 Set up Swept CW Generator Parameters Turn on the swept CW generator and press PRESET The following occurs m The source module s frequency span is displayed on the swept CW generator m The swept CW generator s leveling mode is automatically changed from internal to module
92. EFINED MENU UsrKey Clear U 6 Operating and Programming Reference Zero Freq Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SYSTEM This softkey lets you enable a security feature that displays zeroes for all accessible frequency information Once this security feature is activated it can be turned off by a front panel PRESET An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI SYSTem SECurity STATe ON Analyzer NONE Security Menu Zoom Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY This softkey activates the CF Span sweep mode zoom In this mode span is controlled by the up down arrow keys Center frequency is controlled by the rotary knob or the numeric entry keys The left and right arrows control the resolution with which the center frequency can be changed This is a front panel only feature and is inaccessible over GPIB SCPI NONE Analyzer NONE CENTER FAW Operating and Programming Reference Z 1 Index 10 MHz frequency standard chosen automatically T 1 10 MHz frequency standard external T 1 10 MHz frequency standard internal T 2 10 MHz frequency standard none chosen T 2 10 MHz reference functions R 1 10 MHz reference input connector C 5 10 MHz reference output connector C 5 1601 point flatness array C 11 2 4 mm connector C 10 27 778 kHz square wave P 15 3 5 mm connector
93. EMOTE Source 140 LOCAL LOCKOUT 7 150 PRINT 160 PRINT Source should now be in LOCAL LOCKOUT mode 170 PRINT Verify that all keys including LOCAL have no effect 180 PRINT press CONTINUE 190 PAUSE 200 LOCAL Source 210 PRINT 220 PRINT Source should now be in LOCAL mode 230 PRINT Verify that the swept signal generator s keyboard is functional 240 END To verify and investigate the different remote modes do the following 1 Reset the controller 2 On the swept CW generator Press PRESET 3 Clear the controller display and run the program 4 Verify that the REMOTE LED on the swept CW generator is lit 5 From the front panel attempt to change the start frequency and verify that this is impossible Verify that all keys except are disabled 7 Now press the LOCAL key and verify that the swept CW generator REMOTE LED is off and that you can modify any of the sweep functions D 8 Execute a continue on the controller With the controller displaying LOCAL LOCKOUT mode verify that the swept CW generator REMOTE LED is again lit Getting Started Programming 1 91 9 Attempt to change the start frequency and press PRESET Verify that this is impossible 10 Now press the swept CW generator LOCAL key and verify that still no action is taken 11 Execute a continue on the controller With the controller displaying LOCAL mode verify that the swept CW ge
94. ESET gt Preset Mode Factory Preset Mode User Printer Adrs Programming Language Analyzr Programming Language CIIL Programming Language SCPI Pt Trig Menu Pulse On OffScalar Pwr Mtr Range M 8 M 9 M 9 M 10 M 11 M 11 M 12 M 13 M 13 M 14 P 1 P 2 P 2 P 5 P 6 P 7 P 8 P 9 P 10 P 11 P 11 P 12 P 13 P 13 P 14 P 15 P 15 P 16 Contents 7 Contents 8 R RECALL Ref Osc Menu ROTARY KNOB Save Lock Save User Preset SCPI Conformance Information SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY SCPI STATUS REGISTER STRUCTURE Security Menu Selftest Full Set Atten Software Rev SPAN Start ss Start M1 Stop M2 Start Sweep Trigger Auto Start Sweep Trigger Bus Start Sweep Trigger Ext Step Control Master Step Control Slave Step Dwell Step Points Step Size Step Swp Menu Step Swp PtTrig Auto step Swp PtTrig Bus Step Swp PtTrig Ext SWEEP menu Sweep Mode List Sweep Mode Ramp Sweep Mode Step Swp Span CalAlways Swp Span Cal0nce SWEEP TIME Swplime Auto Lone SYSTEM MENU gt R 1 R 1 R 2 R 2 S 1 S 2 S 2 S 3 S 12 S 48 S 50 S 51 S 51 S 52 S 52 S 53 S 53 S 54 S 55 S 55 S 56 S 56 S 58 S 59 S 60 S 60 S 61 S 62 S 62 S 63 S 63 S 64 S 65 S 66 S 66 S 67 S 67 S 68 S 68 S 69 2a 2b 10 MHz Freq Std Auto 10 MHz Freq Std Extrnl 10 MHz Freq Std Intrnl 10 MHz Freq Std None Tracking Menu TrigQut Delay Unc
95. Enable CONDITION REGISTER STAT QUES COND NEGATIVE TRANSITION FILTER STAT QUES NTR lt num gt STAT QUES NTR POSITIVE TRANSITION FILTER STAT QUES PTR lt num gt STAT QUES PTR ENABLE REGISTER STAT QUES ENAB lt num gt STAT QUES ENAB EVENT REGISTER STAT QUES C EVENT Operating and Programming Reference S 49 security Menu Function Group Menu Map Description See Also SYSTEM This softkey accesses the security function softkeys Blank Display Turns off the swept CW generator s data display active entry and message line areas Clear Memory Writes alternating ones and zeros over all swept CW generator state functions and save recall registers a selectable number of times then returns the swept CW generator to the factory preset state of operation Save Lock Disables the save function Zero Freq Displays zeros for all accessible frequency information The features listed above together with the softkeys Freq Offset and Freq Mult provide the swept CW generator with security controls for a variety of situations The local lockout LLO programming command adds security when the swept CW generator is used in an ATE environment A security calibration constant that can be accessed through the service adjustment menu requires a password for access is available also Refer to the Agilent Technologies 8360 B Series Swept Signal Generator 8360 L Series Swept CW Generator Service Guide for informa
96. F Unlocked External Oven Over Self Test Indicator Failure Frequency Cold Modulation Failed On Reference Selected Status Byte 1 Bit 0 SRQ caused by a key closure on the front panel of the swept CW generator use the OM code to determine the front panel status Bit 1 SRQ caused by the completion of a numeric entry use the OA code to determine the value of the numerical entry Bit 2 SRQ caused by a change in the extended status byte status byte 2 affected by the RE coded mask see the RE code for an explanation of this masking Bit 3 SRQ caused by the completion of phase locking and the settling of the RF source use the OK code to determine the last lock frequency Bit 4 SRQ on end of sweep or mid sweep update in NA network analyzer code mode Bit 5 SRQ caused by GPIB syntax error Bit 6 SERVICE REQUEST by IEFEE 488 convention the instrument needs service from the controller when this bit is set true Bit 7 SRQ caused by a change in the coupled parameters start frequency center frequency and sweep time Use the OC code to determine the new values of the coupled parameters Status Byte 2 Extended Status Byte Bit 0 Self test failed at power on or at Instrument Preset This bit remains latched until this status byte has been read or until cleared by the CS or CLEAR 719 commands Bit 1 Excessive amplitude modulation input A 14 Operating and Programming Reference
97. FREQuency MULTiplier 2 MULTiplier STATE ON FREQuency CW 5 GHZ Example 4 FREQ 5 GHZ POWER 4 DBM Notice that in this example the keyword short form is used The command is correct It utilizes the default nodes of CW and LEVEL Since default nodes do not affect the current path it is not necessary to use a leading colon before POWER Parameter Types As you saw in the example command table for SWEep there are several types of parameters The parameter type indicates what kind of values are valid instrument settings The most commonly used parameter types are numeric extended numeric discrete and Boolean These common types are discussed briefly in the following paragraphs The paragraph titled Details of Commands and Responses explains all parameter types in greater depth Numeric Parameters Numeric parameters are used in both subsystem commands and common commands Numeric parameters accept all commonly used decimal representations of numbers including optional signs decimal points and scientific notation If an instrument accepts only specific numeric values such as integers it automatically rounds numeric parameters to fit its needs Getting Started Programming 1 73 Examples of numeric parameters 100 no decimal point required 100 fractional digits optional 1 23 leading signs allowed 4 56e lt space gt 3 space allowed after e in exponents 7 89E 01 use either E or e in exponentials 256 leading a
98. Front Panel 1601 Points of Correction Data 1601 Points for ALC 1601 Points of Correction 1601 Points of Internal Data Calibration Data Figure F 3 The Sources of ALC Calibration Correction Data If the correction frequency span is only a subset of the start stop frequency span set on the source no corrections are applied to the portion of the sweep that is outside the correction frequency span The following example illustrates how the data is distributed within the user flatness correction array Assume that the swept CW generator is set to sweep from 2 to 18 GHz but you only enter user flatness correction data from 14 to 18 GHz Linear interpolation occurs between the correction entries to provide the 401 points required for the 14 to 18 GHz portion of the array No corrections are applied to the 2 to 13 99 GHz portion of the array Refer to Figure F 4 Point Number 0 1200 1600 No Corrections Applied 401 Points of Data Frequency 2GHz 14UGHz 18GHz 1st Corr Freq Figure F 4 Array Configuration when the Correction Data Frequency Span is a Subset of the Swept CW Generator Frequency Span Number of points interpolated between correction entries is calculated as follows freq span between correction entries 1600 1 Number of pts stop frequency start frequency When correction frequencies are arbitrarily spaced the number of interpolated points varies F 8 Operating and Programmi
99. GET gt or TRG over the GPIB before advancing to the next frequency in the list AUTO BUS AUTO EX Ternal Wait for a signal to be received on the external input before advancing to the next frequency in the list MANual Don t care Only the list point specified by LIST MANual is played back RST state is AUTO e LIST POWer CORRection lt num gt DB MAXimum MINimum 1 801 e LIST POWer CORRection Sets and queries the list of correction levels that correspond to each of the frequencies entered using the LIST FREQ command The attenuator is not allowed to change during the list execution The number of parameters can be from 1 to 801 After RST the value is 0 e LIST POWer CORRection POINts MAXimum MINimum Returns the number of correction points that have been entered into the list array After RST returns a 1 e LIST TRIGger SOURce IMMediate BUS EXTernal e LIST TRIGger SOURce Sets and queries the list point to point trigger source when in the automatic list mode See LIST MODE and INIT CONT for more details RST state is IMMediate e MARKer n AMPLitude STATe ON OFF 1 0 e MARKer n AMPLitude STATe Sets and queries the amplitude marker on off switch While n may be used there is really only a single switch for all the markers RST value is OFF e MARKer n AMPLitude VALue lt num gt DB MAXimum MINimum e MARKer n AMPLitude VALue MAXimum MINimum Sets and queri
100. Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also ALC This softkey allows specification of the coupling factor of an external coupler detector used to externally level the swept CW generator output power Negative coupling factor values are required for valid entry See Specifications for the coupling factor range SCPI POWer ALC CFACtor lt num gt dB MAXimum MINimum Analyzer NONE a Externally Leveling the Swept CW Generator in Chapter 1 Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY This hardkey lets you select a synthesized continuous wave frequency When you press cw the swept CW generator stops sweeping green SWEEP LED off and displays gt CW XXXXX MHz where XXXXX represents a frequency value Use either the rotary knob the step keys with or without the left right arrow keys or the numerical entry keys with a terminator key to set the desired value If a small change is desired use the left and right arrow keys to underline the digit to be changed SCPI FREQuency CW lt num gt freq suffix or MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN FREQuency MODE CW Analyzer CW CW CF Coupled START STOP CW Operation and Start Stop Frequency Sweep in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 C 12 Operating and Programming Reference CW CF Coupled CW CF Coupled Function Group Menu Map Description Programming
101. INts num of freq extended numeric MA Ximum MINimum correction pairs SOURce 0 1 correction source discrete ARRay FLATness STATe state Boolean ON OFF 1 0 1 Parameter types are explained in the Getting Started Programming chapter S 16 Operating and Programming Reference SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY Table S 1 8360 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY continued Command Parameters Parameter Type Allowed Values DIAGnostics ABUS AV ERage ADC averages extended numeric lt num gt STATus INSTrument PME Ter ADDRess power meter address extended numeric 1 to 31 PRINter ADDRess printer address extended numeric 1 to 31 ORW I O device extended numeric lt num gt lt num gt number and value OUTPut FAULts RESult TEST CONTinue DATA DESC MAXimum MINimum VALue DISable disable listed extended numeric lt num gt 1 ALL selftests or discrete ENABle enable listed extended numeric lt num gt 1 ALL selftests or discrete EXECute extended numeric 0 to 288 LOG SOURce log when discrete ALL FAIL STATe state Boolean ON OFF 1 0 LOOP state Boolean ON OFF 1 0 NAME selftest number extended numeric 0 to 288 POINts number of selftests RESult condition of selftests TINT Operating and Programming Reference S 17 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY Table S 1 8360 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY continued Command Parameters Parameter Type Allowed Values
102. MA Ximum MINimum UP DOWN AUTO coupled atten Boolean ON OFF 1 0 CENTer power sweep extended numeric specified power range or center MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN LEVel output level extended numeric specified power range or MA Ximum MINimum UP DOWN MODE power mode discrete FIXed SWEep OFFSet power equation extended numeric lt num gt level suffix or offset MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN STATe state Boolean ON OFF 1 0 RANGe power meter extended numeric 30 to 90DB or range MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN SEARch search mode Boolean ON OFF 1 OJONCE SLOPe power slope extended numeric 2 5 to 2 5DB GHZ or MA Ximum MINimum UP DOWN STATe state Boolean ON OFF 1 0 SPAN power sweep extended numeric 45 to 45DB or span MA Ximum MINimum UP DOWN STARt power sweep extended numeric specified power range or start value MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN STATe RF on off Boolean ON OFF 1 0 STEP AUTO step size determined Boolean ON OFF 1 0 INCRement step size extended numeric 20 to 0 01DB or MA Ximum MINimum STOP power sweep extended numeric specified power range or stop value MA Ximum MINimum UP DOWN S 20 Operating and Programming Reference SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY Table S 1 8360 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY continued filter Command Parameters Parameter Type Allowed Values PULM SOURce pulse mod source discrete SCALar STATe state Boolean ONJOFF 1 0 ROSCillator SOURce ref osc source discrete INT
103. Mode AUT Doubler Amp Mode Off Doubler Amp Mode On Dwell Coupled 8360 Adrs Enter Corr Enter Freq Enter List Dwell Enter List Freq Enter List Offset ENTRY KEYS ENTRY ON OFF Ext Det Cal B 1 C 1 C 2 C 2 C 3 C 4 C 4 C 10 C 11 C 11 C 12 C 12 C 13 D 1 D 2 D 2 D 3 D 3 D 4 D 5 D 5 D 7 D 7 D 8 D 9 Contents 5 Contents 6 Fault Menu Fault Info 1 Fault Info 2 Fault Info 3 Fltness Menu FLTNESS ON OFF Freq Cal Menu Freq Follow FREQUENCY menu Freq Mult Freq Offset FullUsr Cal Global Dwell Global Offset HP IB Address HP IB Menu Leveling ModeALCoff Leveling ModeNormal Leveling ModeSearch Leveling PointExtDet Leveling PointIntrnl Leveling PointModule Leveling PointPwrMtr LINE SWITCH List Menu List Mode Pt TrigAuto List Mode Pt IrigBus List Mode Pt Irigkxt F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 10 F 11 F 11 F 12 F 13 F 14 F 14 G 1 G 1 H 1 H 1 L 1 L 2 L 2 L 3 L 3 L 4 L 5 L 5 L 6 L 8 L 9 L 9 L 10 Mi M2 Sweep Manual Sweep MARKER Marker M1 Marker M2 Marker M3 Marker M4 Marker M5 Markers All Off Measure Corr All Measure Corr Current Measure Corr Undef Meter Adrs mop Module Menu Module Select AUTO Module Select Front Module Select None Module Select Rear more n m Mtr Meas Menu Peak RF Always Peak RF Once POWER MENU Power Offset Power Slope Power Sweep PR
104. More About Commands Query and Event Commands Because you can query any value that you can set the query form of each command is not shown explicitly in the command tables For example the presence of the swept CW generator SWEep DWEL1 command implies that a SWEep DWEL1 also exists If you see a table containing a command ending with a question mark it is a query only command Some commands are events and cannot be queried An event has no corresponding setting if it causes something to happen inside the instrument at a particular instant For example INITiate IMMediate causes a certain trigger sequence to initiate Because it is an event there is no query form of INITiate IMMediate Implied Commands Implied commands appear in square brackets in the command table If you send a subcommand immediately preceding an implied command but do not send the implied command the instrument assumes you intend to use the implied command and behaves just as if you had sent it Note that this means the instrument expects you to include any parameters required by the implied command The following example illustrates equivalent ways to program the swept CW generator using explicit and implied commands Example swept CW generator commands with and without an implied commands SWEep MANual RELative 6 using explicit commands SWEep MANual 6 using implied commands Optional Parameters Optional parameter names are enclosed in square brackets
105. N OFF ON ONCE Immediately performs a power search This leaves POWer SEARch in the ON position OFF not applicable Modulator setting is explicitly set by user e POWer SLOPe lt num gt DB freq suffix MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN e POWer SLOPe MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the RF slope setting dB per Hz FREQ MODE Affect on Slope CW or LIST Rotates around 0 Hz SWEep or STEP Rotates around the start frequency 38 Operating and Programming Reference SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY The RST value is 0 e POWer SLOPe STATe ON OFF 11 0 e POWer SLOPe STATe Sets and queries the power slope state RST value is 0 e POWer SPAN lt num gt DB MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN e POWer SPAN MAXimum MINimum The coupling equations for power sweep are exactly analogous to those for frequency sweep Power sweep is allowed to be negative unlike frequency sweeps RST value is 0 e POWer STARt lt num gt lvl suffix MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN e POWer STARt MAXimum MINimum Default units and units for query response are determined by the command UNIT POWer The coupling equations for power sweep are exactly analogous to those for frequency sweep Power sweep is allowed to be negative unlike frequency sweeps RST value is 0 dBm e POWer STATe ON OFF 1 0 e POWer STATe Sets and queries the output power on off state RST value is OFF e POWer STEP AUTO ON OFF 1 0 e POWer STEP AUTO Sets a
106. NTinuous ON Once one of these conditions is satisfied the trigger system exits downward to the initiate state Note that RST sets INITiate CONTinuous OFF Whenever the trigger system leaves the idle state it sets the instrument s Operation Pending Flag Returning to idle clears the flag The Operation Pending Flag is a special bit inside the instrument that can affect how the instrument responds to certain commands You need to know this fact when using OPC 0PC WAI and other commands Inside the Initiate State Figure 1 37 illustrates the operation of the initiate state NO YES Figure 1 37 Inside the Initiate State If the trigger system is on a downward path it travels directly through the initiate state without restrictions If the trigger system Getting Started Programming 1 111 is on an upward path and INITiate CONTinuous is ON it exits downward to an event detection state If the trigger system is on an upward path and INITiate CONTinuous is OFF it exits upward to the idle state Inside Event Detection States Figure 1 38 illustrates the operation of an arbitrary event detection state named lt state_name gt Typical lt state_names gt are TRIGger ARM STARt and STOP Normal downward execution is controlled by the source command SOURce The lt state_name gt SOURce command specifies which particular input can generate the event required to continue the downward path If the source chosen is a non anal
107. O THE SOURCE AND POWER METER DIM A 5000 B 5000 ASSIGN Source TQ 719 ASSIGN Meter TO 713 INTEGER Error_flag ABORT 7 I ISET UP SOURCE OUTPUT Source RST OUTPUT Source FREQ MODE SWE STAR 2 GHZ STOP 20 GHZ OUTPUT Source SWEEP TIME 200 MS OUTPUT Source POW LEV 5 DBM INIT CONT ON OUTPUT Source 0PC ENTER Source Done I ISET UP POWER METER OUTPUT Meter PR OUTPUT Meter FA OUTPUT Meter TRO I IZERO POWER METER OUTPUT Source POW STAT OFF Zero_meter Meter Source Error_flag IF Error_flag THEN BEEP CLEAR SCREEN PRINT ERROR METER DID NOT COMPLETE ZEROING OPERATION ELSE ISET UP CORRECTION FREQUENCIES IN USER FLATNESS CORRECTION TABLE IOUTPUT Source CORR FLAT Start_freq 2 Stop_freq 20 Increment 1 N Stop_freq Start_freq Increment 1 Getting Started Programming 1 103 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 780 790 800 810 820 830 840 850 860 Freq Start_freq FOR I 1 TO N A A amp VAL Freq amp GHZ Odb Freq Freq Increment NEXT I B LEN A B B 1 B A 1 B OUTPUT Source CORR FLAT B OUTPUT Source POW STAT ON ENTER DATA IN USER CORRECTION TABLE OUTPUT Source CAL PMET FLAT INIT USER ENTER Source Freq WHILE Freq gt 0 Power FNRead_meter Meter Freq OUTPUT Source CAL PME
108. OWer ALC BANDwidth AUTO ON POWer ALC CFACtor 16 DBM POWer ALC SOURce INTernal POWer AMPLifier STATE AUTO ON POWer ATTenuation AUTO ON POWer CENTer O DBM POWer LEVel O DBM POWer MODE FIXed POWer SLOPe 0 POWer SLOPe STATe OFF POWer SPAN O DB POWer STARt O DBM POWer STATe OFF POWer STEP AUTO ON POWer STEP INCRement 10 DB POWer STOP O DBM PULM SOURce SCALar PULM STATe OFF ROSCillator SOURce AUTO ON SWEep DWEL1 100 us SWEep DWEL1 AUTO OFF SWEep POINts 11 SWEep STEP value is StopMAX StartMIN 10 SWEep TIME MINimum SWEep TIME AUTO ON SWEep TIME LLIMit 10 ms SWEep GENeration ANALog SWEep MODE AUTO SWEep MANual POINt 1 SWEep MANuall RELative 0 50 SWEep MARKer STATe OFF SYSTem ALTernate 1 SYSTem ALTernate STATe OFF SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB ADDRess 19 SYSTem MMHead SELect AUTO ON SYSTem SECurity COUNt 1 UNIT POWer DBM e SAV lt num gt The present instrument state is stored in the specified memory register The acceptable numeric range is from 1 to 8 An execution error occurs if you try to save state 0 e SRE lt num gt SRE Sets and queries the value of the Service Request Enable Register S 14 Operating and Programming Reference SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY e STB Queries the Status Byte This is a non destructive read e TRG This command performs the same function as the Group Execute Trigger command defined by IEEE 488 1 e TST A full selftest is performed withou
109. Operating and Programming Reference SCPI Conformance Information DWELI AUTO AUTO DWELI GENeration GENeration MODE MODE POINts POINts STEP STEP TIME AUTO AUTO LLIMit LLIMit TIME a SYSTem ALTernate STATe STATe ALTernate COMMunicate GPIB ADDRess SECurity STATe STATe VERSion a TRIGger IM Mediate SOURce SOURce The following are the SCPI approved commands implemented by the 8360L Series swept CW generators Instrument specific diagnostic commands a DIAGnostics ABUS AVERage AVERage STATus ABUS ERRor ADD INSTrument PMETer ADDRess ADDRess Operating and Programming Reference S 5 SCPI Conformance Information PRINter ADDRess ADDRess ORW IORW LED ACTive ACTive ERRor ERRor LOC Heck TOC Heck OSC ENCW FNDN ENUP HARM IF SAMP YO OUTPut BANDcross FAU Lts FREQs UNLocks YODacs YTMDacs SRECeiver ASTate ASTate BCRoss MODE MODE RSWeep SWAP SWAP BUCKet DIVider DIVider SWEep ARRay 0 1 LOCK LOCK ARRay 0 1 RESult TEST CONTinue DATA DESC MAXimum S 6 Operating and Programming Reference SCPI Conformance Information MINimum VA Lue DISable ENA Ble EXECute LOG SOURce SOURce STATe STATe LOOP LOOP NAME PATCh DATA DATA POINts
110. POINts MAXimum MINimum The above command returns information on how many frequency correction pairs were entered using the CORR FLAT command Analyzer NONE ALC FLTNESS ON OFF List Menu Optimizing Swept CW Generator Performance in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 FLTNESS ON OFF Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER This hardkey applies flatness correction to the swept CW generator RF output If no array has been created pressing this key applies 0 dB of flatness correction at all points The yellow LED above the hardkey lights when user flatness correction is on SCPI CORRection STATe ON OFF 1 0 Analyzer NONE ALC Fltness Menu Optimizing Swept CW Generator Performance in Chapter 1 F 10 Operating and Programming Reference Freq Follow Freq Cal Menu Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also USER CAL This softkey accesses the sweep span calibration menu Performs a sweep span calibration each time the frequency span is changed Swp Span Cal Always Swp Span Cal Once Performs a sweep span calibration SCPI NONE see softkeys listed above Analyzer NONE Softkeys listed above Optimizing Swept CW Generator Performance in Chapter 1 Freq Follow Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER This softkey facilitates the ent
111. PORT scaflatl Figure 1 21 Scalar System Configuration Getting Started Advanced 1 43 Note 1 44 Getting Started Advanced Example Overview In this example you use an HP Agilent 437B power meter to automatically enter correction data into the array It is necessary to turn off the HP Agilent 8757 System Interface controlled from the front panel of the analyzer so that the swept CW generator can temporarily control the power meter over GPIB When the correction data entry process is complete enable user flatness correction and set the desired test port power level Then store the correction table and swept CW generator configuration in the same register that contains the analyzer configuration Re activate the HP Agilent 8757 System Interface and recall the stored register Make sure that user flatness correction is still enabled before making the measurement When an HP Agilent 437B power meter is used to automatically enter the correction data the correction calibration routine automatically turns off any active modulation then re activates the modulation upon the completion of the data entry process Therefore the scalar pulse modulation that is automatically enabled in a scalar measurement system is disabled during an HP Agilent 437B correction calibration The user flatness correction array cannot be stored to a disk You must make sure that the array is stored in one of the eight internal registers Recalling a file fro
112. Programming Reference How To Use This Chapter Programming Language Comparison The operating and programming functions of the synthesizer are listed in alphabetical order Each entry has a complete description complete programming codes and a cross reference to the main function group and respective menu map Cross references to operating and programming examples located in Chapter 1 Getting Started are also given Error messages instrument specifications and menu maps are located in their own tabbed sections Menu maps can be folded out and viewed at the same time as the alphabetical entry See the illustration below For operator s service information see the Chapter 4 Operator s Check and Routine Maintenance The operator accessible SERVICE softkeys are described in that chapter Complete SERVICE menu and softkey information is provided in the Agilent Technologies 8360 B Series Swept Signal Generator 8360 L Series Swept CW Generator Service Guide Table 3 9 cross references the actions that the instrument can perform with the programming commands that will prompt those actions Operating and Programming Reference 2 1 Error Messages 2a Introduction WARNING Front Panel Error Messages in Alphabetical Order This section lists the error messages that may be displayed by
113. ST OUTPUT Response RST PRINT Voltage Controlled Oscillator Test PRINT PRINT Source Used Getting Started Programming 1 77 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 OUTPUT Stimulus IDN ENTER Stimulus Id PRINT Id PRINT PRINT Counter Used OUTPUT Response IDN ENTER Response Id PRINT Id PRINT OUTPUT Stimulus OUTPUT ON PRINT PRINT INPUT mv QUTPUT kHz PRINT Meee eee n None eee eee eee u PRINT FOR Testpoint First TO Last OUTPUT Stimulus SOURCE VOLT VAL Testpoint 1000 0PC ENTER Stimulus Dummy OUTPUT Response MEAS FREQ ENTER Response Reading PRINT Testpoint Reading 1000 NEXT Testpoint OUTPUT Source OUTPUT OFF END Program Comments Lines 20 to 70 Declare variables and I O paths for instruments I O paths let you use a name for an instrument in OUTPUT and ENTER statements instead of a numeric address 80 to 100 Assign values to the input test limits in mV 110 to 130 Clear the instrument GPIB interfaces 140 to 160 Reset each instrument to a known measurement state 170 to 190 Print the test report title 200 to 310 Query measurement instruments identifications for test traceability 320 to 330 Connect the source output signal to the output terminals 340 to 380 Print results table header 390 to 460 This is the main measure
114. ST ENABle lt num gt 1 ALL Enables the listed selftests to execute If ALL is sent then all of the selftests are enabled RST causes DIAG TEST ENAB ALL to execute e DIAGnostics TEST EXECute lt num gt The specified selftest is executed Normal instrument operation is suspended and the instrument state is restored upon exiting the selftest mode e DIAGnostics TEST LOG SOURce ALL FAIL e DIAGnostics TEST LOG SOURce Sets and queries the source for the raw data logging ALL specifies that all raw data points are displayed FAIL selects only those data points out of the test limits Both commands are executable in selftest mode After RST the setting is FAIL e DIAGnostics TEST LOG STATe e DIAGnostics TEST LOG STATe ON OFF 1 0 S 28 Operating and Programming Reference Frequency Subsystem SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY Selects and queries the raw data logging ON OFF switch Both commands are executable in selftest mode After RST the setting is 0 e DIAGnostics TEST LOOP ON OFF 1 0 e DIAGnostics TEST LOOP Selects and queries the test looping ON OFF switch Both commands are executable in selftest mode After RST the setting is 0 e DIAGnostics TEST NAME lt num gt Queries the name of a selftest by number If the number is not specified then an array of all the selftest names is returned e DIAGnostics TEST POINts Returns the number of points of selftest that is output using DIAGnostics TEST NAME or DI
115. START STOP cwl Figure 1 4 CW Operation and Start Stop Frequency Sweep CW Operation Start Stop Frequency Sweep Press START Enter value Press terminator key Press STOP Enter value Press terminator key 1 Press cw 2 Enter value 3 Press terminator key D T O WM rR Getting Started Basic 1 7 Center Frequency Span Operation 1 8 Getting Started Basic Center frequency span is another way of establishing swept operation This is just a different way of defining sweep limits As an example of center frequency span operation Press CENTER 4 GHz Press SPAN 2 GHz The swept CW generator is now sweeping from 3 5 to 4 5 GHz to view these figures press either or STOP then SPAN The data display area indicates the center frequency as well as the span Notice that the green SWEEP LED is on While span is the active function try the rotary knob and arrow keys This symmetrical increase or decrease of the frequency span about the center frequency is one reason that center frequency span swept operation is used instead of start stop frequency sweep Another example illustrates the subtleties of center frequency span Press CENTER 4 GHz Press SPAN 8 GHz Notice that the center frequency changed This is because the center frequency could not accommodate a span of 8 GHz without exceeding the lower frequency limit of the swept CW generator s s
116. SWE SWE MAN ignored STEP and power sweep List sweep LIST ignored ignored AUTO ignored Manual list sweep LIST ignored ignored MAN ignored e SWEep GENeration STEPped ANALog e SWEep GENeration Sets and queries the type of sweep to be generated an analog sweep S 42 Operating and Programming Reference SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY or a digitally stepped sweep In either case all of the other sweep subsystem functions apply RST is ANALog e SWEep MANual POINt lt num gt MAXimum MINimum e SWEep MANual POINt MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the step point number to go to and lock The value is a unitless value that is limited between 1 and the number of points requested This command has no effect on the instrument unless the sweep mode is set to manual and the sweep generation is set to stepped mode RST value is 1 e SWEep MANual RELative lt num gt e SWEep MANual RELative Sets and queries a percent of sweep to go to and lock This command has no effect unless the sweep mode is set to manual and the sweep generation is set to analog RST value is 0 50 e SWEep MARKer STATe ON OFF 1 0 e SWEep MARKer STATe Sets and queries the state of marker sweep When ON the frequency sweep limits are taken to be the positions of marker 1 and marker 2 RST value is 0 e SWEep MARKer XFER This transfers the values of marker 1 and marker 2 frequencies into start and stop frequency e SWEep MODE AUTO MANual e SWEe
117. T STOP Center Frequency Span Operation in Chapter 1 Function Group Menu Map Description FREQUENCY This hardkey activates swept frequency mode and makes the start frequency parameter the active function Press and use the entry area to enter the desired value The start stop frequency must be separated by at least 2 Hz in order to remain in the frequency sweep mode If start stop frequency then the zero span mode is entered Operating and Programming Reference S 53 Programming Codes See Also SCPI FREQuency STARt lt num gt freq suffix or MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN FREQuency MODE SWEep Analyzer FA lt num gt Hz Kz Mz Gz CENTER Cw FREQUENCY MENU SPAN STOP CW Operation and Start Stop Frequency Sweep in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 Start M1 Stop M2 Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also MARKER This softkey changes the swept CW generator start frequency to the frequency value of marker 1 and the stop frequency to the frequency value of marker 2 The swept CW generator has been reset to these start stop values unlike the softkey MI M2 Sweep that changes the start stop values only while active SCPI SWEep FREQuency MARKer XFER Analyzer SHMP Mi M2 Sweep Marker Operation in Chapter 1 S 54 Operating and Programming Reference Start Sweep Trigger Bus Start Sweep Trigger Auto
118. T FLAT NEXT VAL Power DBM ENTER Source Freq END WHILE END IF END SUB Zero_meter Meter Source INTEGER Error_flag OUTPUT Source Pow stat off OUTPUT Meter CS OUTPUT Meter ZE Max_attempts 30 Attempts 0 Zeroing 1590 Finished 0 WHILE Zeroing AND NOT Finished Attempts Attempts 1 Meter_stat SPOLL Meter IF Attrmpts gt Max_attempts THEN Zeroing 0 IF BIT Meter_stat 1 THEN Finished 1 WAIT 1 END WHILE OUTPUT Source Pow stat on IF NOT Zeroing THEN Error_flag 1 ELSE Error_flag 0 END IF SUBEND DEF FNRead_meter Meter Freq OUTPUT Meter SEOEN Freq VAL Freq OUTPUT Meter FR amp Freq amp GZ OUTPUT Meter TR2 ENTER Meter Power 1 104 Getting Started Programming 870 880 890 900 910 920 930 940 950 960 970 980 990 1000 1010 1020 1030 1040 1050 PO VAL Power Flips 0 Slope 0 REPEAT OUTPUT Meter TR2 ENTER OMeter Power P1 VAL Power Slope2 SGN PO P1 IF Slope2Slope THEN Flips Flipstt Slope2 Slope ELSE IF Slope2 0 THEN Flips Flips 2 END IF PO P1 UNTIL Flips gt 3 Power PO P1 2 RETURN Power FNEND Getting Started Programming 1 105 Programming the Status System In This Subsection This subsection discusses the structure of the status system used in SCPI instruments and explains how to program status registers An important feature of SCPI instruments is that they all implement status registers the same way The status
119. TANDARD OPERA UNUSED PROGRESS DISPLAY CHANGE UNUSED ALWAYS 0 MON STATUS GROUP UNUSED ALWAYS ALWAYS 9 UNUSED UNUSED ALWAYS 0 SCPI STATUS REGISTER STRUCTURE SWEEPING UNUSED ALWAYS Ko SETTLING CALIBRA TING DECIMAL VALUE 14 12 11 10 7 6 5 4 2 0 BIT DECIMAL VALUE BIT RESERVED FOR lt _ _ UNUSED TMSL DEFINITIONS UNUSED DATA UNUSED QUESTIONABLE S HARDWARE ERROR FAULT SELF TEST FAILED CALIBRA TION ERROR TATUS MODULA TION ERROR OVERMOD FRE UNUSED oyency oO ERROR UNLOCKED POWER LEVELED UNUSED ALWAYS 2 UNUSED ALWAYS 0 UNUSED ALWAYS 9 DECIMAL VALUE 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 3 2 1 BIT DECIMAL VALUE BIT NOTE STAT PRES THIS COMMAND PRESETS THE FOLLOWING ENABLE AND TRANSITION REGISTERS OPER AND QUES CONDITION REGISTER STAT OPER COND NEGATIVE TRANSITION FILTER STAT OPER NTR lt num gt STAT OPER NTR POSITIVE TRANSITION FILTER STAT OPER PTR lt num gt STATus OPERation Ptransitian EVENT REGISTER STATus OPERation ENABLE REGISTER STAT OPER ENAB lt num gt STATus OPERation
120. WEep FREQuency DWELI lt num gt time suffix or MA Ximum MINimum Analyzer NONE Step Swp Menu Sweep Mode Step Operating and Programming Reference S 59 step Points Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY This softkey lets you define the number of step points in a stepped frequency sweep The number of points in a stepped sweep can range from 2 to 801 Step Size and Step Points are dependent variables If you know how many steps are desired in a given sweep use the softkey Step Points to set the desired value The step size will be calculated automatically SCPI SWEep FREQuency POINts lt num gt MAXimum MINimum Analyzer NONE Step Size Step Swp Menu Sweep Mode Step Using Step Sweep in Chapter 1 step Size Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY This softkey lets you specify the step size in a stepped frequency sweep The range of increment size is dependent on frequency span and the number of step points desired as given by the formula STEP SIZE SPAN STEP POINTS Step Size and Step Points are dependent variables as shown by the formula If a particular step size is desired use the Step Size softkey to set the desired increment The number of step points is then calculated automatically SCPI SWEep FREQuency STEP lt num gt freq suffix or MAXimum MINimum Analyzer NONE Step Points Step Swp M
121. WN Up Dn Size CW Up Dn Size Swept Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 Up Dn Size CW Function Group Menu Map Description FREQUENCY This softkey lets you set the frequency step size for the CW frequency mode The step size may be set from 1 Hz to 10 GHz The factory preset size is 100 MHz CW frequency is incremented decremented by pressing the up down arrow keys If an underline cursor appears under a digit in the entry display then the value will be modified by the up down arrow keys or the rotary knob The increment decrement size in this case is the underlined digit by the power of 10 If the up down function is on asterisk next to key label and the cursor is not under one of the active entry area digits then frequency value is changed by the up down size using either the up down arrow keys or the rotary knob U 2 Operating and Programming Reference Programming Codes See Also Up Dn Size Swept SCPI FREQuency STEP INCR lt num gt freq suffix or MAXimum MINimum Analyzer SF or SHCF lt num gt Hz Kz Mz Gz Manual Sweep Sweep Mode Step Up Dn Size Swept Up Dn Size Swept Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY This softkey sets the frequency step size in the swept frequency step mode The step size may be set from 1 Hz to 10 GHz The factory preset step size is 100 MHz Step size values are entered using the entry area I
122. You will find procedures for checking electrical performance in the Performance Tests chapter of your Agilent Technologies 8360 B Series Swept Signal Generator 8360 L Series Swept CW Generator Service Guide If there is any electrical or mechanical defect or if the shipment is incomplete notify the nearest Agilent Technologies office If the shipping container is damaged or if the cushioning material shows signs of stress notify the carrier as well as the Agilent Technologies office Keep the shipping material for the carrier s inspection The Agilent Technologies office will arrange for repair or replacement without waiting for a claim settlement Installation 3 1 Equipment Supplied Options Available 3 2 Installation All Agilent 8360 L Series swept CW generators are sent from the factory with the following basic accessories m Rack handles mounted m Power cord m Software package m A set of manuals The following adapters are also shipped with the swept CW generators Table 3 1 Adapter Descriptions and Part Numbers Shipped with Each Swept CW Generator Model Agilent 83623L Agilent 83630L Type N F to 3 5 mm F 1250 1745 3 5 mm F to 3 5 mm F 5061 5311 Agilent 83640L Agilent 83650L 2 4 mm F to K F 1250 2187 2 4 mm F to 2 4 mm F 1250 2188 There are several options available on the 8360 L Series swept CW generators For descriptive information on al
123. a 2c 13 Installation Initial Inspection a 0a a a a a aa 3 1 Equipment Supplied 2 a aa 3 2 Options Available 0a a a a De 3 2 Preparation for Use 2 a a a a a a 3 3 Power Requirements e ee 3 3 Line Voltage and Fuse Selection e a 3 3 Power Cable 2 a a a a a a 3 4 Language Selection 3 6 How to View or Change a i Language Selection from the Front Panel a 3 6 How to Select a Language on a Swept cw Generator without a Front Panel 3 6 GPIB Address Selection 3 7 How to View or Change a GPIB address from the Front Panel 3 8 How to Prevent a Front Panel Change to a GPIB Address 3 8 How to Set the GPIB Address on a Swept Cw Generator without a Front Panel 3 8 Mating Connectors 3 8 10 MHz Frequency Reference Selection and Warmup Time a 3 8 Operating Environment e 3 9 Chassis Kits o 3 10 Rack Mount Slide Kit Option 806 Loe ee 3 10 Installation Procedure 3 11 Rack Flange Kit for Swept CW Generators with Handles Removed Option 908 3 13 Installation Procedure 3 14 Rack Flange Kit for Swept CW Generators with Handles Attached Option 913 oa 3 15 Installation Procedure Loe ee 3 16 Storage and Shipment 22 3 17 Environment 3 17 Package the Swept cw Generator for Shipment 3 18 Converting HP Agilent 8340 41 Systems to 8360 L Series Systems e ee 3 19 Manual Operation aoa a a a a 3 20 Compatibility oa a a
124. aligns the output filter YTM so that its passband is centered on the RF output in CW or manual sweep mode Use peaking to obtain the maximum available power and spectral purity and best pulse envelopes at any given frequency above 2 0 GHz The YTM is inactive for the low band frequencies 10 MHz to 2 0 GHz To peak at the present CW frequency Press USER CAL Select Tracking Menu Peak RF Once This causes an instantaneous execution of the peaking function This is a one time implementation of the peaking where the function is turned on and then turned off To peak at the present CW frequency and continue to peak at new frequencies as they are entered Press USER CAL Select Tracking Menu Peak RF Always If peak always is on denoted by an asterisk next to the key label for an extended period of time the peaking function will automatically repeak every seven minutes Tracking Auto track is a more extensive version of peaking It causes all of the YTM tracking calibration constants to be aligned and requires approximately 40 to 90 seconds to complete Tracking is performed from 2 0 GHz to the end of the specified frequency range If the swept CW generator does not have a step attenuator terminate the RF OUTPUT with a good 50Q impedance match such as a 10 dB attenuator or a power sensor to prevent mistracking To enhance the power output and spectral purity of swept modes and to improve tracking perf
125. alue On a CRT display the trace between the two selected markers is intensified An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active At preset factory the swept CW generator is set to measure the difference between M2 and M1 marker reference If markers have not been activated after preset selecting Delta Marker indicates the difference between M2 and M1 Both of these markers have an asterisk next to their key label indicating that they are on Whenever Delta Marker is selected it reactivates the last marker selected and makes that marker the m frequency If the delta marker feature is active selecting a marker causes the m frequency to change to the marker selected If a frequency entry is made when delta marker is in the active entry area the frequency value of the m frequency is changed to the new frequency entry causing the new difference in frequency to be displayed Negative frequency differences are possible if n is greater than m SCPI MARKer n DELTa lt num gt lt num gt Analyzer MD1 function on MDO function off MARKER Marker Operation in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 D 4 Operating and Programming Reference Disp Status Delta Mkr Ref Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also MARKER This softkey displays the five markers available as the delta marker reference The delta marker
126. alyzer LOCAL NONE Getting Started Programming in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 L 10 Operating and Programming Reference Mi M2 Sweep Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also MARKER This softkey lets you set the swept CW generator to start sweeping at the frequency of marker 1 M1 and stop sweeping at the frequency of marker 2 M2 M2 must have a higher frequency value than M1 If Mi M2 Sweep is activated when M2 is at a lower frequency than M1 the values of M1 and M2 are permanently interchanged While this function is active the start stop frequencies of the swept CW generator are changed to the values of M1 and M2 An asterisk next to the key label indicates this feature is active SCPI SWEep MARKer STATe ON OFF 1 0 Analyzer MP1 function on MPO function off Marker Mi Start Mi Stop M2 Marker Operation in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 Manual Sweep Function Group Menu Map Description SWEEP This softkey lets you set the swept CW generator to the manual sweep mode of operation Depending on what parameter is sweeping you can use either the rotary knob or the ARROW keys to manually sweep between the start stop limits In manual sweep mode the swept CW generator does not automatically retrace at the sweep end point the user must turn the rotary knob to retrace and the green SWEEP LED does not lig
127. an the stop frequency you will see this error Correct by entering a stop frequency greater than the start frequency Error in Test Patch entry This error will only occur if the service adjustment menu is accessed Specifically one of three entries has been attempted a An invalid test patch number mw An invalid test patch data point mw An invalid parameter of the test patch specification Correct by entering a valid parameter Freq step must be gt 0 This error occurs in association with the user power flatness menu auto fill increment feature If the increment value entered is less than zero you will see this error Correct by entering an increment value greater than zero FUNCTION LOCKED OUT This error will only occur if the service adjustment menu is accessed Specifically the calibration constant that inhibits access to certain functions has been set If you need access to the function contact a qualified service technician GPIB SYNTAX ERROR This indicates that an analyzer language syntax error has been encountered Review the program to find the syntax error ILLEGAL INSTRUCTION EXCEPTION This can only be caused by an internal processor error Refer to Chapter 4 for instructions on contacting a qualified service technician INPUT BUFFER EMPTY This can only be caused by an internal processor error Refer to Chapter 4 for instructions on contacting a qualified service technician INPUT BUFFER FULL This
128. and lt 5 s Sweep Widths gt n x 10 MHz Lesser of 1 of sweep width or n x 1 MHz 0 1 of sweep width Sweep Time 10 ms to 100 seconds 300 MHz ms maximum rate Accuracy Calibration Aging Rate Temperature Effects Line Voltage Effects Stability Aging Rate 5 x 1071 day 1 x 1077 year With Temperature 1 x 10 1 C typical With Line Voltage 5 x 1071 for line voltage change of 10 typical Specifications 2c 3 RF Output Output Power 2c 4 Specifications Maximum Leveled Standard 83623L 15 83630L Output Frequencies lt 20 GHz 13 Output Frequencies gt 20 GHz 10 83640L Output Frequencies lt 26 5 GHz 10 Output Frequencies gt 26 5 GHz 6 83650L Output Frequencies lt 26 5 GHz 10 Output Frequencies gt 26 5 GHz and lt 40 GHz 5 Output Frequencies gt 40 GHz 42 5 With attenuator Option 001 Minimum settable output power is 110 dBm Maximum leveled output power is reduced by 1 5 dB to 20 GHz 2 0 dB above 20 GHz and 2 5 dB above 40 GHz Minimum Settable Standard 20 dBm Option 001 110 dBm Resolution 0 02 dB Switching Time without attenuator change 10 ms typical Temperature Stability 0 01 dB C typical Typical Maxium Available Power ao ye ASSA an Z Na E dBm E B iB 28 38 42 58 Frequency GHz uo71l Specification applies over the 0 to 35 C temperature range 0 to 25 C for output frequencies
129. and adapters These cables are shown in the accompanying illustration The adapters are principally extension devices for instruments that have recessed or crowded GPIB connectors GPIB SH1 O AH1 T6 TEO LU LEO SR1 RL1 PPO DC1 DT1 CO1 3 28 E1 O hpib Figure C 2 GPIB Connector and Cable GPIB Interface Cables Available GPIB Cable Lengths Part Numbers HP Agilent 10833A 1m 3 3 ft HP Agilent 10833B 2m 6 6 ft HP Agilent 10833C 4m 13 2 ft HP Agilent 10833D 0 5 m 1 6 ft As many as 14 GPIB instruments can be connected to the swept CW generator 15 total instruments in the system The cables can be interconnected in a star pattern one central instrument with the GPIB cables emanating from that instrument like spokes on a wheel or in a linear pattern like boxcars on a train or any combination pattern There are certain restrictions Operating and Programming Reference C 7 CONNECTORS m Each instrument must have a unique GPIB address ranging from 0 to 30 decimal Refer to 8360 Adrs for information on setting the swept CW generator s GPIB address m In a two instrument system that uses just one GPIB cable the cable length must not exceed 4 meters 13 ft m When more than two instruments are connected on the bus the cable length to each instrument must not exceed 2 meters 6 5 ft per unit The total cable length between all units must not exceed 20 meters 65 ft Agi
130. andard replacing IEEE 728 1982 The IEEE 488 2 standard provides codes formats protocols and common commands that were unavailable in the previous standard m Analyzer is the programming language compatible with the HP Agilent 8340 41 synthesized sweepers system language and many network analyzers a CIIL Control Interface Intermediate Language is the instrument control programming language used in option 700 swept CW generators Option 700 swept CW generators are M A T E Modular Automatic Test Equipment compatible CONNECTORS GPIB Getting Started Programming in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference H 1 Leveling Mode ALCoff Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also ALC This softkey lets you open the ALC loop Direct and separate control of the linear modulator circuit LVL DAC and attenuator ATN is possible see Figure A 1 The power level must be set using an external indicator power meter sensor If the power level is set when the swept CW generator is in CW mode and then pulse modulation is activated the peak pulse level equals the CW level The attenuator value is set via the Set Atten softkey in the POWER menu An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI POWer ALC STATe OFF 0 POWer ATTenuation AUTO OFF 0 Analyzer SHA3 ALC MOD Pulse On Off External Set Atten Working with Mixers Reverse Power Effects
131. at have addresses 19 21 26 and 15 Related statements used by some computers RESUME Local Lockout Local Lockout can be used in conjunction with REMOTE to disable the front panel LOCAL key With the LOCAL key disabled only the controller or a hard reset by the POWER switch can restore local control The syntax is LOCAL interface select LOCKOUT code A BASIC example 10 REMOTE 719 20 LOCAL LOCKOUT 7 1 58 Getting Started Programming Local Local is the complement to REMOTE causing an instrument to return to local control with a fully enabled front panel The syntax is device selector Some BASIC examples 10 LOCAL 7 which effects all instruments in the network or 10 LOCAL 719 for an addressed instrument address 19 Related statements used by some computers RESUME Clear Clear causes all GPIB instruments or addressed instruments to assume a cleared condition with the definition of cleared being unique for each device For the swept CW generator 1 All pending output parameter operations are halted 2 The parser the software that interprets the programming codes is reset and now expects to receive the first character of a programming code The syntax is device selector Getting Started Programming 1 59 Some BASIC examples 10 CLEAR 7 to clear all GPIB instruments or 10 CLEAR 719 to clear an addressed instrument Related statements used by s
132. ata 1 23E 0 1 0E 2 1 0E 2 0 5E 0 1 23 100 0 100 0 0 5 Getting Started Programming 1 85 Integer Response Data Integer response data are decimal representations of integer values including optional signs Most status register related queries return integer response data Examples of integer response data O signs are optional 100 leading sign allowed 100 leading sign allowed 256 never any decimal point Discrete Response Data Discrete response data are similar to discrete parameters The main difference is that discrete response data return only the short form of a particular mnemonic in all upper case letters Examples of discrete response data INTernal level internally DIODe level using an external diode PMETer level using an external power meter MMHead level using a mm wave source module String Response Data String response data are similar to string parameters The main difference is that string response data use only double quotes as delimiters rather than single quotes Embedded double quotes may be present in string response data Embedded quotes appear as two adjacent double quotes with no characters between them Examples of string response data This IS valid SO IS THIS un u I said nnpell lo n 1 86 Getting Started Programming Programming Typical Measurements In This Subsection Using the Example Programs This subsection illustrates how the general SCPI concepts pre
133. atile memory SCPI DIAGnostics INSTrument PMETer ADDRess lt num gt Analyzer NONE Adrss Menu Optimizing Swept CW Generator Performance in Chapter 1 Chapter 3 mop Function Group Menu Map Description See Also MENU SELECT This hardkey allows access to the pulse modulation function Pulse For use with Agilent Technologies scalar analyzers the swept CW generator offers a scalar pulse modulation mode that provides approximately 2 us rise and fall times An internal oscillator provides the 27 778 kHz square wave with no external connections necessary The slow waveform reduces the spectral width of the output improving measurements made on filters with steep skirts Pulse On Off Scalar Operating and Programming Reference M 9 Module Menu Function Group acc Menu Map 1 Description This softkey accesses the source module selection softkeys Millimeter wave source modules can be connected to the swept CW generator source module interface connectors there is one each on the front and rear panels These softkeys give you the option of letting the swept CW generator automatically look at both connectors for source modules or telling the swept CW generator to look only at the front or at the rear connector You can also turn off module sensing completely Module Select AUTO Sets the swept CW generator to automatic selection of the source module selects the front connector if source modules are pr
134. ation data are processed by the swept CW generator CPU which uses this information to set the Level DAC In turn the Level DAC sends a controlling voltage to the Level Control Circuits In swept CW generators with optional step attenuators the power level at the output connector can be reduced by a maximum of 90 dB in 10 dB steps This is in addition to the control capabilities provided by the Level Control Circuits A Feedback Signal to the Level Control Circuits can be provided by either internal or external detectors This signal is the comparison voltage necessary for accurate stable power level settings and good source match at various Leveling Points Alternatively the power level can be set without using feedback In this mode however power level is uncalibrated and is subject to drift with temperature The following paragraphs describe the operation of the different leveling modes and leveling points A 4 Operating and Programming Reference PULSE irs 8360L SERIES SWEPT CW GENERATOR USER SUPPLIED CALIBRATION CONTROLLER REMOTE OPERATION FRONT PANEL OPERATION ALC REFERENCE 0 TO 90 aB STEP POWER ATTENUATOR OUTPUT SEE NOTE DETECTOR EXTERNAL DETECTOR POWER METER SOURCE MODULE INTERFACE Note This block applies to synthesizers with option 001 only alcl Figure A 1 ALC System Simplified Block Diagram Operating and Programming Reference A 5 ALC Note Two
135. ay in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference M 7 Measure Corr Current Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER This softkey lets you enable the swept CW generator to act as a controller to command an HP Agilent 437B power meter to measure a single flatness correction value at the current flatness array frequency SCPI NONE Analyzer NONE Fltness Menu Mtr Meas Menu Creating and Applying the User Flatness Correction Array in Chapter 1 Measure Corr Undef Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER This softkey lets you enable the swept CW generator to act as a controller to command an HP Agilent 437B power meter to measure flatness correction values for those frequency points of the flatness array that do not have correction values assigned SCPI NONE Analyzer NONE Fltness Menu Mtr Meas Menu Creating and Applying the User Flatness Correction Array in Chapter 1 M 8 Operating and Programming Reference WD Meter Adrs Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SYSTEM In cases where the swept CW generator is capable of acting as a controller to an HP Agilent 437B power meter this softkey enables you to set the programming address of the power meter The address value can be set from 0 to 30 with the factory default address set at 13 The address value is stored in non vol
136. ay lt num gt time suffix MAXimum MINimum e TRIGger ODELay MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the trigger output delay the time between when the source is settled when Bit 1 of the Standard Operation Status Register makes a negative transition and the trigger out signal is sent e TRIGger SOURce IMMediate BUS EXTernal e TRIGger SOURce Sets and queries the source of the trigger event e TSWeep This is a convenience command that does the equivalent of ABORt INITiate IMMediate e UNIT POWer lvl suffix e UNIT POWer Sets and queries the default power subsystem units RST value is DBM Operating and Programming Reference S 47 SCPI STATUS REGISTER STRUCTURE DESCRIPTION STANDARD OPERATION STATUS REGISTER SUMMARY BT REQUEST SERVICE RQS STANDARD EVENT STATUS REGISTER SUMMARY BIT MESSAGE AVAILABLE MAV DATA QUEST TIONABLE STATUS REGISTER SUMMARY BIT DESCRIPTION STANDARD EVE USER REQUEST KEY PRESET T STATUS GROUP EVENT REGISTER COMMAND REQUEST ESR ERROR CONTROL DECIMAL VALUE ENABLE REGISTER ESE lt num gt BIT UNUSED UNUSED RESERVED DECIMAL VALUE BIT S 48 Operating and Programming Reference ESE STATUS BYTE REGISTER STB SERVICE REQUEST ENABLE REGISTER SRE lt num gt SRE RESERVED FOR e TMSL DEFINITION UNUSED S
137. can only be caused by an internal processor error Refer to Chapter 4 for instructions on contacting a qualified service technician INVALID LANGUAGE ON REAR PANEL SWITCH The GPIB Language switch located on the rear panel has been set to an invalid programming language selection Check the rear panel switch See Chapter 3 for information on language selection Invalid Save Recall Register There are two cases when this error message is possible a If a save function is attempted to either register 0 or 9 a If a recall function is attempted on register 9 Correct by selecting a valid save recall register LINT1 INTERRUPT This can only be caused by an internal processor error Refer to Chapter 4 for instructions on contacting a qualified service technician Error Messages 2a 3 2a 4 Error Messages LINT2 INTERRUPT This can only be caused by an internal processor error Refer to Chapter 4 for instructions on contacting a qualified service technician LINT6 INTERRUPT This can only be caused by an internal processor error Refer to Chapter 4 for instructions on contacting a qualified service technician Number of pts must be gt 2 This error occurs in association with the user power flatness auto fill number of points feature If the number of points requested is less than two you will see this error message Correct by entering number of points greater than or equal to two OPTION NOT INSTALLED This error occurs when th
138. ce MARKer1 STATe ON FREQuency 4 5GHZ 130 OUTPUT Source MARKer2 STATe ON FREQuency 6111E6 140 OUTPUT Source 0PC 150 ENTER Source X 160 OUTPUT Source POWer STATe ON 170 OUTPUT Source INITIate CONTinuous ON 180 CLS 190 PRINT Source setup complete 200 PRINT Verify that the source is sweeping from 210 PRINT 4 GHz to 7 GHz at a power of 5 dBm 220 PRINT with a sweeptime of 0 5 seconds 230 END Run the program Program Comments 10 Assign the source s GPIB address to a variable 20 to 50 Abort any GPIB activity and initialize the GPIB interface 60 Set the source to its initial state for programming The RST state is not the same as the PRESET state For complete details of the instrument state at RST see SCPI Command Summary in Chapter 2 70 Select the frequency mode to be SWEEP instead of the default sweep mode of CW that was selected with RST 80 Set the source start frequency to 4 GHz 90 Set the source stop frequency to 7 GHz Note the optional usage of the short form mnemonic FREQ 100 Set the source s power level to 5 dBm Getting Started Programming 1 93 110 Set the sweeptime to 500 ms Notice that upper lower case in commands does not matter Also spaces before the suffix MS are not required in SCPI 120 and 130 Set markers 1 and 2 to a fixed value Notice that the value for marker 2 does not end with a frequency suffix Hertz is a default term
139. ch Printer Adrs Controls the system printer address Operating and Programming Reference A 1 Adrs Menu Programming Codes SCPI NONE see the individual softkeys listed Analyzer NONE See Also HP IB Menu softkeys listed above Optimizing Swept CW Generator Performance in Chapter 1 GPIB Address Selection in Chapter 3 A 2 Operating and Programming Reference ad Function Group Menu Map Description AO ALC This hardkey accesses the automatic level control ALC functions ALC BW Menu Coupling Factor Leveling Mode ALCoff Leveling Mode Normal Leveling Mode Search Leveling Point ExtDet Leveling Point Internal Leveling Point Module Leveling Point PwrMtr Accesses the ALC bandwidth menu Specifies the coupling factor of an external coupling device and causes the display to indicate the power at the coupler main output Disables the ALC leveling circuits Relative power level is controlled by means of the level DAC and attenuator Power is not sensed at any point and absolute power level is uncalibrated Sets the swept CW generator to continuous leveling at the specified leveling point The swept CW generator activates power search leveling mode Similar to ALCoff mode but first automatically searches for the correct modulator setting so that the desired power level is produced Sets the swept CW generator to level power externally A negative detector output m
140. ck flanges and the necessary hardware to install them on the swept CW generator after removing the instrument handles The following table itemizes the parts in this kit Table 3 5 Rack Flange Kit for Swept CW Generators with Handles Removed Contents Quantity Description 2 Rack Mount Flanges 8 Screws Ventilation Requirements When installing the instrument in a cabinet the convection into and out of the instrument must not be restricted The ambient temperature outside the cabinet must be less than the maximum operating temperature of the instrument by 4 C for every 100 watts dissipated in the cabinet If the total power dissipated in the cabinet is greater than 800 watts then forced convection must be used Installation 3 13 Installation Procedure 1 Refer to Figure 3 5 Remove handle trim strips 2 Remove the four screws on each side that attach the handles to the instrument remove the handles 3 Using the screws provided attach the rack mount flanges to the swept CW generator 4 Remove the bottom and back feet and the tilt stands before rack mounting the instrument 2 ZL Figure 3 5 Rack Mount Flanges for Swept CW Generators with Handles Removed 3 14 Installation Rack Flange Kit for Swept CW Generators with Handles Attached Option 913 CAUTION Option 913 swept CW generators are supplied with rack flanges and the necessary hardware to install them on the swept CW gen
141. command to read a particular condition register Transition Filter The transition filter specifies which types of bit state changes in the condition register will set corresponding bits in the event register Transition filter bits may be set for positive transitions PTR negative transitions NTR or both Positive means a condition bit changes from 0 to 1 Negative means a condition bit changes from 1 to 0 Transition filters are read write Transition filters are unaffected by CLS clear status or queries They are set to instrument dependent values at power on and after RST Event Register The event register latches transition events from the condition register as specified by the transition filter Bits in the event register are latched and once set they remain set until cleared by a query or a CLS clear status There is no buffering so while an event bit is set subsequent events corresponding to that bit are ignored Event registers are read only Enable Register The enable register specifies the bits in the event register that can generate a summary bit The instrument logically ANDs corresponding bits in the event and enable registers and ORs all the resulting bits to obtain a summary bit Summary bits are in turn recorded in the Status Byte Enable registers are read write Querying an enable register does not affect it There is always a command to read and write to the enable register of a particular status grou
142. configure the system to send whatever terminator you specify Subsystem Command Syntax Figure 1 30 describes the basic syntax of SCPI subsystem commands parameter white space ASCII characters O16 to 9 ig and 11 to 32 io 1 30 Simplified Subsystem Command Syntax As Figure 1 30 shows there must be a lt space gt between the last command mnemonic and the first parameter in a subsystem command This is one of the few places in SCPI where lt space gt is required Note that if you send more than one parameter with a single command you must separate adjacent parameters with a comma Parameter types are explained later in this subsection Common Command Syntax Figure 1 31 describes the syntax of common commands Getting Started Programming 1 81 parameter mnemonic NOTE SP white space ASCII characters 01 to 9 and Wi to 32 1 10 Figure 1 31 Simplified Common Command Syntax As with subsystem commands use a lt space gt to separate a command mnemonic from subsequent parameters Separate adjacent parameters with a comma Parameter types are explained later in this subsection Response Message Figure 1 32 shows a simplified view of response message syntax Syntax Figure 1 32 Simplified Response Message Syntax Response messages can contain both commas and semicolons as separators When a single query command returns multiple values a comma separates each data item When multiple queri
143. connects the mains circuits from the mains supply before other parts of the instrument The front panel switch is only a standby switch and is not a LINE switch PREFACE This manual provides user information for the 8360 L Series Swept CW Generator Instruments Covered By This Manual INSTALLED OPTIONS This manual applies to instruments having a serial number prefix listed on the title page behind the Documentation Map tab Some changes may have to be made to this manual so that it applies directly to each instrument refer to Chapter 5 Instrument History to see what changes may apply to your instrument A serial number label Figure 0 1 is attached to the instrument s rear panel A prefix four digits followed by a letter and a suffix five digits unique to each instrument comprise the instrument serial number SERIAL NUMBER mM PREFIX SUFFIX SER 12534A 12345 serial Figure 0 1 Typical Serial Number Label vii User s Guide Organization Tabs divide the major chapters of this manual The contents of each chapter is listed in the Table of Contents HP Agilent 8360 L Series Documentation Documentation Map For a pictorial representation of the 8360 L Series documentation see the Documentation Map at the front of this manual Ordering Manuals A manual part number is listed on the title page of this manual You may use it to order extra copies of
144. cs You can use mixed upper and lower case letters for discrete parameters Examples of discrete parameters INTernal level internally DIODe level using an external diode PMETer level using an external power meter MMHead level using a mm wave source module Examples of discrete parameters in commands 100 OUTPUT Source POWer ALC SOURce INT 110 OUTPUT Source POWer ALC SOURce mmh Although discrete parameters values look like command keywords do not confuse the two In particular be sure to use colons and spaces properly Use a colon to separate command mnemonics from each other Use a space to separate parameters from command mnemonics Boolean Parameters Boolean parameters represent a single binary condition that is either true or false There are only four possible values for a Boolean parameter Examples of Boolean parameters ON Boolean TRUE upper lower case allowed OFF Boolean FALSE upper lower case allowed 1 Boolean TRUE 0 Boolean FALSE Examples of Boolean parameters in commands 100 OUTPUT Source FM STATe On 110 OUTPUT Source AM STATe 1 Getting Started Programming 1 75 Reading Instrument When debugging a program you may want to know if an instrument Errors error has occurred Some instruments can display error messages on their front panels If your instrument cannot do this you can put the following code segment in your program to read and display error messages 10 20 The rest of y
145. cy Sweep CW Operation Start Stop Frequency Sweep 1 6 Getting Started Basic CW operation is one of the major functions of the swept CW generator and is easy to do using front panel keys In CW operation the swept CW generator produces a single low noise synthesized frequency Try this example Press Cw QOQMOOOMB Ge Check the active entry area It indicates gt CW 12345 678000 MHz The data display area indicates CW operation and the frequency that you entered The ENTRY ON LED is lit and the green SWEEP LED is off Try other frequencies Experiment with the rotary knob and the arrow keys as alternate methods of data entry The swept CW generator can sweep a frequency span as wide as the frequency range of the instrument or as narrow as 0 Hz swept CW In start stop sweep operation the swept CW generator produces a sweep from the selected start frequency to the selected stop frequency For example Press START 4 Q Gee Press stor Q O Gee The data display area indicates the start frequency and the stop frequency The green SWEEP LED is on periodically off when sweep is retracing Because this is the active function the active entry area indicates gt STOP FREQUENCY 7890 000000 MHz Any subsequent entries change the stop frequency To change the start frequency press START which remains the active function until you press a different function key EE SWEEP LED cw
146. d dot representation See Specifications for the range of acceptable amplitude values An asterisk next to the key label indicates this feature is active SCPI MARKer AOFF Analyzer AK1 function on AKO function off MARKER Marker Operation in Chapter 1 Setting Up A Typical Sweep Example Program 3 in Chapter 1 ANALYZER STATUS REGISTER Function Group Menu Map Description NONE NONE The following is the status register structure of the swept CW generator when the analyzer programming language is selected This status structure is the structurally and syntactically the same as on the 8340 41 OS 2B Output Status bytes is used to read the two 8 bit status bytes from the swept CW generator The first status byte concerns the cause of an SRQ Service Request while the second status byte concerns failures and faults as follows Operating and Programming Reference A 13 ANALYZER STATUS REGISTER STATUS BYTE 1 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Decimal 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Value Function SRQ on new REQUEST SRQ on SRQ on SRQ on SRQ on SRQ on SRQ on frequencies SERVICE GPIB or End of RF Settled Changed in Numeric Any Front or sweep RQS syntax error Sweep Extended Entry Panel Key time in Status Completed Pressed effect Byte GP IB or Front Panel EXTENDED STATUS BYTE 2 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Decimal 128 64 32 6 8 4 2 1 Value Function Fault RF Unleveled Power R
147. d numeric lt num gt time suffix time or MAXimum MINimum TRIGger SOURce stepped trig discrete IMMediate BUS EX Ternal source S 22 Operating and Programming Reference SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY Table S 1 8360 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY continued Command Parameters Parameter Type Allowed Values SYSTem ALTernate save recall numeric 1 to 8 MAXimum MINimum register STATe state Boolean ON OFF 1 0 COMMunicate GPIB ADDRess swept CW generator numeric 1 to 30 address DUMP PRINter ERRor KEY ASSign key code assign numeric 0 to 511 1 to 14 excluding 5 and 10 CLEar clears user menu numeric 1 to 14 ALL DISable save lock discrete SAVE ENABle save lock discrete SAVE LANGuage language selection discrete SCPI CIL COMPatible MMHead SELect discrete FRONt REAR NONE AUTO Boolean ON OFF 0 1 PRESet EXEC SAVE TYPE preset mode discrete FAC Tory USER SECurity COUnt memory clear numeric 0 to 32767 MA Ximum MINimum STATe state Boolean ON OFF 1 0 VERSion TRIGger IMMediate ODELay output delay extended numeric 0 to 3 2s SOURce trig source discrete IMMediate BUS EX Ternal TSWeep equivalent of ABORt INITiate IMMediate UNIT POWer default power units string DBM Operating and Programming Reference S 23 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY e ABORt Causes the sweep in progress to abort and reset If INIT CONT is ON it immediately restarts the sweep The pending o
148. d separator 2a 8 Error Messages 2b Menu Maps Menu Maps 2b 1 MENU SELECT ALC BW Pwr Mtr Module Menu Range Menu 3 3 Waseda Leveling Mode Coupling more more sNormol ALCoff Search Factor 2 3 1 3 ase Leveling Point intrnl ExtDet PwrMtr Module ALC Bandwidth Select Module Sense Low High Auto Cc Cc Cc Cc AUTO Front Reor ALC MENU FREQUENCY EE amp e EJ Up Dn Size Freq Freq more List Step Swp CW CF more Swept Cw Offset Mult 1 3 Zoom Menu Menu Coupled 2 3 C TEE kd Cd ame C S ER SESE vseneceeee Module Sense AUTO Front Rear None sees Enter List Delete Offset Dwell Menu a List Mode Pt Trig All Current Auto Bus Ext m nn TER ERS D k J CC DEER Step Step Step Dwell more a Step Swp Pt Trig more Step Control more Size Points Dwell Coupled 1 3 Auto Bus Ext 2 3 Master Slave 3 3 CD E Cc Cc a Cc Ci a FREQUENCY MENU 2 MENU SELECT SERVICE PRIOR Delto Delta Markers Ampi more Mkr Ref Marker All Off Markers 3 3 Marker Marker Morker Center more M3 M4 M5 Marker 2 3 Marker Marker M1 M2 Start M1 more M1 M2 Sweep Stop M2 1 3 Deito Marker Reference M2 M3 M4 MARKER MENU MODULATION MENU 4 Uncoupl Set Up Dn Power mo
149. ddress other than 31 all Is How to Set the GPIB Address on a Swept CW Generator without a Front Panel If your swept CW generator does not have a front panel set the address on the rear panel GPIB switch Figure 3 2 to the address you want factory default is 19 All of the externally mounted connectors on the instrument are discussed in the CONNECTORS section in Chapter 2 If you are interested in the part number for a connector see Replaceable Parts in the Agilent Technologies 8360 B Series Swept Signal Generator 8360 L Series Swept CW Generator Service Guide To keep the internal timebase frequency reference oven at operating temperature the swept CW generator must be connected to ac line power The swept CW generator requires approximately 30 minutes to warm up from a cold start before the OVEN display message goes off With a stable outside temperature internal temperature equilibrium is reached after approximately two hours For additional information on warmup times see Specifications in Chapter 2c Operating Environment CAUTION Temperature The swept CW generator may be operated in environments with temperatures from 0 to 55 C Humidity The swept CW generator may be operated in environments with humidity from 5 to 80 relative at 25 to 40 C However protect the swept CW generator from temperature extremes which can cause condensation within the instrument Altitude The swept CW gene
150. de S 59 point trigger automatic list mode L 8 point trigger menu key P 14 power leveling control A 4 power cable 3 4 power correction value E 1 power level 1 10 power level functions P 2 power leveling A 2 internal point L 3 normal L 1 open loop L 1 search mode L 2 power leveling with external detector L 3 power leveling with mm wave module L 4 power leveling with power meter L 4 power level key P 2 power level step size U 1 power menu functions P 5 power menu key P 5 power meter HP Agilent 437B 1 34 1 47 power meter leveling L 4 power meter measure correction functions M 13 power meter programming address M 8 power meter range P 16 power offset P 6 list array all points G 1 list frequency E 3 power on off RF R 2 power output maximizing 1 49 peaking 1 49 power slope 1 18 P 6 power sweep 1 18 P 7 uncoupled operation A 7 power sweep once S 51 power sweep sweep time S 67 power switch L 5 precise talking 1 66 1 83 prefix number vii preset conditions HP Agilent 8340 41 compared to 8360 3 20 preset key 1 3 P 8 preset mode factory P 10 user P 10 preset save user defined S 2 pressure altitude 3 9 prevent interface address changes 3 8 previous menu P 11 printer address P 11 prior key P 11 program and response messages 1 66 program example flatness correction 1 103 GPIB check 1 90 local lockout 1 91 looping and synchronization 1 99 queries and response data 1
151. determined by linear interpolation If a value of START or STOP frequency is specified that is outside the limits of the specified frequencies the correction applied at those points is 0 dB After RST returns a MinFreq 0 DB MaxFreq O DB response e CORRection SOURce i ARRay FLATness e CORRection SO0URce i Sets and queries the source of correction e CORRection FLATness POINts MAXimum MINimum Returns the number of frequency correction pairs entered using the CORR FLAT command After RST the value is 2 e CORRection STATe ON OFF 1 0 e CORRection STATe Sets and queries the switch on the users ALC correction system The RST value is OFF e DIAGnostics ABUS lt num gt Reads the analog bus node number and returns the number of millivolts e DIAGnostics ABUS AVERage lt num gt e DIAGnostics ABUS AVERage Sets and queries the number of ADC averages to use during the read ADC query After RST the value is 1 e DIAGnostics ABUS STATus Queries the status of the prior ADC reading The response is a single byte that is bit encoded to mean Bit 0 Set to 1 if ADC timed out hardware fault Bit 1 Set to 1 if reading was unsettled Bit 2 Set to 1 if out of range occurred e DIAGnostics INSTrument PMETer ADDRess lt num gt e DIAGnostics INSTrument PMETer ADDRess Sets and queries the GPIB address to use for the power meter during swept CW generator calibration routines Allowable values are 0 thro
152. display These items are discussed in the following paragraphs Table 4 1 Fuse Part Numbers Voltage Fuse Part Number 115 V A 250 V 2110 0010 230 V 3 A 250 V 2110 0003 For continued protection against fire hazard replace line fuse only with same type and rating The use of other fuses or material is prohibited The value for the line fuse is printed on the rear panel of the swept CW generator next to the fuse holder See Figure 4 1 1 Turn off the swept CW generator 2 Remove the ac line cord The detachable power cord is the instrument disconnecting device It disconnects the mains circuits from the mains supply before other parts of the instrument The front panel switch is only a standby switch and is not a LINE switch 3 Using a small flat blade screwdriver rotate the fuse cap counter clockwise and remove the fuse holder 4 Replace the original fuse 5 Replace the fuse holder in the rear panel Using the screwdriver rotate the fuse cap clockwise to secure the fuse holder in place 6 Reconnect the swept CW generator to line power CAUTION FOR FIRE PROTECTION REPLACE FUSE HOLDER FUSE FUSE SS Q Figure 4 1 Replacing the Line Fuse 4 4 Operator s Check Routine Maintenance How to Clean the Fan Filter Note The cooling fan located on the rear panel has a thin foam filter How often the filter must be cleaned depends on the environment in which the
153. e L 1 number of points A 19 frequency list A 18 E 3 L 6 number of step points 59 numeric entry keys E 4 numeric parameters discussed in detail 1 83 explained briefly 1 73 ODELay trigger command defined 1 118 offset list array all points G 1 offset frequency F 13 offset power P 6 on off switch L 5 OPC S 12 OPC S 12 in example program 1 78 OPC opc 1 111 OPClopc 1 111 OPC pending flag clear S 12 open leveling loop L 1 theory of A 8 operating environment 3 8 operating temperature 3 9 operation complete command S 12 operation complete query S 12 Operation Pending Flag 1 111 operator checks 4 1 operator maintenance 4 4 OPT S 12 optimize tracking A 22 option 806 rack mount slides 3 10 option 908 rack flange kit 3 13 option 913 rack flange kit 3 15 optional parameters 1 72 option not installed message 2a 4 options available 3 2 options identify command S 12 output connector C 10 output statement 1 60 output status bytes A 13 OVEN message 3 8 parameters Boolean 1 75 1 85 discrete 1 75 1 85 extended numeric 1 74 1 84 numeric 1 73 1 83 optional 1 72 types explained briefly 1 73 parser explained briefly 1 68 part number fuses 4 4 part number manual viii peak fail F 2 peaking 1 49 Index 15 Index 16 peak RF always P 1 peak RF once P 1 periodic maintenance 4 4 PLLwait fail F 3 PLLzero fail F 3 point clear C 3 points in stepped mo
154. e A PRINT Minimum source CW frequency is A 1 E 6 MHz OUTPUT Source FREQ START STOP ENTER Source X Y PRINT Swept frequency limits PRINT Start X 1 E 6 MHz PRINT Stop Y 1 E 6 MHz END Run the program Program Comments 10 20 Assign the source s GPIB address to a variable to 50 Abort any GPIB activity and initialize the GPIB interface 60 70 80 90 Clear the computer s display Set the source to its initial state for programming Set up the source power level using a compound message Query the value of the source s CW frequency y q y 100 Enter the query response into the variable F The response always is returned in fundamental units Hz in the case of frequency 11 12 0 Print the CW Frequency in MHz on the computer display 0 Query the value of a Boolean function POWER STATE Getting Started Programming 1 95 130 Enter the query response into a variable W Boolean responses are always l for ON and 0 for OFF 140 Print the value of the POWER STATE on the computer display 150 Query the value of a discrete function FREQ MODE 160 Dimension a string variable to contain the response 170 Enter the response into A The response will be a string that represents the function s present value 180 Print the value of A on the computer display 190 Example usage of a MIN query This will request the maximum value that th
155. e FREQ CW function can be programmed to 200 Enter the numeric response into the variable A 210 Print the value of A on the computer display 220 This is compound query Up to 8 parameters can be queried from the swept CW generator at one time using this method In this example the start and stop frequencies are interrogated 230 The responses are read back into the variables X and Y The order of the responses is the same as the order of the queries X will contain the START frequency and Y will contain the STOP 240 to 260 Print the START STOP frequencies on the display 1 96 Getting Started Programming Saving and Recalling States Example Program 5 When a typical sweep like example program 3 is set up the complete front panel state may be saved for later use in non volatile memories called registers 1 through 8 This can be done remotely as a part of a program Clear and reset the controller and type in the following program 10 Source 719 20 ABORT 7 30 LOCAL 7 40 CLEAR Source 50 REMOTE Source 60 CLS 70 OUTPUT Source RST FREQ MODE SWE STAR 4GHZ STOP 5GHZ INIT CONT ON 80 OUTPUT Source SAV 1 90 CLS 100 PRINT A sweeping state has been saved in REGISTER 1 110 OUTPUT Source RST FREQ CW 1 23456GHZ POW LEV 1DBM 120 OUTPUT Source SAV 2 130 PRINT A CW state has been saved in REGISTER 2 140 PRINT Press Continue 150 PAUSE 160 OUTPUT Source RCL 1 170 PRINT Register 1 recalled Verify sou
156. e GPIB language switch is set to a configuration requiring a certain firmware hardware combination to be present in the swept CW generator See Chapter 3 for information on language selection and see Specifications for information on option available PRIV VIOLATION EXCEPTION This can only be caused by an internal processor error Refer to Chapter 4 for instructions on contacting a qualified service technician RECALL REGISTERS LOST This message can appear in association with the security menu feature memory clear Also a weak dead or disconnected internal battery can cause this message Refer to Chapter 4 for instructions on contacting a qualified service technician Selftest REQUIRES system interface OFF This error message indicates that the swept CW generator is connected to a network analyzer and can not run selftest Correct by disconnecting the system interface cable from the swept CW generator SPURIOUS INTERRUPT This can only be caused by an internal processor error Refer to Chapter 4 for instructions on contacting a qualified service technician SYSTEM CONTROLLER ON BUS This error message is generated when an external controller is active on the GPIB and the swept CW generator has attempted to act as the controller Disconnect the GPIB interface or return the swept CW generator to LOCAL operation and repeat the request TOO MANY CORRECTION PTS REQUESTED This error occurs in association with the user power flatnes
157. e accessed with the SAVE key Pressing PRESET erases register 0 but not register 9 SCPI SAV lt num gt The above is an IEEE 488 2 common command Analyzer SVn where n a numeric value from 1 to 8 Altrnate Regs Clear Memory RECALL Save Lock Saving and Recalling an Instrument State in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference S 1 Save Lock Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SYSTEM This softkey lets you disable the save function It prohibits the saving of the present instrument state into a save recall memory register If this function is active an error message is displayed An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this function is active SCPI NONE Analyzer SHSV locks the registers SHRC unlocks the registers SAVE Security Menu Saving and Recalling an Instrument State in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 Save User Preset Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SYSTEM This softkey lets you store the present state of operation to be used as the PRESET state Set the swept CW generator to the desired operating conditions Select Save User Preset The display shows gt User Defined Preset Saved To activate this stored information you must set the preset mode to User SCPI SYSTem PRESet SAVE Analyzer NONE Pr
158. e data ERROR CALIBRATION FAILED This error will only occur if the service adjustment menu is accessed Specifically an A14 sweep ramp calibration has been attempted and failed Run the sweep ramp selftest Refer to the MENU MAPS chapter in the Agilent Technologies 8360 B Series Swept Signal Generator 8360 L Series Swept CW Generator Service Guide ERROR Must first enter correction freq This error occurs when a correction point does not have its corresponding frequency entered first Refer to Creating and Applying the User Flatness Correction Array in Chapter 1 ERROR Must first enter a List Frequency This error occurs when a dwell or offset value does not have its corresponding frequency entered first Refer to Creating and Applying the User Flatness Correction Array in Chapter 1 ERROR Power Search Failed This error occurs when the ALC is in the ALC search mode and is unable to level to the desired power level Refer to Chapter 4 and follow the local operator s check procedures ERROR Start must be lt Stop This error occurs in association with the frequency list auto fill feature If the start frequency entered is greater than the stop frequency you will see this error Correct by entering a start frequency less than the stop frequency ERROR Stop must be gt Start This error occurs in association with the frequency list auto fill feature If the stop frequency entered is less th
159. earlier paragraphs in this chapter for the rear panel switch settings Models other than the dedicated HP Agilent 8510 versions are set at the factory for SCPI To interface with a network analyzer the language selected must be Analyzer language Installation 3 21 3 22 Installation The HP Agilent 8757C E Scalar Network Analyzer The connections between the analyzer and the 8360 L Series are similar to the connections between the analyzer and the HP Agilent 8340 8341 The 8360 L Series differs from the HP Agilent 8340 8341 in one connection only It is unnecessary to connect the modulator drive signal from the analyzer to the source The 8360 L Series internally produces the 27 8 kHz modulated signal necessary for AC mode measurements on the analyzer The connections from the 8360 L Series to the analyzer are a Z AXIS BLANK MKRS a SWEEP OUTPUT a STOP SWEEP IN OUT a HP IB Interface Configure the general purpose 8360 L Series to GPIB address 19 and network analyzer language for operation with the analyzer For information on selecting the instrument address and language refer to earlier paragraphs in this chapter The HP Agilent 83550 Series Millimeter wave Source Modules Refer to Leveling with MM wave Source Modules in Chapter 1 for information and examples The HP Agilent 8970B Noise Figure Meter Connections from the 8360 L Series to the HP Agilent 8970B noise figure meter are identical to those used with t
160. ecial type of command used to instruct the instrument to send a response message is the query All query mnemonics end with a question mark Queries return either measured values or internal instrument settings Any internal setting that can be programmed with SCPI can also be queried Forgiving Listening and Precise Talking SCPI uses the concept of forgiving listening and precise talking outlined in IEEE 488 2 Forgiving listening means that instruments are very flexible in accepting various command and parameter formats For example the swept CW generator accepts either POWer STATe ON or POWer STATe 1 to turn RF output on Precise talking means that the response format for a particular query is always the same For example if you query the power state when it is on using POWer STATe the response is always 1 regardless of whether you previously sent POWer STATe 1 or POWer STATe ON 1 66 Getting Started Programming Types of Commands Commands can be separated into two groups common commands and subsystem commands Common commands are generally not measurement related They are used to manage macros status registers synchronization and data storage Common commands are easy to recognize because they all begin with an asterisk such as IDN OPC and RST Common commands are defined by IEEE 488 2 Subsystem commands include all measurement functions and some general purpose functions Subsystem commands are distinguished b
161. ectly Set output power then disable ALC Uncouple attenuator control ALC independently A2 Al SHA2 A3 A1JA2 A3 SHA2 SHA3 SHAI SHPS lt num gt DB POW ALC SOUR DIOD POW ATT AUTO OFF POW ALC INT POW ALC SOUR MMH POW ATT AUTO OFF POW ALC SOUR PMET POW ATT AUTO OFF POW ALC STAT ON POW ALC STAT OFF POW SEAR ON POW ATT AUTO OFF POW lt num gt DBM Frequency Set CW frequency Set start frequency Set stop frequency Set center frequency Set frequency span Set swept mode step size Set CW mode step size Enable frequency offset function Enable frequency multiplier function Keep multiplication factor on instrument on off or preset Multiplication factor 1 on instrument on off or preset Zoom function CW lt num gt freq_suffix FA lt num gt freq_suffiix FB lt num gt freq_suffix CF lt num gt freq_suffix DF lt num gt freq_suffix SHCF lt num gt freq_suffix SHCW lt num gt freq_suffix SHFB lt num gt freq_suffix SHFA lt num gt SHAL SHIP SHST FREQ CW lt num gt freq_suffix MODE CW FREQ STAR lt num gt freq_suffix MODE SWE FREQ STOP lt num gt freq_suffix MODE SWE FREQ CENT lt num gt freq_suffix MODE SWE FREQ SPAN lt num gt freq_suffix MODE SWE FREQ STEP lt num gt freq_suffix FREQ STEP lt num gt freq_suffix FREQ OFFS lt num gt freq_suffix OFFS STAT ON FREQ MULT lt num gt MULT STAT ON
162. ed provide a good source match on the output connector a power sensor or 10 dB attenuator will do Select Auto Track Wait for the swept CW generator to finish peaking before continuing 6 Press PRIOR T Select Freq Cal Menu 8 Select Swp Span Cal Once Verify that status problems do not exist UNLOCK UNLVLED or FAULT An OVEN status message will appear on the message line if the swept CW generator has been disconnected from ac power This message will turn off within 10 minutes if it does not there may be a problem Ifa FAULT message is displayed refer to menu map 6 Service to access fault information 9 Terminate the RF output with a good source match either a 509 load or power sensor Press POWER LEVEL Increase the power level until the unleveled message is displayed on the message line Decrease the power level until the unleveled message turns off Note the power level reading Verify that the swept CW generator can produce maximum specified power without becoming unleveled This completes the operator s check If the swept CW generator does not perform as expected have a qualified service technician isolate and repair the fault See Service Information Operator s Check Routine Maintenance 4 3 Routine Maintenance WARNING How to Replace the Line Fuse Note Routine maintenance consists of replacing a defective line fuse cleaning the air filter cleaning the cabinet and cleaning the
163. ed Basic 1 13 Marker Operation Caution 1 14 Getting Started Basic The swept CW generator has five frequency markers that can be used as fixed frequency landmarks or as variable frequency pointers on a CRT display To view the marker features of the swept CW generator on a CRT connect the swept CW generator as shown in Figure 1 8 Refer to menu map 3 MARKER Press PRESET Press rant Ge Press STOP CF Giz Press MARKER Select Marker M1 and enter 4 GHz The swept CW generator is sweeping from 3 to 7 GHz with a 100 ms sweep speed A frequency marker is set at 4 GHz which causes an intensified dot to appear on the CRT To obtain an amplitude spike at that frequency select Ampl Markers Notice that you can set the amplitude of the spike with the rotary knob or entry keys To return to the intensified dot representation select Ampl Markers asterisk off Amplitude markers increase the output power at the marker frequency Provide protection to devices that could be damaged For a second marker select Marker M2 and enter 5 J G GHz This process can be continued for all five markers Note that the marker displayed in the active entry area is active and can be controlled by the rotary knob arrow keys and numeric entry keys Once the M1 and M2 markers are established the marker sweep function softkey Mi M2 Sweep temporarily changes the original start stop frequencies
164. ed on the rear panel has been set to an invalid programming language selection The programming language is defaulted to the previous setting Check the rear panel switch See Chapter 3 for information on language selection Error Messages 2a 1 2a 2 Error Messages OPTION NOT INSTALLED The language selected and the corresponding firmware hardware necessary to run that language is not present in the swept CW generator See Chapter 3 for information on language selection DISPLAY IS NOT RESPONDING Can appear on the front panel emulator if the internal processor can not communicate with the display properly This error indicates a display failure or a display connector problem DIVIDE BY ZERO EXCEPTION This can only be caused by an internal processor error Refer to Chapter 4 for instructions on contacting a qualified service technician EEROM FAILED LOST CAL This error indicates that the swept CW generator has lost its calibration constants and may not meet specifications Refer to Chapter 4 and follow the local operator s check procedures If you are a qualified service technician and this failure occurs read the Calibration Constants section in the Agilent Technologies 8360 B Series Swept Signal Generator 8360 L Series Swept CW Generator Service Guide EEROM Failed This error will only occur if the service adjustment menu is accessed Specifically an attempt has been made to write to a test patch and EEROM failed to store th
165. eep Mode SwpMode Ramp Swept Step Step List List CW CW Span 0 Zero Span Peak RF Always AutoCal On Peaking or Peak SwpSpan Cal Always AutoCal On SweptFreq or Freq or Frq SCPI NONE Analyzer NONE Programming Codes See Also STATUS MESSAGES D 6 Operating and Programming Reference Doubler Amp Mode Off Doubler Amp Mode AUTO Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER This softkey is applicable to instrument models with a doubler installed The doubler has an integral amplifier whose operation is controlled by the instrument firmware The use of the amplifier depends on the frequency of operation and on the calibration constants set at the factory The instrument defaults after preset to this automatic mode of operation which is the specified operation This softkey has no effect on instruments without a doubler An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active This feature is the default after preset SCPI POWer AMPLifier STATE AUTO ON OFF 0 1 POWer AMPLifier STATE AUTO Analyzer NONE Dbir Amp Menu Doubler Amp Mode Off Function Group Menu Map Description POWER This softkey is applicable to instrument models with a doubler installed The doubler has an integral amplifier whose operation is controlled by the instrument firmware This softkey turns off the automatic mode of operation and turns off the amplifier so that it is never
166. efore operating this instrument Warning denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in injury or loss of life Do not proceed beyond a warning note until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met Caution denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure that if not correctly performed or adhered to would result in damage to or destruction of the instrument Do not proceed beyond a caution sign until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met General Safety Considerations WARNING No operator serviceable parts inside Refer servicing to qualified personnel To prevent electrical shock do not remove covers For continued protection against fire hazard replace line fuse only with same type and rating F 5A 250V The use of other fuses or material is prohibited This is a Safety Class product provided with a protective earthing ground incorporated in the power cord The mains plug shall only be inserted in a socket outlet provided with a protective earth contact Any interruption of the protective conductor inside or outside the instrument is likely to make the instrument dangerous Intentional interruption is prohibited If this instrument is used in a manner not specified by Agilent Technologies the protection provided by the instrument may be impaired This product must be used in a normal condition in which
167. efore requires a power meter to set a particular power To set the swept CW generator to the search mode 1 Press ALC 2 Select Leveling Mode Search In this mode the swept CW generator is in the normal ALC mode until the desired power level is reached then the ALC is disconnected Optimizing Swept CW Generator Performance Creating and Applying the User Flatness Correction Array The following examples demonstrate the user flatness correction feature 1 Using an HP Agilent 437B power meter to automatically enter correction data for a swept 4 to 10 GHz measurement 2 Manually entering correction data for a stepped List Mode measurement 3 Making swept mm wave measurements automatically entering correction data for an arbitrary list of correction frequencies 4 Making scalar analysis measurements with automatically entered correction data that compensates for power variations at the output of a directional bridge Each example illustrates how to set up correction tables for a different measurement requirement Modify the instrument setups shown to suit your particular needs Completed correction tables may be easily edited if more correction data is required for your measurement Additional correction frequencies may be added by using the auto fill feature or by entering correction frequencies individually The auto fill feature adds but does not delete correction frequencies There are two basic fron
168. egative TRansition Filter for the Data Questionable Status Register The STATus PRESet value is 0 e STATus QUEStionable PTRansition lt num gt e STATus QUEStionable PTRansition Sets and queries the Positive TRansition Filter for the Data Questionable Status Register After STATus PRESet all used bits are set to ls Interactions between dwell sweep time points step size and frequency span are as follows SWEep TIME 5 ms SWEep DWEL1 x SWEep POINts 1 FREQ SPAN SWEep STEP x SWEep POINts 1 SWEep xx AUTO switches DWELI TIME Switch Action OFF OFF No coupling between SWEep DWELI SWEep TIME and SWEep POINts OFF ON No coupling between SWEep DWELI SWEep TIME and SWEep POINts ON OFF When SWEEP TIME or SWEEP POINts are changed SWEep DWELI SWEep TIME SWEep POINts 1 5 mS SWEep DWELI is limited to 100 us minimum ON ON SWEep DWELI 100 us MINimum SWEep TIME 5 1 ms x SWEep POINts 1 e SWEep CONTrol STATe ON OFF 1 0 e SWEep CONTrol STATe Sets and queries the state of the sweep control OFF Normal source mode ON Use master slave source mode RST value is OFF e SWEep CONTrol TYPE MASTer SLAVe e SWEep CONTrol TYPE Operating and Programming Reference S 41 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY Sets and queries the instrument whether it is in master or slave mode This applies in a dual source mode RST value is MASTer e SWEep DWEL1 lt num g
169. empty Press PRIOR Leave the delete menu and return to the previous softkey menu Select Auto Fill Start 2 GHz Set the first frequency in correction table to 2 GHz Auto Fill Stop 2 0 GHz Set the last frequency in correction table to 20 GHz Auto Fill Incr 1 0 Maz Set the frequency increment to every 100 MHz from 2 to 20 GHz Set up Power Meter Zero and calibrate the power meter sensor Connect the power sensor to test port Enter and store in the power meter the power sensor s cal factors for correction frequencies to be used Enter Correction Data into Array Select Mtr Meas Menu Measure Corr All The power meter is now under swept CW generator control and is performing the sequence of steps necessary to generate the correction information at each frequency point If an GPIB error message is displayed verify that the interface connections are correct Check the GPIB address of the power meter and ensure that it is the same address the swept CW generator is using address 13 is assumed Refer to the menu map 8 System for the key sequence necessary to reach softkey Meter Adrs Getting Started Advanced 1 45 1 46 Getting Started Advanced 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Enable User Flatness Correction When the operation is complete a message is displayed the flatness correction array is ready to be applied to your setup Disconnect the power meter sensor On the sw
170. ence marker for use in the delta mode While n may be used there is really only a single reference for all the markers MARKer1 REFerence 5 and MARKer2 REFerence 5 both set marker 5 as the reference e MARKer n STATe ON OFF 1 0 e MARKer n STATe The state of the specified marker is set and queried marker number one if n is not specified The RST value for all markers is OFF Operating and Programming Reference S 35 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY Power Subsystem Any place where dBm is accepted as a suffix any level suffix is accepted also In the absence of a suffix the units are assumed to be as set by the UNIT POW command e POWer ALC BANDwidth BWIDth lt num gt freq suffix MAXimum MINimum e POWer ALC BANDwidth BWIDth MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the ALC bandwidth This is actually not continuously variable so the input is rounded to the nearest possible switch position RST setting is automatically determined since AUTO is ON e POWer ALC BANDwidth BWIDth AUTO ON OFF 1 0 e POWer ALC BANDwidth BWIDth AUTO Sets and queries the automatic ALC bandwidth selection switch The RST value is ON e POWer ALC CFACtor lt num gt DB MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN e POWer ALC CFACtor MINimum MAXimum Sets and queries the coupling factor used when the command POWer ALC SOURce is set to DIODe or PMETer e POWer ALC SOURce INTernal DIODe PMETer MMHead e POWer ALC SOURce Sets and que
171. enu Start M1 Stop M2 Marker Operation in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 M 4 Operating and Programming Reference Marker M3 Marker M2 Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also MARKER See MARKER Mi SCPI MAR Ker2 FREQuency lt num gt freq suffix or MAXimum MINimum MARKer2 STATe ON OFF 1 0 Analyzer M2 function on MO function off Ampl Markers MI M2 Sweep MARKER MkrRef Menu Start M1 Stop M2 Marker Operation in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 Marker M3 Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also MARKER See MARKER Mi SCPI MAR Ker3 FREQuency lt num gt freq suffix or MAXimum MINimum MARKer3 STATe ON OFF 1 0 Analyzer M3 function on MO function off Ampl Markers MARKER MkrRef Menu Marker Operation in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference M 5 Marker M4 Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also MARKER See MARKER M1 SCPI MARKer4 FREQuency lt num gt freq suffix or MAXimum MINimum MARKer4 STATe ON OFF 1 0 Analyzer M4 function on MO function off Ampl Markers MARKER MkrRef Menu Marker Operation in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 Marker M5 Function Group Menu Map Description
172. enu Sweep Mode Step Using Step Sweep in Chapter 1 S 60 Operating and Programming Reference step Swp Menu Step swp Menu Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY This softkey reveals the stepped frequency sweep entry menu Dwell Coupled Step Step Step Step Step Step Step Step Control Master Control Slave Dwell Points Size Swp Pt Trig Auto Swp Pt Trig Bus Swp Pt Trig Ext SCPI NONE Analyzer NONE Couples the dwell time for stepped sweep points to ramp sweep sweep time Causes the swept CW generator to act as the master control in a dual swept CW generator measurement setup Causes the swept CW generator to act as the slave in a dual swept CW generator measurement setup Sets the dwell time for points in stepped sweep Sets the number of points in a stepped sweep Sets the increment value for the points in a stepped sweep Automatically steps the swept CW generator to the next point in a stepped sweep Steps the swept CW generator to the next point in a stepped sweep when an GPIB trigger is received Steps the swept CW generator to the next point in a stepped sweep when an external hardware trigger is received START STOP Sweep Mode Step SWEEP TIME Using Step Sweep in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference S 61 Step Swp Pt Trig Auto Function Group Menu Map Descrip
173. ep mode Depending on what parameter is sweeping frequency and or power can be changed manually with the rotary knob or the arrow keys Automatically triggers a sweep when SINGLE or CONT is pressed Waits for an GPIB trigger to trigger a sweep when SINGLE or CONT is pressed Waits for an external hardware trigger to trigger a sweep when SINGLE or CONT is pressed Activates the list frequency sweep mode Activates the analog frequency sweep mode Activates the stepped frequency sweep mode Sets the sweep time to a minimum value for a given span Sets the time delay after phase lock and before a trigger pulse is sent from the ANALYZER INTERFACE BNC A source settled SRQ is generated Programming Codes See Also Sweep Mode List SCPI NONE Analyzer NONE Softkeys listed above Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 sweep Mode List Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SWEEP This softkey activates the step frequency list mode To use this type of sweep a frequency list must have been entered otherwise an error message appears In this mode the swept CW generator steps only those frequencies defined by the frequency list An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI FREQuency MODE LIST Analyzer SN CONNECTORS List Menu Creating and Using a Frequency List in Chapter 1 Operating and Pr
174. ept CW generator press POWER LEVEL n dBm Where n Po max Ppath loss for maximum leveled power at the test port To save the swept CW generator parameters including the correction table in an internal register press GAVE n n number 1 through 8 Reactivate the 8757 System Interface Set the analyzer to SYSINTF ON the analyzer and swept CW generator preset Press RECALL 1 Recall the swept CW generator parameters from storage register 1 On the swept CW generator press amber LED on The power produced at the point where the power meter sensor was disconnected is now calibrated at the frequencies and power level specified above Using Detector Calibration NEGATIVE DETECTOR Detector calibration is useful for characterizing and compensating for negative diode detectors used in external leveling Detectors may be characterized by three operating regions as shown in Figure 1 12 the square law the linear and the transition region The following steps use an HP Agilent 437B to automatically characterize the operating regions and use this information to automatically compensate for the detector being used The equipment setup shown in Figure 1 22 assumes that the steps necessary to correctly externally level have been followed Refer to menu map 9 USER CAL GENERATOR D00000 RF OUTPUT DIRECTIONAL COUPLER POHER SENSOR detcall Figure 1 22 Automatically
175. ept CW generator uses bumping to move unspecified frequency parameters but if the final value of any of the frequency headers is the result of bumping then an error is generated since the user is not getting what was specified This means to guarantee sequence independence requires sending the frequency pairs in a single message Example 1 present state start 5 GHz stop 6 GHz FREQ STARt 20 GHZ an error results since the stop frequency is bumped FREQ STOP 22 GHZ the final sweep does not generate an error 20 to 22 Example 2 present state start 5 GHz stop 6 GHz FREQ STOP 22 GHZ no error is generated start frequency is unchanged FREQ STARt 20 GHZ still no error Example 3 present state start 5 GHz stop 6 GHz FREQ STARt 20 GHZ STOP 22 GHZ both are fine FREQ STOP 22 GHZ STARt 20 GHZ no errors e FREQuency CENTer lt num gt freq suffix MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN e FREQuency CENTer MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the center frequency The RST value is MAX MIN 2 e FREQuency CW FIXed lt num gt freq suffix MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN e FREQuency CW MAXimum MINimum e FREQuency FIXed MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the CW frequency This does not change the swept CW mode switch RST value is MAX MIN 2 See FREQ CENTER for more information e FREQuency CW AUTO ON OFF 1 0 e FREQuency FIXed AUTO ON OFF 1 0 e FREQuency CW AUTO e FREQuency FIXed
176. equency point If an GPIB error message is displayed verify that the interface connections are correct Check the GPIB address of the power meter and ensure that it is the same address the swept CW generator is using address 13 is assumed Refer to the menu map 8 System for the key sequence necessary to reach softkey Meter Adrs Enable User Flatness Correction When the operation is complete a message is displayed the flatness correction array is ready to be applied to your setup Disconnect the power meter sensor and press amber LED on The power produced at the point where the power meter sensor was disconnected is now calibrated at the frequencies and power level specified above Getting Started Advanced 1 35 1 36 Getting Started Advanced Creating a User Flatness Array Example 2 This example shows how to use the swept CW generator and a power meter in manual entry mode This example also introduces two features of the swept CW generator The softkey Freq Follow simplifies the data entry process and the softkey List Mode sets up a list of arbitrary test frequencies The frequency follow feature automatically sets the source to a CW test frequency equivalent to the active correction frequency in the user flatness correction table The front panel arrow keys are used to move around the correction table and enter frequency correction pairs Simultaneously the swept CW generator test frequency is updated to the selected co
177. er LED on Standby provides power to the internal frequency standard oven When line power is connected and the line switch is set to on the swept CW generator power supplies are enabled and a limited self test is initiated The CPU self test is performed power supplies and the front panel processor are checked NONE INSTALLATION for information on fuses Error Messages for information on messages displayed at power on Operating and Programming Reference L 5 List Menu Function Group FREQUENCY Menu Map 2 Description Auto Fill Incr Auto Fill Pts Auto Fill Start Auto Fill Stop Delete Menu Enter List Dwell Enter List Freq Enter List Power Global Dwell Global Offset Pt Trig Menu This softkey allows access to the frequency list functions Automatically creates a frequency list using the user specified increment value Automatically creates a frequency list containing a user specified number of points Allows the entry of a start frequency for the frequency list Allows the entry of a stop frequency for the frequency list Reveals the frequency list delete menu Allows the entry of a dwell time for a frequency point in the frequency list Allows the entry of a frequency point into the frequency list Allows the entry of an ALC output power correction value for a frequency in the frequency list Automatically sets the dwell time for all points in the frequency list t
178. er a hardware failure or misadjustment Indicates a phase lock loop error caused by either a hardware failure or misadjustment Initiate a full self test to gather more information if this fault is indicated Indicates that the transfer of fractional N data has failed Initiate a full self test to gather more information if this fault is indicated Operating and Programming Reference F 3 Fault Info 2 Programming Codes SCPI NONE Analyzer NONE See Also Fault Menu Fault Info 3 Function Group SERVICE Menu Map 6 Description This softkey displays the latched status of the following fault messages CALYO FAIL Indicates that the YO adjusted at power on or at CALMAN FAIL TMR CNFLCT FAIL SEARCH Programming Codes SCPI NONE preset is unable to calibrate Initiate a full self test to gather more information if this fault is indicated Indicates that the manual sweep DAC adjusted at power on or at preset is unable to calibrate Initiate a full self test to gather more information if this fault is indicated Indicates a possible internal software error Two routines are trying to use the same timer Indicates that the ALC search leveling algorithm has failed This fault indication is possible only if the search leveling mode is on Analyzer NONE See Also Fault Menu F 4 Operating and Programming Reference Fltness Menu Fltness Menu Function Group POWER Menu Map 5 Description This so
179. er compatible A 13 status bytes compatible 3 24 status of phase locked loops display U 1 status register analyzer A 13 status registers condition register 1 106 enable register 1 107 event register 1 107 example sequence 1 107 general model 1 106 transition filter 1 107 status register structure SCPI S 47 status system overview 1 106 STB 5 14 step attenuator A 6 step control master 56 step control slave S 57 step dwell S 59 stepped frequency mode dwell time S 59 stepped mode number of points S 59 stepped sweep coupled D 8 stepped sweep mode S 66 stepped sweep mode step size S 60 step points 5 59 step points dwell time D 8 step size S 60 step size CW frequency U 2 step size power level U 1 step size swept frequency U 3 step sweep functions S 60 step sweep trigger automatic S 61 step sweep trigger bus 62 step sweep trigger external 62 stimulus response measurements programming example 1 77 stop frequency flatness correction A 21 frequency list A 21 stop frequency key S 63 stop sweep in out connector C 4 storage 3 17 storage registers 1 16 store instrument state command S 14 store instrument state key S 1 string response data discussed in detail 1 86 subsystem commands 1 67 defined 1 67 graphical tree format 1 68 tabular format 1 71 summary bit 1 107 suppression of EOL 1 61 sweep continuous C 10 frequency markers M 1 power P 7 SW Eep simplified subsys
180. er off regardless of the frequency of operation Using this mode results in unspecified performance Operating and Programming Reference D 1 Delete Menu Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY POWER 2 5 In the menu structure there are two occurrences of this softkey It leads to the delete choices for both the frequency list menu and the power flatness menu Delete All Deletes the complete array Delete Current Deletes the active line in the array Appears in the power flatness menu only It deletes the points that are undefined Delete Undef SCPI NONE see Fltness Menu or List Menu Analyzer NONE Fltness Menu List Menu Optimizing Swept CW Generator Performance in Chapter 1 Delete All Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY POWER 2 5 In the menu structure there are two occurrences of this softkey One occurs in the frequency list menu The other occurs in the power flatness menu In the both applications this softkey lets you delete all entries in the array with one keystroke SCPI NONE see Fltness Menu or List Menu Analyzer NONE Fltness Menu List Menu Optimizing Swept CW Generator Performance in Chapter 1 D 2 Operating and Programming Reference Delete Undef Delete Current Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY POWER 2 5 In the
181. er requested Uncoupled Operation In some applications it is advantageous to control the ALC level and attenuator separately using combinations of settings that are not available in coupled operation In uncoupled mode Uncoupl Atten when the desired power output is set via POWER LEVEL only the ALC level is changed The attenuator setting is changed via Set Atten One use of uncoupled operation is power sweep where the output power linearly tracks the sweep voltage ramp The swept CW generator can generate power sweeps of up to 40 dB depending on frequency The power at the start of the sweep is set via POWER LEVEL coupled operation or by a combination of POWER LEVEL and Set Atten uncoupled operation The sweep range is entered by selecting Power Sweep If the sweep range entered exceeds the ALC range stop power greater than maximum available power the UNLVLED warning message appears at the end of sweep No warning is given at the time of entry If the start power is entered when the swept CW generator is in coupled operation the ALC level is set no lower than 10 dBm limiting the available power sweep range Using uncoupled operation and setting the ALC level to 20 dBm gives an additional 10 dB of sweep range External Leveling Leveling Mode Normal Leveling Point ExtDet or PwrMtr or Module In externally leveled operations the output power from the swept CW generator is detected by an external sensor T
182. er to ADJUSTMENTS in the Agilent Technologies 8360 B Series Swept Signal Generator 8360 L Series Swept CW Generator Service Guide for more information SCPI Error Messages in Numerical Order Swept CW Generator Specific SCPI Error Messages 0 No Error This message indicates that the device has no errors and is currently ready to perform the operations for which it is designed 1 FUNCTION DISABLED The particular function invoked has been disabled by a calibration constant If you need access to the function contact a qualified service technician 2 Wrong password This error occurs when the service adjustment menu password is entered incorrectly or the wrong password has been used Qualified service technicians refer to ADJUSTMENTS in the Agilent Technologies 8360 B Series Swept Signal Generator 8360 L Series Swept CW Generator Service Guide for more information 4 Unable to store data in EEROM 5 Not allowed to change address Error Messages 2a 5 Universal SCPI Error Messages 2a 6 Error Messages 6 Switch on Processor Board is Set This error occurs when a service adjustment menu password can not be set because the override switch on the processor is set Qualified service technicians refer to ADJUSTMENTS in the Agilent Technologies 8360 B Series Swept Signal Generator 8360 L Series Swept CW Generator Service Guide for more information Error Messages From 499 To 400 These
183. eral Information Interconnecting Cables Instrument Addresses GPIB Instrument Nomenclature Listener Talker Controller Programming the Swept CW Generator GPIB Command Statements Abort Remote Local Lockout Local Clear Output Enter Getting Started with SCPI Definitions of Terms Standard Notation Command Mnemonics Angle Brackets How to Use Examples Command Examples Response Examples Essentials for Beginners Program and Response Messages Forgiving Listening and Precise Talking Types of Commands Subsystem Command Trees The Command Tree Structure Paths Through the Command Tree Subsystem Command Tables Reading the Command Table More About Commands Query and Event Commands Implied Commands Optional Parameters Program Message Examples Parameter Types Numeric Parameters Extended Numeric Parameters Discrete Parameters Contents 2 1 49 1 49 1 49 1 50 1 51 1 52 1 53 1 54 1 55 1 56 1 56 1 56 1 56 1 56 1 56 1 56 1 56 1 57 1 57 1 58 1 58 1 59 1 59 1 60 1 61 1 63 1 63 1 64 1 64 1 64 1 64 1 64 1 65 1 66 1 66 1 66 1 67 1 68 1 68 1 68 1 71 1 71 1 72 1 72 1 72 1 72 1 72 1 73 1 73 1 74 1 75 Boolean Parameters Reading Instrument Errors Example Programs Example Program Description Program Listing Program Comments Details of Commands and Responses In This Subsection Program Message Syntax Subsystem Command Syntax Common Comma
184. erator without removing the instrument handles The following table itemizes the parts in this kit Table 3 6 Rack Flange Kit for Swept CW Generators with Handles Attached Contents Quantity Description 2 Rack Mount Flanges 8 Screws Ventilation Requirements When installing the instrument in a cabinet the convection into and out of the instrument must not be restricted The ambient temperature outside the cabinet must be less than the maximum operating temperature of the instrument by 4 C for every 100 watts dissipated in the cabinet If the total power dissipated in the cabinet is greater than 800 watts then forced convection must be used Installation 3 15 Installation Procedure 1 Refer to Figure 3 6 Remove handle trim strips 2 Remove the four screws on each side that attach the handles to the instrument 3 Using the longer screws provided attach the rack mount flanges to the outside of the handles 4 Remove the bottom and back feet and the tilt stands before rack mounting the instrument 7 Figure 3 6 Rack Mount Flanges for Swept CW Generators with Handles Attached 3 16 Installation Storage and Shipment Environment The swept CW generator may be stored or shipped within the following limits Temperature 40 to 75 C Humidity 5 to 95 relative at 0 to 40 C Altitude Up to 15240 meters Pressure approximately 50 000 feet The swept CW generator shou
185. erence P 7 Power Sweep Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER This softkey enables the power sweep function RF output power can be swept both positively and negatively over a selected range The level of the power sweep starting point is the power level programmed Power sweep widths can be 45 dB wide in either direction However the settable power sweep range is dependent on the ALC level set An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI POWer MODE SWEep FIXed POWer STARt lt num gt level suffix MAXimum MINimum POWer SPAN lt num gt level suffix MAXimum MINimum Analyzer PS1 function on PSO function off POWER LEVEL Power Slope Power Sweep and Power Slope Operation in Chapter 1 P 8 Operating and Programming Reference PRESET PRESET Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also INSTRUMENT STATE NONE This hardkey green causes the swept CW generator to perform a short version of self test and initializes the swept CW generator to a standard starting configuration Two states can be defined for the standard configuration Factory or User Press PRESET at any time to test the swept CW generator and restore to a standard configuration If the red LED adjacent to the PRESET key labeled INSTR CHECK stays on after preset the swept CW generator failed self test refer to Agilent Technologie
186. ernal EX Ternal NONE AUTO state Boolean ONJOFF 1 0 STATus OPERation CONDition ENABle numeric 0 to 2047 EVENt NTRansition neg transition numeric 0 to 2047 filter PTRansition pos transition numeric 0 to 2047 filter PRESet QUEStionable CONDition ENABle SRQ enable register numeric 0 to 2047 EVENt NTRansition neg transition numeric 0 to 2047 filter PTRansition pos transition numeric 0 to 2047 Operating and Programming Reference S 21 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY Table S 1 8360 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY continued Command Parameters Parameter Type Allowed Values SWEep CON Trol STATe dual source Boolean ON OFF 1 0 mode TYPE type of discrete MASTer SLAVe sweep control DWELI settling time extended numeric 0 1 to 3200 ms plus dwell time or MAXimum MINimum AUTO dwell calculation Boolean ON OFF 1 0 state GENeration type of sweep discrete STEPped ANALog MANual POINt step point numeric 1 to the number of step points number RELative percent of sweep extended numeric 0 to 100 MARKer STATe state Boolean ON OFF 1 0 X FER Ml start M2 stop MODE manual sweep discrete AUTO MANual mode switch POINts points in step numeric lt num gt MA Ximum MINimum sweep STEP step size extended numeric function of current span MA Ximum MINimum TIME sweep time extended numeric 200s to 133 ms or MA Ximum MINimum AUTO auto sweep Boolean ON OFF 1 0 time switch LLIMit fastest sweep extende
187. error messages indicate that the Output Queue Control of the swept CW generator has detected a problem with the message exchange protocol This type of error sets the Query Error Bit bit 2 in the Event Status Register One of the following has occurred m An attempt has been made to read data from the Output Queue when no output is present or is pending m Data in the Output Queue has been lost Events that generate Query Errors do not generate Command Errors Execution Errors or Device specific Errors 440 Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite res 430 Query DEADLOCKED 430 Query DEADLOCKED Output Buffer Full 420 Query UNTERMINATED 420 Query UNTERMINATED Nothing To Say 410 Query INTERRUPTED Error Messages From 399 To 300 These error messages indicate that some device operations did not properly complete possibly due to an abnormal hardware or firmware condition This type of error sets the Device specific Error bit 3 in the Event Status Register Events that generate Device specific Errors do not generate Command Errors Execution Errors or Query Errors 350 Too many errors and also 32768 330 Self test failed 330 Self test failed Power On Tests 313 Calibration memory lost Defaulted Error Messages From 299 To 200 These error messages indicate that an error has been detected by the swept CW generator s Execution Control Block An error of this type sets the Execution
188. es a front panel setting that was previously stored in a SAVE register 1 through 8 SCPI RCL lt num gt The above is an IEEE 488 2 common command Analyzer RCn where n a numeric value from 0 to 9 SAVE SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY Saving and Recalling an Instrument State in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 Ref Osc Menu Function Group Menu Map Description SYSTEM This softkey reveals the softkeys in the frequency standard menu 10 MHz Freq Standard Auto Automatically selects the frequency standard to be used by the swept CW generator 10 MHz Freq Standard Extrnl Sets the swept CW generator to accept an external frequency standard as its reference 10 MHz Freq Standard Intrnl Sets the swept CW generator to use its internal frequency standard as its reference Operating and Programming Reference R 1 Ref Osc Menu Programming Codes See Also 10 MHz Freq Standard None Sets the swept CW generator to free run operation where no frequency standard is used SCPI ROSCillator SOURce INTernal EX Ternal NONe Analyzer NONE Softkeys listed above RF ON OFF Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER NONE This hardkey turns the RF power output on or off Press RF_ON OFF If the yellow LED above the hardkey is off power is off and RF OFF appears in the message line of the display Press the key again to turn on RF power and
189. es are sent in the same message the groups of data items corresponding to each query are separated by a semicolon For example the fictitious query QUERY1 QUERY2 might return a response message of lt datal gt lt data1 gt lt data2 gt lt data2 gt Response data types are explained later in this subsection Note that lt new line gt lt END gt is always sent as a response message terminator 1 82 Getting Started Programming SCPI Data Types These paragraphs explain the data types available for parameters and response data They list the types available and present examples for each type SCPI defines different data formats for use in program messages and response messages It does this to accommodate the principle of forgiving listening and precise talking Recall that forgiving listening means instruments are flexible accepting commands and parameters in various formats Precise talking means an instrument always responds to a particular query in a predefined rigid format Parameter data types are designed to be flexible in the spirit of forgiving listening Conversely response data types are defined to meet the requirements of precise talking Table 1 3 SCPI Data Types Parameter Types Response Data Types Numeric Real or Integer Extended Numeric Integer Discrete Discrete Boolean Numeric Boolean String String Block Definite Length Block Indefinite Length Block Non decimal Numeric He
190. es can be categorized into two groups those that mimic front panel keystrokes and those that are unique and have no front panel equivalent 1 56 Getting Started Programming GPIB Command Statements In the programming explanations that follow specific examples are included that are written in a generic dialect of the BASIC language BASIC was selected because the majority of GPIB computers have BASIC language capability However other languages can also be used Command statements form the nucleus of GPIB programming they are understood by all instruments in the network and when combined with the programming language codes they provide all management and data communication instructions for the system An explanation of the fundamental command statements follows However some computers use a slightly different terminology or support an extended or enhanced version of these commands Consider the following explanations as a starting point but for detailed information consult the BASIC language reference manual the I O programming guide and the GPIB manual for the particular computer used Syntax drawings accompany each statement All items enclosed by a circle or oval are computer specific terms that must be entered exactly as described items enclosed in a rectangular box are names of parameters used in the statement and the arrows indicate a path that generates a valid combination of statement elements The seven fundamen
191. es the value of the amplitude marker While n may S 34 Operating and Programming Reference SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY be used there is really only a single value for all the markers RST value is 2 dB e MARKer n AOFF Sets all the markers to OFF at once While n may be used there is really only a single switch for all the markers e MARKer n DELTa lt num gt lt num gt This query returns the difference in frequency between the two specified marker numbers e MARKer n FREQuency lt num gt freq suffix MAXimum MINimum e MARKer n FREQuency MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the specified marker frequency marker number one is the default if n is not specified The value is interpreted differently based on the value of the marker mode MARKer n MODE How the frequency of the marker is determined FREQuency Absolute frequency is used The limits are confined to the present START and STOP frequency limits DELTa The value is specified with respect to the reference marker MARKer n REFerence The RST values are the same as the FREQ CENTcommand RST value e MARKer n MODE FREQuency DELTa e MARKer n MODE Sets and queries the mode of the specified marker Setting one marker to delta turns all other marker modes to frequency If n is not specified the default is one RST value is FREQuency e MARKer n REFerence lt n gt e MARKer n REFerence Sets and queries which marker is the refer
192. escription This softkey lets you select Analyzer Language as the swept CW Programming Codes See Also generator s interface language This language uses Agilent 8340 8341 mnemonics and provides Agilent network analyzer compatibility Any commands issued within 100 ms of a change in language may be ignored or lost An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI SYSTem LANGuage COMPatible Analyzer NONE Adrs Menu ANALYZER STATUS REGISTER Getting Started Programming in Chapter 1 Chapter 3 Programming Language CIIL Function Group Menu Map SYSTEM Operating and Programming Reference P 13 Programming Language CIIL Description Programming Codes See Also This softkey lets you select CIIL as the swept CW generator s external interface language The use of this language requires the M A T E option Option 700 to be installed Any commands issued within 100 ms of a change in language may be ignored or lost An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI SYSTem LANGuage CHL Analyzer CIIL Adrs Menu The M A T E option Option 700 is documented in a separate manual supplement called Agilent Technologies 8360 Series Synthesized Sweepers Option 700 Manual Supplement Programming Language SCPI Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SYSTEM Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments SCPI is
193. esent at both front and rear connectors This is the default after preset Module Select Front Sets the swept CW generator to select the source module connected to the front panel source module interface connector Module Select Rear Sets the swept CW generator to select the source module connected to the rear panel source module interface connector Module Select None Disables source module sensing Programming Codes SCPI NONE Analyzer NONE See Also Softkeys listed above M 10 Operating and Programming Reference Module Select Front Module Select AUTO Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER and FREQUENCY 2 and 5 This command sets the automatic selection of the millimeter source module interface connector The swept CW generator looks at both front and rear connectors and determines the type of source module if any connected If a source module is present at both connectors the swept CW generator selects the front connector as the active one After selecting the interface the instrument frequency limits and multiplier are altered accordingly However the leveling point is not changed See Leveling Point Module to set the swept CW generator to level at the output of the source module An asterisk next to the key label indicates this feature is active This feature is the default after preset SCPI SYSTem MMHead SELect AUTO ON OFF 1 0 SYSTem MM Head SELect AUTO Ana
194. eset Mode User Changing the Preset Parameters in Chapter 1 2 Operating and Programming Reference SCPI Conformance Information SCPI Conformance Information The Agilent 8360 L Series swept CW generators conform to the 1990 0 version of SCPI The following are the SCPI confirmed commands implemented by the 8360 L Series swept CW generators m ABORt m CORRection STATe a DISPlay STATe STATe a FREQuency CENTer CENTer CW AUTO AUTO FIXed CW FIXed AUTO AUTO FIXed MANual MANual MODE MODE SPAN SPAN STARt STARt STOP STOP a LIST DWELI POINts DWELI FREQuency POINts FREQuency a MARKer n AOFF FREQuency FREQuency REFerence REFerence STATe STATe m POWer ALC Operating and Programming Reference S 3 SCPI Conformance Information BAN Dwidth BWIDth AUTO AUTO BAN Dwidth BWIDth AT Tenuation AUTO AUTO AT Tenuation LE Vel LE Vel MODE MODE RANGe SPAN SPAN STARt STARt STOP STOP a PULM SOURce SOURce STATe STATe a ROSCillator SOURce AUTO AUTO SOURce a STATus OPERation CONDition ENA Ble ENA Ble EVENt NTRansition NTRansition PTRansition PTRansition PRESet QUEStionable CONDition ENA Ble ENA Ble EVENt NTRansition NTRansition PTRansition PTRansition a SWEep S 4
195. f an underline cursor appears under a digit in the entry display then the value will be modified by the up down arrow keys or the rotary knob The increment decrement size in this case is the underlined digit by the power of 10 If the up down function is on asterisk next to key label and the cursor is not under one of the active entry area digits then frequency value is changed by the up down size using either the up down arrow keys or the rotary knob SCPI FREQuency STEP INCR lt num gt freq suffix or MAXimum MINimum Analyzer SF or SHCF lt num gt Hz Kz Mz Gz Up Dn Size CW Operating and Programming Reference U 3 USER CAL Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also USER CAL This hardkey accesses the user calibration softkeys Performs a complete alignment as determined by the instrument settings FullUsr Cal Accesses the softkeys of the tracking menu Tracking Menu Freq Cal Menu Accesses the Frequency span calibration menu Ext Det Cal Uses an external power meter to calibrate an external detector s output voltage relative to power NONE Softkeys listed above Optimizing Swept CW Generator Performance in Chapter 1 USER DEFINED Function Group Menu Map Description USER DEFINED NONE This hardkey reveals the customized menu created by selecting softkeys and assigning them to this menu The user defined menu is empty until you assign keys to
196. frequency points in the flatness correction array Meas Corr Current Measures a flatness correction value for the frequency point currently in the active line of the flatness correction array Meas Corr Undef Measures flatness correction values for all frequency points in the flatness correction array that have no correction values assigned The meter measure function uses an external HP Agilent 437B power meter to automatically measure and store power correction values for the frequency points requested Programming Codes SCPI NONE see Fltness Menu Analyzer NONE See Also _ Flatness Menu Creating and Applying the User Flatness Correction Array in Chapter 1 M 14 Operating and Programming Reference Peak RF Always Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER USER CAL 5 9 This softkey appears in two locations the POWER Tracking Menu and the USER CAL Tracking Menu The operation is the same in both locations This softkey causes the swept CW generator when in CW or manual sweep output mode to align the output filter SYTM so that its passband is centered on the RF output Peaking is used to obtain both the maximum available power and spectral purity and the best pulse FM envelopes at a given frequency This peaking occurs each time the frequency is changed or every seven minutes An asterisk next to the key label indicates this function is active SCPI CALibration PEAKing
197. front panel When the self test is complete the swept CW generator returns to the same functional configuration that it was in prior to power off When the PRESET key is engaged the swept CW generator returns to the factory or user preset functional configuration 1 Turn the swept CW generator on Note the functional configuration 2 Turn the swept CW generator off Verify that the amber STANDBY LED is on 3 Turn the swept CW generator on Verify that the amber STANDBY LED is off and that the green POWER ON LED is on a Check the display a cursor will appear in the upper left corner followed by the GPIB language GPIB address and the date code of the firmware installed in the swept CW generator b The display will now indicate the functional configuration noted in step 1 c Check the fan it should be turning 4 2 Operator s Check Routine Maintenance Main Check 1 Press SERVICE 2 Select Selftest Full Check that all tests performed pass 3 Press PRESET If the display indicates a user preset was performed select Factory Preset Verify that the green SWEEP LED is blinking the amber RF ON OFF LED is on and the red INSTR CHECK LED is off 4 Press USER CAL 5 Select Tracking Menu a If the swept CW generator has Option 001 step attenuator select Auto Track Wait for the swept CW generator to finish peaking before continuing b If the swept CW generator has no step attenuator install
198. ftkey reveals the softkeys in the flatness correction menu that control user defined leveling parameters Auto Fill Incr Auto Fill Pts Auto Fill Start Auto Fill Stop Clear Point Copy List CorPair Disable Delete Menu Enter Corr Enter Freq Freq Follow Mtr Meas Menu Automatically creates a frequency list with all points separated by the specified increment in a given frequency range Automatically creates a frequency list containing the specified number of points in a given frequency range Sets the start frequency of the flatness correction array that will load automatically when either the number of points or the increment size is specified Sets the stop frequency of the flatness array that will load automatically when either the number of points or the increment size is specified Changes the power correction value for the indicated frequency point to the undefined state Copies the frequency list see List Menu into the frequency parameter of the flatness correction array Disables the frequency correction pair array and uses the GPIB transferred 1601 point correction set to apply correction information Reveals the delete softkeys Enables the entry of a power correction value for a frequency point Enables the entry of a single frequency point into the flatness correction array Sets the swept CW generator to CW frequency mode so that the corresponding correction values can be en
199. g airflow 3 9 copy frequency list C 10 copy list C 10 correcting for power sensitive devices F 4 correction value enter E 1 correction value entry F 11 COUNt in general programming model 1 112 coupled attenuator A 6 coupled frequency C 12 coupled stepped sweep to sweep time D 8 coupling factor C 11 current path defined 1 68 rules for setting 1 68 custom menus A 17 CW CF coupled C 12 CW frequency C 12 CW frequency step size U 2 CW operation 1 6 damage claims 3 1 data display area 1 4 data questionable event register clear S 12 data types explained briefly 1 73 date code of firmware S 52 decrement key A 16 decrement step size CW frequency U 2 power U 1 decrement step size swept frequency U 3 defaulting language message 2a 1 defined preset P 10 define increment size A 18 define number of points A 19 defining sweep limits 1 6 1 8 definitions of terms 1 63 delete D 1 delete active array entry D 2 delete all D 2 delete array D 2 delete current D 2 delete undefined entry D 3 delta marker 1 14 D 3 delta marker reference D 4 detector Index 5 Index 6 coupling factor C 11 detector calibration 1 47 48 E 5 device enter statement 1 61 device output statement 1 60 diagnostics fault information F 1 diode detectors characterization of 1 47 directional coupler coupling factor C 11 disable interface address changes 3 8 disable save S 1 disable user flatness array C
200. ge appears Error too many list points requested Points used 0 Points available 801 SCPI NONE see Fltness Menu or List Menu Analyzer NONE Fltness Menu List Menu Optimizing Swept CW Generator Performance in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference A 19 Auto Fill Start Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY POWER 2 5 This softkey is used in two locations Fltness Menu and List Menu The operation is the same in both applications This softkey enables the entry of a start frequency used to determine the beginning frequency of the automatic filling array The array is not created until either the increment value or the number of points is assigned The auto fill start frequency does not affect the swept CW generator start frequency When Auto Fill Start is selected the active entry area indicates gt Fill Start XXXXXXXXX MHz where X represents a numeric value Unless a previous entry was made the display indicates the swept CW generator minimum frequency SCPI NONE see Fltness Menu or List Menu Analyzer NONE Fltness Menu List Menu Optimizing Swept CW Generator Performance in Chapter 1 A 20 Operating and Programming Reference Auto Fill Stop Auto Fill Stop Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY POWER 2 5 This softkey is used in two locations Fltness Menu and List Menu The
201. gister e STATus OPERation ENABle lt num gt e STATus OPERation ENABle Sets and queries the Standard Operation Enable register The STATus PRESet value is 0 e STATus OPERation EVENt Queries the Standard Operation Event Register This is a destructive read e STATus OPERation NTRansition lt num gt e STATus OPERation NTRansition Sets and queries the Standard Operation Negative Transition Filter The STATus PRESet value is 0 e STATus OPERation PTRansition lt num gt e STATus OPERation PTRansition Sets and queries the Standard Operation Positive Transition Filter After STATus PRESet all used bits are set to 1s e STATUS PRESet This command presets the following enable and transition registers MSIB OPERation QUEStionable and SRECeiver ENABle Is set to all Os NTRansition Is set to all Os PTRansition All bits used are set to 1s Unused bits remain 0s e STATus QUEStionable CONDition Queries the Data Questionable Condition Register e STATus QUEStionable ENABle lt num gt e STATus QUEStionable ENABle S 40 Operating and Programming Reference Sweep Subsystem SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY Sets and queries the Data Questionable SRQ Enable register The STATus PRESet value is 0 e STATus QUEStionable EVENt Queries the Data Questionable Event Register This is a destructive read e STATus QUEStionable NTRansition lt num gt e STATus QUEStionable NTRansition Sets and queries the N
202. gt time suffix MAXimum MINimum e SWEep TIME MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the current sweep time The dwell time can be coupled to sweep time if SWE DWEL AUTO is ON The dwell time is then governed by the equation DWELI SWEEPTIME POINTS Changing either sweep time or the number of points causes DWELI to be recalculated but does not cause an error If you attempt to change the dwell time then AUTO is set to OFF If DWEL1 AUTO is OFF then sweep time is independent of the dwell time and the number of points RST value is MIN e SWEep TIME AUTO ON OFF 1 0 e SWEep TIME AUTO Sets and queries the automatic sweep time switch ON The value of the sweep time is automatically to minimum OFF Attempting to set a sweep time faster than allowed in the AUTO mode causes this switch to change to AUTO ON even if it was previously in the AUTO OFF mode RST state is ON e SWEep TIME LLIMit lt num gt time suffix MAXimum MINimum e SWEep TIME LLIMit MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the lower sweep time limit This value specifies the fastest sweep time that you wants the instrument to allow either on input or when calculated internally when in AUTO ON mode This value must be greater than 10 ms RST value is 10 ms e SWEep TRIGger SOURce IMMediate BUS EXTernal e SWEep TRIGger SOURce Sets and queries the stepped sweep point to point trigger source This only applies when SWEep GEN is set to STEPped S 44 Operating
203. h 2 2 ee ee 2c 6 Spectral Purity 2 2 L 2c 7 Spurious Signals Loe 2c 7 Single Sideband Phase Noise dBc Hz re 2c 9 Offset from Carrier 2c 9 Residual FM RMS 50 Hz to 15 kHz bandwidth 2c 9 General 2 2 2 ee 2c 10 Environmental a a 2 ee 2c 10 Warm Up Time 2202 2c 10 Power Requirements 2 2c 10 Weight amp Dimensions 48 2c 10 Adapters Supplied 2 a a a ee 2c 10 Inputs amp Outputs 2 2 2c 11 Auxiliary Output 2 a a e 2c 11 RF Output a 2c 11 External ALC Input a 2c 11 Trigger Input oaoa aa a 2c 11 Trigger Output e 2c 11 10 MHz Reference Input Loe ee 2c 11 10 MHz Reference Output 2 aa 2c 11 Sweep Output Loe ee 2c 11 Stop Sweep Input Output Loe Loe eee 2c 11 Z Axis Blanking Markers Output Soe ee 2c 12 Volts GHz Output 2 2 2c 12 Source Module Interface 2 2 2c 12 Auxiliary Interface 2 1 ee 2c 12 Models 2 1 ee ee 2c 12 Options Loe eee 2c 12 Option 001 Add Step Attenuator Loe eee 2c 12 Option 004 Rear Panel RF Output 2c 12 Option 008 1 Hz Frequency Resolution 2c 12 Option 700 MATE System Compatibility 2c 12 Option 806 Rack Slide Kit 2 2 aaa 2c 13 Option 908 Rack Flange Kit 2 2 2c 13 Contents 10 Option 910 Extra Operating amp Service Guides 2c 13 Option 013 Rack Flange Kit 2c 13 Option W30 Two Years Additional Return To HP Service a a
204. hat some instrument dependent action should begin at once An upward exit is not allowed until the instrument signals that its action is complete Note that complete can be defined differently for different instruments For example consider an instrument that can sweep a range of frequencies starting with f and ending with f2 The action complete signal can be defined to coincide with the output of either f or f Instrument actions complete Figure 1 39 Inside the Sequence Operation State 1 114 Getting Started Programming Common Trigger Configurations In the previous paragraphs you learned about the basic building blocks allowed in a SCPI trigger system Generally an instrument implements only a portion of the trigger features available These paragraphs discuss the simplest configurations INIT and TRIG The INIT Configuration The INIT configuration is the simplest possible trigger configuration It uses no event detection states and requires only two subsystems for programming INITiate and ABORt All SCPI instruments implement these two subsystems ABORt RST Sequence Instrument Operation Actions Figure 1 40 The INIT Trigger Configuration Command Parameters Parameter Type ABORt INITiate IMMediate CONTinuous state Boolean Example commands using the INIT trigger configuration ABORt abort operations go to idle INIT IMM execute one sequence operation INIT
205. he HP Agilent 8340 8341 Configure the 8360 L Series to an address corresponding to the source address of the 8970 typically GPIB address 19 and network analyzer language Remote Operation Converting from Network Analyzer Language to SCPI Language Compatibility The 8360 L Series swept CW generators support three GPIB programming languages network analyzer language SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments and M A T E CHL language Option 700 Network Analyzer Language 8360 L Series network analyzer language is syntactically and semantically identical to the HP Agilent 8340 8341 GPIB mnemonics However fundamental hardware differences such as m command execution time m instrument diagnostics m and other hardware specific functions exist and prevent executing an unmodified HP Agilent 8340 8341 program successfully For example the 8360 L Series does not recognize or accept the HP Agilent 8340 8341 learn string Test and Measurement System Language SCPI is an GPIB programming language developed by Agilent Technologies specifically for controlling electronic test and measurement instruments It is designed to conform to the IEEE 488 2 standard which provides codes formats protocols and common commands for use with IEEE 488 1 1987 that were unavailable in the previous standard SCPI provides commands that are common from one Agilent product to another for like functions thereby eliminating device specif
206. he associated frequency and frequencies in between are determined by linear interpolation a CORRection FLATness This command queries the flatness array created with CORR FLAT m CORRection ARRay i lt num gt DB 1601 1601 The portion of the above command contained in must be entered 1601 times This array must contain 1601 evenly spaced correction values This command creates the 1601 point correction set that has no equivalent front panel entry If this command is used to enter flatness correction information the CORRection SOURce command described below will be set to array There is an array for the foreground state i 0 and for the background state i 1 If i is not specified the default is the foreground state i 0 a CORRection ARRay i This command queries the entire 1601 point correction set m CORRection SOURcefi ARRay FLATness When the above command is set to flatness CORR SOUR FLAT the array chosen is the frequency correction pair array When the Operating and Programming Reference F 9 Fltness Menu See Also command is set to array CORR SOUR ARR the array chosen is the 1601 point correction set a CORRection SOURceli Queries the source of correction m CORRection STATe ONJOFF 1 0 Sets the switch on the user flatness correction feature This is the same as pressing FLTNESS ON OFF on the front panel CORRection STATe Queries the condition of the internal switch CORRection FLATness
207. he frequency point is added directly after the value indicated by the arrow Lists created by the Auto Fill method are appended to an existing list much the same way frequency points are added to a list The newly created list is added between the frequency point indicated by the active entry arrow and the point directly after it If adding a new list of frequencies causes the existing list to exceed the maximum number of frequency points allowed 801 the new list is not appended to the existing list The error message TOO MANY LIST PTS REQUESTED is displayed To remove a frequency point and its associated offset value and dwell time use the delete menu Delete Current softkey To remove an entire frequency list use the delete menu Delete All softkey Editing ALC Offset and Dwell Time Once a frequency point has been entered you can assign an ALC offset and a dwell time value Use either the Enter List Power or Global Offset softkey to enter offset values Use either the Enter List Dwell or Global Dwell softkey to enter dwell time values The editing softkeys of this menu are not accessible over GPIB Frequency lists to be loaded over GPIB must first be created in the controlling program and then downloaded in their entirety to the swept CW generator SCPI LIST FREQuency lt num gt freq suffix MAXimum MINimum LIST POWer CORRection lt num gt DB MAXimum MINimum LIST DWELI lt num gt time suffix MAXimu
208. he functions indicated by the labels directly above them Entry Area All function values are changed via the rotary knob and or keys of the entry area ENTRY ENTRY ON ON OFF LED ARROW KEYS ENTRY ROTARY KNOB ON OFF TERMINATOR KEYS NUMERIC NEGATIVE SIGN ENTRY KEYS BACKSPACE Figure 1 3 Entry Area The following are active only when the swept CW generator expects an input ENTRY ON OFF This key lets you turn off or on the active entry area Turning off the entry area after a value is entered prevents accidental changes ENTRY ON LED This LED lights when the entry area is active Arrow Keys The up down arrow keys let you increase or decrease a numeric value The left right arrow keys choose a significant digit indicated by an underline Rotary Knob The rotary knob increases or decreases a numeric value The rotary knob can be used in combination with the left right arrow keys to change the increment size Terminator Keys After the numeric entry keys are used to enter a value these keys define the units Negative Sign Backspace Key If a data entry is in progress this key backspaces over the last digit entered otherwise a negative sign is entered Numeric Entry Keys These keys enter specific numbers in the active entry area and must be followed by one of the terminator keys before the function value changes Getting Started Basic 1 5 CW Operation and Start Stop Frequen
209. he output of this detector is returned to the leveling circuits and the output power is automatically adjusted to keep the power constant at the point of detection Figure A 2 shows a basic external leveling arrangement The output of the detected arm of the splitter or coupler is held constant If the splitter response is flat the output of the other arm is also constant This arrangement offers superior flatness over internal leveling especially if long cables are involved Flatness may be improved with user flatness correction FLTNESS ON OFF Fltness Menu applied at the external leveling point Operating and Programming Reference A 7 SWEPT CH GENERATOR oo oo oo LEVELED OUTPUT RF OUTPUT SPLITTER NEGATIVE DETECTOR Figure A 2 Typical External Leveling Hookup ALC Disabled Leveling Mode ALCoff Leveling Mode Search ALC Off In this configuration the ALC is disabled power is not sensed at any point and therefore the absolute power level is uncalibrated see Figure A 1 Direct and separate control of the RF modulator p o RF Components and the attenuator is possible The swept CW generator s front panel indicates the attenuator setting and a reference level The reference level is an approximate indication of the attenuation provided by the RF modulator Typically the RF amplifier that follows the modulator is saturated for modulation levels near 0 dB Therefore the actua
210. he stepped frequency sweep mode to the ramp sweep mode sweep time The equation to determine the dwell time in the dwell coupled mode is as follows Coupled Dwell Time sweep time number of step points An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI SWEep FREQuency DWEL1 AUTO ON 1 Analyzer NONE Step Swp Menu Operating and Programming Reference D 9 8360 Adrs Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SYSTEM This softkey lets you change the GPIB address of the swept CW generator Enter the address desired using the numeric entry keys or the up down arrow keys The address value may be set between 0 and 30 The swept CW generator stores the address value in non volatile memory The default address of the swept CW generator is 19 SCPI SYSTem COM Municate GPIB ADDRess Analyzer NONE Connectors HP IB Menu Instrument Addresses in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 Enter Corr Function Group Menu Map Description POWER This softkey lets you enter a power correction value for a frequency point in the flatness array A frequency point must be entered before a correction value can be accepted otherwise the following error message appears ERROR Must first enter correction freq The up down arrow keys let you scroll through the frequency points available for power correction If no correction value is entered
211. ht The resolution of the rotary knob is 0 1 of the sweep span in either start stop or CF AF mode The resolution of the and J arrow keys are dependent on the Operating and Programming Reference M 1 Manual Sweep resolution defined by the G and G keys Frequencies in the manual sweep mode are synthesized just as they are in CW mode There are two major differences between manual sweep and a sweep generated by activating the CW function and rotating the rotary knob or pressing the ARROW keys 1 The sweep output voltage ramp is 0 to 10 V in both modes but in CW mode 0 V corresponds to lowest frequency of the swept CW generator frequency range and 10 V corresponds to the highest frequency of the range In manual sweep mode 0 V corresponds to the start frequency specified and 10 V corresponds to the stop frequency specified In both cases the sweep voltage at intermediate frequencies is a linear interpolation of the frequency span For example a frequency half way between the start stop limits has a sweep voltage of 5 V 2 The bandcross points in CW mode occur at 2 0 7 13 5 20 25 5 and 32 GHz In manual sweep mode the bandcrossing points have 200 MHz of flexibility that is automatically used by the swept CW generator for optimum performance For example a 2 0 to 7 1 GHz sweep could be accomplished without any band changes in manual sweep mode Programming Codes SCPI SWEep MODE MANual AUTO This is the command f
212. hut off Figure 1 17 shows the same setup with uncoupled operation used to produce the same 8 dBm output In this case ATTEN 10 dB ALC Level 2 dBm The ALC level is 10 dB higher and the attenuator reduces the LO feedthrough by 10 dB Thus the detector sees a 2 dBm desired signal versus a possible 15 dBm undesired signal This 17 dB difference results in a maximum 0 1 shift in the swept CW generator output level To set the swept CW generator to the attenuator uncoupled mode as discussed in this example do the following 1 Press POWER MENU 2 Select Set Atten and press 2 0 dB m This step does two things it uncouples the attenuator from the rest of the ALC system and it lets you set an attenuator value in this case 10 dB 3 Press POWER LEVEL 2 4B m This sets the ALC level to 2 dBm For more information on the ALC or setting power level refer to ALC or POWER LEVEL in Chapter 2 SYNTHESIZER WITH OPTION 001 RF LEVEL CONTROL MEASURES 8 dBm DETECTOR ALC LEVEL SYNTHESIZER WITH OPTION 001 ALC LEVEL 2 dBm RF LEVEL CONTROL MEASURES 2 dBm o RF OUTPUT MIXER 8 dBm ATTENUATOR LO O dB a LO FEED LO LEVEL THROUGH 10 dBm DETECTOR 5dBm IF MEASURES 5 dBm REVERSE POWER Figure 1 16 Reverse Power Effects Coupled Operation with 8dBm Output RF OUTPUT MIXER
213. ial preset storage register Security Menu Reveals the menu that controls the security features of the swept CW generator Software Rev Causes the swept CW generator to display the date code of its internal software Usrkey Clear Activates the USER DEFINED MENU and lets you delete a single key within that menu Operating and Programming Reference S 69 SYSTEM UsrMenu Clear Activates the USER DEFINED MENU and clears all keys in that menu Programming Codes SCPI NONE Analyzer NONE See Also Softkeys listed above CONNECTORS USER DEFINED S 70 Operating and Programming Reference 10 MHz Freq Std Auto Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SYSTEM This softkey sets the swept CW generator to choose its frequency standard automatically If an external standard is connected to the 10 MHz REF INPUT BNC then it is chosen as the reference If no external standard is connected the internal standard is chosen as the reference If the internal standard has been disconnected also the swept CW generator operates in a free run state An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI ROSCillator SOURce AUTO ON OFF 1 0 Analyzer NONE Ref Osc Menu 10 MHz Freq Std Extrnl Function Group Menu Map Description SYSTEM This softkey tells the swept CW generator to accept an external 10 MHz signal as the frequency reference The external signal
214. ic commands Refer to Getting Started Programming in Chapter 1 for information on SCPI Control Interface Intermediate Language CIIL is the instrument control programming language used in Option 700 8360 L Series Like the 8340 8341 E69 the Option 700 8360 L Series is M A T E compatible Refer to the 8360 Option 700 Manual Supplement for information on this option Table 3 9 illustrates the programming command in network analyzer language and its equivalent SCPI programming command In the table numbers enclosed by greater less than symbols lt gt are parameters Braces are used to enclose one or more options that may be used zero or more times A vertical bar can be read as or and it is used to separate alternative parameter options Optional numeric suffixes for SCPI commands are enclosed in square brackets Installation 3 23 3 24 Installation Features not available in one of the language modes are marked by a horizontal line in the corresponding column In the interest of brevity all SCPI commands have been listed in their most concise form For a complete and comprehensive listing of the swept CW generator SCPI commands refer to SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY in Chapter 2 For explanations of SCPI refer to Getting Started Programming in Chapter 1 Numeric Suffixes Numeric suffixes consist of 2 or 3 character codes that terminate and scale an associated value The numeric suffixes for
215. ies of the slave can be offset above or below those set on the master for fixed offset two tone measurements To synchronize properly for swept offset measurements the 0 to 10 volt sweep ramp must be actively sweeping on the slave If a CW frequency is selected as the fixed LO frequency the sweep ramp is deactivated and the proper synchronization does not occur Select a center frequency with zero span to keep the slave s voltage sweep ramp active and ensure proper synchronization For synthesized step sweep measurements set the number of sweep points on the slave the same as on the master swept CW generator If the master swept CW generator is connected to a network analyzer the analyzer automatically sets the master swept CW generator s step size to match the number of points displayed on the analyzer Since the slave swept CW generator is not connected to the analyzer set the slave to match the master swept CW generator Allow the master to trigger the slave s steps set Step Swp Pt Trig Ext on the slave swept CW generator For ramp sweep measurements on the slave set the sweep time equivalent to the master swept CW generator If the master is connected to a network analyzer the slave s sweep time is slightly longer than the master s because the analyzer does not stop the sweep precisely on the last point and if sweep times are set to the same value the system may lock up Use the following formula to determine the slave
216. imal point required 100 fractional digits optional 1 23 leading signs allowed 4 56e lt space gt 3 space allowed after e in exponentials 7 89E 01 use either E or e in exponentials 256 leading allowed 5 digits left of decimal point optional Extended Numeric Parameters Most measurement related subsystems use extended numeric parameters to specify physical quantities Extended numeric parameters accept all numeric parameter values and other special values as well All extended numeric parameters accept MAXimum and MINimum as values Other special values such as UP and DOWN may be available as documented in the instrument s command dictionary Note that MINimum and MAXimum can be used to set or query values The query forms are useful for determining the range of values allowed for a given parameter In some instruments extended numeric parameters accept engineering unit suffixes as part of the parameter value Refer to the command summary to see if this capability exists Note that extended numeric parameters are not used for common commands or STATus subsystem commands Examples of extended numeric parameters 100 any simple numeric values 1 23 largest valid setting 4 56e lt space gt 3 7 89E 01 256 5 MAX MIN valid setting nearest negative infinity 100 mV negative 100 millivolts 1 84 Getting Started Programming Discrete Parameters Use discrete parameters to program settings that have a finite number of
217. imum MAXimum Sets and queries the number of times to clear memory when the value of SYSTem SECurity STATe changes from ON to OFF RST value is 1 e SYSTem SECurity STATe ON OFF 1 0 e SYSTem SECurity STATe Controls the security mode of the instrument When in secure mode any display annunciators that have been disabled cannot be re enabled without destroying certain stored information This value is not affected by RST When you change the value from ON to OFF everything except calibration data is initialized or destroyed In particular data in instrument state and all save recall registers are destroyed e SYSTem VERSion This query returns a formatted numeric value corresponding to the SCPI version number to which the instrument complies The response has the form YYYY V where the Ys represent the year version i e 1990 and the V represents an approved revision number for that year This is a query only and therefore does not have an associated RST state e TRIGger IMMediate Causes the trigger event to occur regardless of other settings in the S 46 Operating and Programming Reference SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY subsystem This event does not affect any other settings in this subsystem This command has no effect unless the instrument is in the wait for trig state If the swept CW generator is in the wait for trig state it performs its trigger action This is an event and has no RST condition e TRIGger ODEL
218. in the command table If you do not send a value for an optional parameter the instrument chooses a default value The instrument s command dictionary documents the values used for optional parameters Program Message Examples The following parts of the swept CW generator SCPI command set will be used to demonstrate how to create complete SCPI program messages FREQuency cw MULTiplier STATE POWER LEVEL 1 72 Getting Started Programming Example 1 FREQuency CW 5 GHZ MULTiplier 2 The command is correct and will not cause errors It is equivalent to sending FREQuency CW 5 GHZ FREQuency MULTiplier 2 Example 2 FREQuency 5 GHZ MULTiplier 2 This command results in a command error The command makes use of the default CW node When using a default node there is no change to the current path position Since there is no command MULT at the root an error results A correct way to send this is FREQ 5 GHZ FREQ MULT 2 or as in example 1 Example 3 FREQuency MULTiplier 2 MULTiplier STATE ON FREQuency CW 5 GHZ This command results in a command error The FREQ CW portion of the command is missing a leading colon The path level is dropped at each colon until it is in the FREQ MULT subsystem So when the FREQ CW command is sent it causes confusion because no such node occurs in the FREQ MULT subsystem By adding a leading colon the current path is reset to the root The corrected command is
219. inator and is understood 140 Wait until the source has completed setting up the commands that have been sent so far before turning on the output 150 The ENTER statement causes the program to wait here until the source responds to the previous OPC with aT 160 The source has now completed processing the commands The RF frequency power and markers are at their programmed values Turn on the RF output of the source 170 Select a continuously initiated sweep instead of the default mode of non continuous that was selected with RST 180 Clear the computer s display 190 to 220 Print a message on the computer s display 1 94 Getting Started Programming Queries Example The following example demonstrates the use of query commands and Program 4 response data formats Clear and reset the controller and type in the following program 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 Source 719 ABORT 7 LOCAL 7 CLEAR Source REMOTE Source CLS OUTPUT Source RST OUTPUT Source POWER LEVEL 5 dBm STATE ON OUTPUT Source FREQ CW ENTER Source F PRINT Present source CW frequency is F 1 E 6 MHz OUTPUT Source POWER STATE ENTER Source W PRINT Present power ON OFF state is W OUTPUT Source FREQ MODE DIM A 10 ENTER Source A PRINT Source s frequency mode is amp A OUTPUT Source FREQ CW MIN ENTER Sourc
220. ing Codes See Also FREQUENCY This softkey lets you set a frequency offset value and applies it to all frequency parameters The frequency offset ranges between and including 110 0 GHz Changing the frequency offset value changes the display but does not affect the output frequency Frequency multiplier and offset are related as shown by the following equation Entered value or Displayed Frequency Frequency Generated x Multiplier Offset value The factory preset value is 0 Hz An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI FREQuency OFFSet lt num gt MAXimum MINimum FREQuency OFFSet STATe ON OFF 1 0 Analyzer SHFB lt n gt Hz Kz Mz Gz FREQUENCY menu Freq Mult FullUsr Cal Function Group Menu Map Description USER CAL This softkey initiates a full swept CW generator user calibration The calibration performed is instrument state dependent For example if the swept CW generator is in ramp sweep mode a sweep span calibration and an auto track is done If the swept CW generator has amplitude modulation active on a CW signal then an RF peaking calibration is performed F 14 Operating and Programming Reference FullUsr Cal Programming Codes SCPI See the individual types of calibration Analyzer NONE See Also Auto Track Peak RF Always Peak RF Once Swp Span Cal Always Swp Span Cal Once Operating and Programming Reference F 15 Global Dwell Function G
221. ing phaselock and turning RF on before changing to the next frequency After RST the value is 100 us MIN LIST DWEL1 POINts MAXimum MINimum Returns the number of dwells entered using the LIST DWEL1 command After RST returns a 1 e LIST FREQuency lt num gt freq suffix MAXimum MINimum 1 801 e LIST FREQuency Sets and queries a list of frequencies that the swept CW generator phase locks to in the sequence entered when the list mode is selected RST value is the MAX MIN 2 e LIST FREQuency POINts MAXimum MINimum Returns the number of frequencies that have been entered into the list frequency array After RST returns a 1 e LIST MANual lt num gt e LIST MANual Sets and queries the list point number to go to and lock The value is a unitless value that is limited between 1 and the maximum number of points in either of the three arrays This command has no effect unless the list mode is set to manual This value may be bumped if the number of list frequencies is changed RST value is 1 e LIST MODE AUTO MANual e LIST MODE Selects and queries whether the list is played back automatically or manually as described in LIST MANual Operating and Programming Reference S 33 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY LIST MODE LIST TRIGger SOU Rce How the list is played back AUTO IMMediate Each new frequency point is stepped to automatically after waiting the specified DWELI time Wait for a lt
222. ion Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY This softkey lets you set the trigger point to be the GPIB When the swept CW generator receives an GPIB trigger it steps to the next frequency point of the frequency list provided the swept CW generator is in sweep list mode SCPI LIST TRIGger SOURce BUS Analyzer NONE List Menu Pt Trig Menu Sweep Mode List Creating and Using a Frequency List in Chapter 1 List Mode Pt Trig Ext Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY This softkey lets you set the trigger point to be an external hardware trigger When the swept CW generator receives an external hardware trigger it steps to the next frequency point of the frequency list provided the swept CW generator is in sweep list mode SCPI LIST TRIGger SOURce EX Ternal Analyzer NONE List Menu Pt Trig Menu Sweep Mode List Creating and Using a Frequency List in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference L 9 Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also INSTRUMENT STATE NONE This hardkey lets you cancel remote operation and return the swept CW generator to front panel operation The front panel keys are deactivated when the swept CW generator is operated remotely If the external controller executes a LOCAL LOCKOUT command pressing the LOCAL key does not return the swept CW generator to front panel control SCPI LOCAL An
223. is FREQ and the long form is FREQUENCY this notation style is a shorthand to document both the long and short form of commands SCPI is not case sensitive so fREquEnCy is just as valid as FREQUENCY but FREQ and FREQUENCY are the only valid forms of the FREQuency command Angle Brackets Angle brackets indicate that the word or words enclosed represent something other than themselves For example lt new line gt represents the ASCII character with the decimal value 10 Similarly lt END gt means that EOI is asserted on the GPIB interface Words in angle brackets have much more rigidly defined meaning than words used in ordinary text For example this section uses the word message to talk about messages generally But the bracketed words lt program message gt indicate a precisely defined element of SCPI If you need them you can find the exact definitions of words such as lt program message gt in a syntax diagram How to Use Examples It is important to understand that programming with SCPI actually requires knowledge of two languages You must know the programming language of your controller BASIC C Pascal as well as the language of your instrument SCPI The semantic requirements of your controller s language determine how the SCPI commands and responses are handled in your application Command Examples Command examples look like this FREQuency CW This example tells you to put the string FREQuency CW in
224. is column lists the specific values or range of values allowed for each parameter A vertical bar separates values in a list from which you must choose one value The commands listed in the table are only part of all the available SCPI commands of the swept CW generator For a complete listing of the programming codes see SCPI Command Summary in Chapter 2 Table 1 4 Sample Swept CW Generator Commands Command Parameters Parameter Type Allowed Values CALibration PMETer FLATness INITiate flatness array discrete USER DIODE PMETer MMHead to cal NEXT measured power extended numeric lt num gt lvl suffix CORRection FLATness 801 freq extended numeric lt num gt freq suffix correction pairs DB 2 801 FREQuency CENTer center freq extended numeric specified freq range or MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN CW CW freq extended numeric specified freq range or MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN AUTO coupled to Boolean ON OFF 1 0 center freq MODE free mode discrete CW SWEep LIST STARt start freq extended numeric specified freq range or MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN STEP AUTO auto freq step Boolean ON OFF 1 0 INCRement freq step extended numeric 20 to 0 01 dB or MA Ximum MINimum STOP stop freq extended numeric specified freq range or MA Ximum MINimum UP DOWN MARKer n n is 1 to 5 1 is the default FREQuency marker frequency extended numeric specified freq range or MAXimum MINimum 1 88 Ge
225. isplays Rear panel GPIB language must be 7 111 in order to change current language XXX the address on the rear panel GPIB switch Figure 3 2 is set to something other than 7 all 1s If the swept CW generator does not have Option 700 and you select Power Up Language CIIL the instrument displays OPTION NOT INSTALLED 5 The asterisk indicates the selected softkey and the swept CW generator displays LANG XXXX ADRS XX REV da mo yr How to Select a Language on a Swept CW Generator without a Front Panel If your swept CW generator does not have a front panel set the rear panel GPIB switch Figure 3 2 for the language you want See Table 3 2 for language addresses Table 3 2 Language GPIB Addresses Language GPIB Address Decimal SCPI 0 Analyzer 1 CIIL 2 GPIB LANG ADDRESS HUOUUUUUU OPEN 3 OK nae aati OT TOs NOLLAA TIERRY NRRL LLL ARRS ROLLARI LAAT UATE SE ia Pa MM ME SAN SAN AY AALA ALA AAA AS AN AN AYA AK AN lt 2 y ORS DABLILLALALALAL ZZ IILE LLL RRL LI GTT TTS JID SASSY langad Figure 3 2 Rear Panel GPIB Switch In certain applications the swept CW generator acts as a controller for a power meter and a printer Because of this the address menu GPIB Address Selection provides access not only to the swept CW generator s GPIB address but also to the address at which the swept CW generator expects to and the address a
226. itive rectangular pulse Approximately 5 volts into 2 kQ during the retrace and bandswitch points of the RF output Also supplies a negative pulse 5 volts when the RF is at a marker frequency intensity markers only BNC female rear panel Volts GHz Output Supplies voltage proportional to output frequency at 0 5 volts GHz internally switchable to 0 25 or 1 volt GHz Maximum output 18 volts Minimum load impedance 2 kQ Accuracy 0 5 10 mV typical BNC female rear panel Source Module Interface Provides bias flatness correction and leveling connections to HP Agilent 83550 series millimeter wave source modules Special front and rear panels Auxiliary Interface Provides control signal connections to HP Agilent 8516A 5 parameter Test Set 25 pin D subminiature receptacle rear panel 83623L 10 MHz to 20 GHz High Power 83630L 10 MHz to 26 5 GHz 83640L 10 MHz to 40 GHz 83650L 10 MHz to 50 GHz Option 001 Add Step Attenuator With this option minimum settable output power is 110 dBm Maximum leveled output power is lowered by 1 5 dB to 20 GHz and 2 dB above 20 GHz and 2 5 dB above 40 GHz Option 004 Rear Panel RF Output Moves the RF Output External ALC Input Pulse Input Output AM Input and FM Input connectors to the rear panel Option 008 1 Hz Frequency Resolution Provides frequency resolution of 1 Hz Option 700 MATE System Compatibility Provides CIIL programming commands
227. ive mm wave source modules High power models of 8360 drive the mm wave source modules directly and to specified power levels An HP Agilent 8349B power amplifier is needed in other configurations The source module interface multi pin connector provides the communication path between the swept CW generator and mm wave source module An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI POWer ALC S5OURce MMHead Analyzer SHA2 atc CONNECTORS Externally Leveling the Swept CW Generator in Chapter 1 L 4 Operating and Programming Reference LINE SWITCH Leveling Point PwrMtr Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also ALC This softkey lets you set the swept CW generator to level at the power sensor of an external power meter This mode of operation requires a feedback connection from the power meter to the EXT ALC BNC located on the swept CW generator An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI POWer ALC SOURce PMETer Analyzer A3 atc CONNECTORS Externally Leveling the Swept CW Generator in Chapter 1 LINE SWITCH Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also NONE NONE The line switch on off switch has two positions off or standby and on If line power is connected to the swept CW generator and the line switch is set to off the swept CW generator is in the standby state amb
228. l always equals 0 V L MOD RF OFF Low RF off Source module RF is turned off EXT LVL RET Source module external leveling return EXT LVL Source module external leveling input from the mm source module 0 5 V GHz Internal 0 5 V GHz to the mm source module Operating and Programming Reference C 9 CONNECTORS RF Output Connector 15 V Power supply Range is 14 25 to 15 90 V 15 V Power supply Range is 14 25 to 16 40 V 8 V Power supply Range is 7 75 to 8 25 V 5 V Power supply Range is 4 75 to 5 45 V DIG GND Digital ground MOD ANLG GND Source module analog ground ANLG GND RET Analog ground return The swept CW generator is equipped with a precision 3 5 mm male connector 2 4 mm male connector on 40 GHz models The output impedance SWR and other electrical characteristics are listed in Specifications When making connections carefully align the center conductor elements then rotate the knurled barrel while the mating component remains still Tighten until firm contact is made Take care when working with either of these connectors If this connector is mechanically degraded in any way high frequency losses occur Refer to Application Note 326 Connector Care for more information Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SWEEP This hardkey initiates continuous sweep retrace cycling of the swept CW generator The sweep is initiated by one of the trigger f
229. l change in the RF output power will not track the indicated reference level until the amplifier is out of saturation The ALC off mode is useful for applications that involve pulse modulation with extremely narrow pulses If the pulse is narrow enough the ALC may be unable to provide accurate leveling due to bandwidth limitations Search Search mode is similar to the ALC off mode in that the ALC is disabled in order to remove bandwidth limitations The essential difference is that when search mode is enabled the swept CW generator searches out the appropriate modulator level such that the RF output power after the ALC is disabled closely matches the power prior to search mode being enabled Specifically when search mode is selected the swept CW generator follows this sequence of steps 1 All modulation is disabled and the ALC system is closed to provide a calibrated reference power 2 The output power is measured using the internal coupler detector 3 The ALC system is disabled opened A 8 Operating and Programming Reference irs 4 While monitoring the internal detector the RF modulator level is varied until the detected power is equivalent to the reference power measured in step 2 5 Modulation is re enabled if appropriate These steps are performed in approximately 200 us and are repeated any time power or frequency is changed See Also Softkeys listed above Fltness Menu MOD POWER LEVEL pet Atten
230. l of the options available refer to Chapter 2c Specifications For installation information on the rack mounting kits refer to later paragraphs in this chapter For information on retrofitting options refer to the Option Retrofits chapter in the Agilent Technologies 8360 B Series Swept Signal Generator 8360 L Series Swept CW Generator Service Guide Preparation for Use Enclosure Protection Power Requirements Line Voltage and Fuse Selection WARNING CAUTION Position the instrument according to the enclosure protection provided a This instrument does not protect against the ingress of water a This instrument protects against finger access to hazardous parts within the enclosure The 8360 L Series swept CW generators require a power source of 115 V 10 25 or 230 V 10 15 48 to 66 Hz single phase Power consumption is 400 VA maximum 30 VA in standby The swept CW generator is provided with a voltage selector located on the rear panel to match the swept CW generator to the ac line voltage available at the site of installation Both the line selector and fuse were selected at the factory to match the ac line voltage expected to be found at the shipping destination Verify that the voltage selector has been set to the correct line voltage before connecting power to the swept CW generator For continued protection against fire hazard replace line fuse only with same type and rating The
231. latness Menu When selected the swept CW generator waits for a frequency increment value to be entered gt Increment is displayed in the active entry area A list of frequencies is created automatically beginning at the auto fill start frequency and always ending with the auto fill stop frequency The swept CW generator uses the increment value on all points but if the stop frequency requires a different increment to be used to be exact the swept CW generator simply ends the frequency list at the stop frequency disregarding the increment value If the increment value requested creates a list that exceeds the number of elements available the following message appears TOO MANY CORRECTION PTS REQUESTED List Menu When selected the swept CW generator waits for a frequency increment value to be entered gt Increment is displayed in the active entry area A list of frequencies is created automatically with all points separated by the frequency increment value The list begins at the auto fill start frequency and ends at a frequency less than or equal to the auto fill stop frequency If the increment value requested creates a list that exceeds the number of points available 801 the following message appears TOO MANY LIST PTS REQUESTED SCPI NONE see Fltness Menu or List Menu Analyzer NONE Fltness Menu List Menu Optimizing Swept CW Generator Performance in Chapter 1 A 18 Operating and Programming Reference A
232. lculated and if an error is detected the calibration data in protected memory is used If the checksum of the protected data is not correct then default values are used an error message EEROM FAILED LOST CAL is displayed Programming Codes SCPI SYSTem PRESet TYPE FACTory Analyzer IP which is the same as PRESET See Also PRESET Preset Mode User Changing the Preset Parameters in Chapter 1 P 10 Operating and Programming Reference Printer Adrs Preset Mode User Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SYSTEM This softkey sets the standard starting configuration of the swept CW generator when the PRESET key is pressed as set by the user You can define any starting conditions Set up the swept CW generator with the conditions you want then select Preset Mode User Now whenever you press PRESET the swept CW generator returns to the configuration you set If preset mode user is set when you press PRESET the swept CW generator displays the following USER DEFINED PRESET RECALLED You can still do a factory preset When the user preset mode is active the softkey Factory Preset appears when you press PRESET An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI SYSTem PRESet TYPE USER Analyzer NONE PRESET Preset Mode Factory Save User Preset Changing the Preset Parameters in Chapter 1 Printer Adrs Function Group
233. ld be protected from sudden temperature fluctuations that can cause condensation Installation 3 17 Package the Swept CW Use the following steps to package the swept CW generator for Generator for Shipment 3 18 CAUTION Installation shipment to Agilent Technologies for service 1 Fill in a service tag available at the end of Chapter 4 and attach it to the instrument Please be as specific as possible about the nature of the problem Send a copy of any or all of the following information m Any error messages that appeared on the swept CW generator display m A completed Performance Test record from the service guide for your instrument m Any other specific data on the performance of the swept CW generator Swept CW generator damage can result from using packaging materials other than those specified Never use styrene pellets in any shape as packaging materials They do not adequately cushion the instrument or prevent it from shifting in the carton Styrene pellets cause equipment damage by generating static electricity and by lodging in the swept CW generator fan 2 Use the original packaging materials or a strong shipping container that is made of double walled corrugated cardboard with 159 kg 350 lb bursting strength The carton must be both large enough and strong enough to accommodate the swept CW generator and allow at least 3 to 4 inches on all sides of the swept CW generator for packing material 3 Su
234. le 1 1 Keys Under Discussion in This Section Paragraph Heading Keys Externally Leveling the Swept CW Generator Leveling Point ExtDet Coupling Factor POWER LEVEL Set Atten Leveling Point PwrMtr Pwr Mtr Range Leveling Point Module Mdl Lev Menu Working with Mixers Reverse Power Effects Uncoupl Atten Leveling Mode Normal Working with Spectrum Analyzers Reverse Power Effects Leveling Mode ALCoff Leveling Mode Search Optimizing Swept CW Generator Performance Fltness Menu Delete Menu Auto Fill Start Auto Fill Stop Auto Fill Incr Mtr Meas Menu FLTNESS ON OFF Enter Freq Enter Corr Freq Follow List Menu Copy List Sweep Mode List Ext Det Cal Getting Started Advanced 1 21 Advanced Table 1 1 Keys Under Discussion in This Section continued Paragraph Heading Keys Optimizing Swept CW Generator Performance Auto Track continued Peak RF Always Peak RF Once Swp Span Cal Once Swp Span Cal Always FullUsr Cal USER DEFINED MENU ASSIGN Using Step Sweep Step Swp Menu Creating and Using a Frequency List List Menu Delete Menu Enter List Freq Enter List Offset Enter List Dwell Pt Trig Menu Using the Security Features Zero Freq Save Lock Clear Memory Blank Display Changing the Preset Parameters Save Usr Preset Preset Mode User PRESET 1 22 Getting Started Advanced For more i
235. lent manufactures GPIB extender instruments HP Agilent models 37201A 37204A B that overcome the range limitations imposed by the cabling rules These extenders allow twin pair cable operation up 1 km 3 280 ft and telephone modem operation over any distance Agilent Sales and Service offices can provide additional information on the GPIB extenders The codes next to the GPIB connector illustrated in Figure C 2 describe the GPIB electrical capabilities of the swept CW generator using IEEE Std 488 1978 mnemonics GPIB GPIB IEEE 488 and IEC 625 are all electrically equivalent Briefly the mnemonics translate as follows SH1 Source Handshake complete capability AH1 Acceptor Handshake complete capability T6 Talker capable of basic talker serial poll and unaddress if MLA TEO Talker Extended address no capability L4 Listener capable of basic listener and unaddress if MTA LEO Listener Extended address no capability SR1 Service Request complete capability RL1 Remote Local complete capability PPO Parallel Poll no capability DCI Device Clear complete capability DT1 Device Trigger complete capability CO 1 2 3 28 Controller capability options CO no capabilities C1 system controller C2 send IFC and take charge C3 send REN C28 send I F messages E1 Electrical specification indicating open collector outputs C 8 Operating and Programming Reference CONNECTORS These codes are desc
236. lete a message is displayed the flatness correction array is ready to be applied to your setup To save the swept CW generator parameters including the correction table in an internal register press GAVE n n number 1 through 8 Disconnect the power meter sensor and press FLTNESS ON OFF amber LED on The power produced at the point where the power meter sensor was disconnected is now calibrated at the frequencies and power level specified above Note Scalar Analysis Measurement with User Flatness Corrections Example 4 The following example demonstrates how to set up a scalar analysis measurement using an HP Agilent 8757 Scalar Network Analyzer of a 2 to 20 GHz test device such as an amplifier User flatness correction is used to compensate for power variations at the test port of a directional bridge Follow the instructions to set up the swept CW generator then configure the system as shown in Figure 1 21 The swept CW generator s rear panel language and address switches must be set to 7 and 31 all 1 s to change the language or address of the swept CW generator from the front panel The programming language must be set to Analyzer Refer to menu map 8 System to find the location of softkey Programming Language Analyzer asterisk on active language SWEPT CH SCALAR GENERATOR NETWORK ANALYZER SWEEP OUTPUT SWEEP INPUT Oooooooo a it o a o PONER SPLITTER TEST
237. ling accuracy A 6 leveling control A 2 leveling loop normal L 1 leveling mode ALC off A 8 L 1 normal L 1 search A 8 L 2 leveling mode normal A 5 leveling modes A 5 leveling point external detector A 7 L 3 internal L 3 module L 4 power meter A 7 L 4 source module A 7 leveling points A 5 line fuse replacement 4 4 line switch L 5 line voltage selection 3 3 listener definition of 1 56 list frequency dwell time E 2 enter value E 3 number of points E 3 L 6 power offset E 3 list frequency functions L 5 list frequency step sweep activate S 65 list menu L 5 list mode point trigger external L 9 point trigger interface bus L 8 trigger functions P 14 list mode point trigger automatic L 8 local key L 9 local lockout example program 1 91 local lockout statement 1 58 local statement 1 58 lock save S 1 looping and synchronization example program 1 99 LRN S 12 M1 M2 sweep M 1 maintenance routine 4 4 making entries 1 5 manual part number viii manual sweep 1 12 manual sweep key M 1 marker center frequency C 1 delta 1 14 D 3 delta reference D 4 difference between 1 14 marker 1 key M 3 marker 2 key M 4 marker 3 key M 5 marker 4 key M 5 marker 5 key M 6 marker functions M 2 marker key M 2 markers amplitude 1 14 A 12 frequency 1 14 markers 1 2 set start stop 5 54 markers all off M 6 marker sweep M 1 master step control S 56 MATE compatibility P 13
238. llowed 5 digits left of decimal point optional Examples of numeric parameters in commands 100 OUTPUT Source FREQuency STARt 1 0E 09 110 OUTPUT Source LIST FREQuency 10 0e 9 1e 7 Extended Numeric Parameters Most measurement related subsystems use extended numeric parameters to specify physical quantities Extended numeric parameters accept all numeric parameter values and other special values as well All extended numeric parameters accept MAXimum and MINimum as values Other special values such as UP and DOWN may be available as documented in the instrument s command summary Some instruments also let you to send engineering units as suffixes to extended numeric parameters The SCPI Command Summary lists the suffixes available if any Note that extended numeric parameters are not used for common commands or STATus subsystem commands Examples of extended numeric parameters 100 any simple numeric values 1 23 largest valid setting 4 56e lt space gt 3 7 89E 01 256 5 MAX MIN valid setting nearest negative infinity Examples of extended numeric parameters in commands 100 OUTPUT Source FREQuency STOP MAX 110 OUTPUT Source LIST FREQuency MAX MIN 1 74 Getting Started Programming Discrete Parameters Use discrete parameters to program settings that have a finite number of values Discrete parameters use mnemonics to represent each valid setting They have a long and a short form like command mnemoni
239. llows independent control of attenuator settings An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active To set the attenuator after it is uncoupled select Set Atten To view the current ALC and attenuator settings press POWER LEVEL SCPI POWer ATTentuation AUTO ON OFF 1 0 Analyzer SHPS lt num gt DB DM to set the ALC SHSL lt num gt DB DM to attenuator PL causes the attenuator couple to the ALC ALC POWER LEVEL Set Atten Working with Mixers Reverse Power Effects in Chapter 1 Unlock Info Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SERVICE This softkey causes the swept CW generator to display lock unlocked status of all the phase lock loops An asterisk next to the key label indicates this feature is active SCPI DIAGnostics 0U Tput UNLocks Analyzer SHT3 or SHM4 diagnostics test results STATUS MESSAGES Chapter 4 OPERATOR S CHECK and ROUTINE MAINTENANCE Operating and Programming Reference U 1 Up Down Power Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER This softkey activates the power step size function It can be set from 0 01 to 20 dB In this mode power is stepped by the up down arrow keys An asterisk next to the key label indicates this feature is active SCPI POWer STEP INCrement lt num gt DB or MAXimum MINimum POWer STEP AUTO ON OFF 1 0 Analyzer SP or SHPL and UP or DO
240. lyzer NONE Module Menu Module Select Front Function Group Menu Map Description POWER and FREQUENCY 2 and 5 This command causes the swept CW generator to examine only the front panel source module interface connector to determine the type of source module if any connected The instrument frequency limits and multiplier are altered according to the source module connected However the leveling point is not changed See Leveling Point Module to set the swept CW generator to level at the output of the source module An asterisk next to the key label indicates this feature is active Operating and Programming Reference M 11 Module Select Front Programming Codes See Also SCPI SYSTem MMHead SELect FRONt REAR NONE SYSTem MM Head SELect Analyzer NONE Module Menu Module Select None Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER and FREQUENCY 2 and 5 This command disables millimeter source module sensing The swept CW generator will not alter its frequency limits and multiplier even if a source module is connected to either source module interface connector An asterisk next to the key label indicates this feature is active SCPI SYSTem MMHead SELect FRONt REAR NONE SYSTem MM Head SELect Analyzer NONE Module Menu M 12 Operating and Programming Reference more n m Module Select Rear Function Group Menu Map Description Programmi
241. m MINimum In the above three commands the entries contained in can be repeated between 1 to 801 times LIST DWELL POINts MAXimum MINimum LIST FREQuency POINts MAXimum MINimum Operating and Programming Reference L 7 List Menu See Also LIST POWer CORRection POINts MAXimum MINimum In the above three commands the swept CW generator responds with the number of points for the named parameter that are in the list array If a particular list is shorter than another an error is generated upon execution An exception is made for the case where the shorter list is of length 1 In this case the list of length 1 is treated as though it were a list of equal length with all values the same At RST all lists for the current state are cleared and reset to a single value Analyzer NONE RECALL SAVE Sweep Mode List Creating and Using a Frequency List in Chapter 1 List Mode Pt Trig Auto Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY This softkey lets you set the swept CW generator to automatically step through a frequency list when the swept CW generator is in sweep list mode SCPI LIST TRIGger SOURce IMMediate Analyzer NONE List Menu Pt Trig Menu Sweep Mode List Creating and Using a Frequency List in Chapter 1 L 8 Operating and Programming Reference List Mode Pt Trigkxt List Mode Pt Trig Bus Function Group Menu Map Descript
242. m an HP Agilent 8757 disk will not erase the current array therefore you may recall an array from an internal register then recall an associated file from a disk For this example refer to menu map 5 POWER 1 The equipment setup shown in Figure 1 21 assumes that you have followed the steps necessary to correctly level the configuration If you have questions about external leveling refer to Externally Leveling the Swept CW Generator 2 On the analyzer press PRESET Reset the analyzer and swept CW generator to a known state Set up System Parameters 3 On the swept CW generator press FREQUENCY START GHz STOP 2 0 GHz Set the swept CW generator for a frequency sweep of 2 to 20 GHz 4 Press POWER LEVEL n dBm Where n maximum available power 5 On the analyzer set up the appropriate measurement i e gain for an amplifier Calibrate the measurement thru and short open calibration Press SAVE 4 to store the analyzer s configuration and swept CW generator parameters in storage register 1 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Turn off the HP Agilent 8757 System Interface Use the analyzer SYSINTF ON OFF softkey found under the SYSTEM menu to deactivate the system interface Access User Flatness Correction Menu On the swept CW generator press POWER MENU Select Fltness Menu Select Delete Menu Delete All This step insures that the flatness array is
243. mands indicate a complete operation at the end of the sweep upon re entry into the IDLE state Advanced Trigger Configurations Because the SCPI layered trigger model is expandable many more complex trigger configurations are possible Trigger Keyword The following paragraphs contain condensed definitions of the Definitions keywords used in the command tables Many of the commands in trigger related subsystems are event commands Remember that event commands cannot be queried Similarly event commands have no related RST actions or settings Event commands cause a particular action to take place inside the swept CW generator ABORt The ABORt command forces the trigger system to the idle state Any measurement or output sequence in process is aborted as quickly as possible ABORt does not alter the settings programmed by other commands unlike RST ABORt is a root level event command and cannot be queried IMMediate The IMMediate command provides a one time override of the normal downward path in an event detection state The instrument must be in the specified event detection state when IMMediate is received or an error is generated and the command has no effect For example the instrument must be in the TRIG state for TRIGger IMMediate to work properly If the instrument is in the idle state the command has no effect and an error would be generated IMMediate is an event command and cannot be queried ODELay The ODELay co
244. mands with descriptions e CLS Clear the Status Byte the Data Questionable Event Register the Standard Event Status Register the Standard Operation Status Register the error queue the OPC pending flag and any other registers that are summarized in the Status Byte e ESE lt num gt e ESE Sets and queries the value of the Standard Event Status Enable Register e ESR Queries the value of the Standard Event Status Register This is a destructive read e IDN This returns an identifying string to the GPIB The response is in the following format HEWLETT PACKARD model serial number DD MMM YY where the actual model number serial number and firmware revision of the swept CW generator queried is passed e LRN This returns a long string of device specific characters that when sent back to the swept CW generator restores that instrument state e 0PC Operation complete command The swept CW generator generates the OPC message in the Standard Event Status Register when all pending operations have finished such as sweep or selftest e 0PC Operation complete query The swept CW generator returns an ASCII 1 when all pending operations have finished S 12 Operating and Programming Reference SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY e OPT This returns a string identifying any device options e RCL lt num gt The instrument state is recalled from the specified memory register The value range is from 0
245. mating connectors 3 8 maximize RF power A 22 measure correction all M 7 Index 13 Index 14 measure correction current M 7 measure correction undefined M 8 memory erase C 2 memory registers 1 16 memory registers 1 to 8 save S 1 menu maps 2 1 menus previous P 11 message annunciators 1 4 message line 1 4 messages details of program and response 1 66 simple examples 1 72 messages error 2a 1 8 message terminators response message terminator defined 1 82 meter address M 8 meter measure functions M 13 mistrack A 22 mixers 1 30 mm wave interface connector C 9 mm wave interface mnemonics C 9 mm wave module leveling L 4 mm wave source modules system connections 3 22 mnemonics 1 63 1 64 conventions for query commands 1 63 long form 1 64 short form 1 64 modify HP Agilent 8340 41 program for SCPI 3 23 MOD key M 9 modulation pulse scalar P 15 module selection M 10 M 11 M 12 module selection softkeys M 9 more key M 13 multi pin connectors C 5 multiplication factor frequency F 12 new line affect on current path 1 68 in response message terminator 1 82 symbol used for 1 64 use as a program message terminator 1 64 use as a response message terminator 1 65 with HP BASIC OUTPUT statements 1 81 new line new line use as a program message terminator 1 81 no frequency standard T 2 no front panel change interface address 3 8 noise figure meter system connections 3 22 normal leveling mod
246. ment loop Line 400 contains two commands SOURce VOLT sets the output level of the source OPC is used to signal that the preceding command has finished executing To make an accurate measurement the source output must be allowed to settle When the output has settled OPC places 1 78 Getting Started Programming a 1 in the source Output Queue The program waits at line 410 until the 1 returned by 0PC is entered Note that following each OUTPUT containing a query is an ENTER to retrieve the queried value If you do not use paired QUTPUTs and ENTERs you can overwrite data in the instrument Output Queue and generate instrument errors 470 to 480 Disconnect output terminals of the instruments from the unit under test and end the program All HP BASIC programs must have END as the last statement of the main program Getting Started Programming 1 79 Details of Commands and Responses In This Subsection This subsection describes the syntax of SCPI commands and responses It provides many examples of the data types used for command parameters and response data The following topics are explained Program Message These paragraphs explain how to properly Syntax construct the messages you send from the computer to instruments Response Message These paragraphs discuss the format of Syntax messages sent from instruments to the computer SCPI Data Types These paragraphs explain the types of data contained in program and
247. menu structure there are two occurrences of this softkey One occurs in the frequency list menu The other occurs in the power flatness menu In the list menu application the frequency entry and the associated offset and dwell values in the active line are deleted The active line is designated by the gt pointer and can be pointing at any of values within the array In the flatness menu application the frequency and associated correction value in the active line is deleted The active line pointer gt can be pointing to either the frequency value or the correction value SCPI NONE see Fltness Menu or List Menu Analyzer NONE Fltness Menu List Menu Delete Undef Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER This softkey occurs in the power flatness menu It lets you delete only those points that are undefined Undefined correction values are noted by the display as Undefined SCPI NONE see Fltness Menu Analyzer NONE Fltness Menu Operating and Programming Reference D 3 Delta Marker Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also MARKER This softkey causes the difference in frequency between two markers to appear on the swept CW generator display The frequency difference is indicated in the following format gt DELTA MARKER m n XXXXX MHz where m the last marker activated n the reference marker and XX XXX represents some frequency v
248. message without changing the current path m Whitespace White space characters such as lt tab gt and lt space gt are generally ignored There are two important exceptions White space inside a keyword such as FREQ uency is not allowed You must use white space to separate parameters from commands For example the lt space gt between LEVel and 6 2 in the command POWer LEVel 6 2 is mandatory White space does not affect the current path a Commas If a command requires more than one parameter you must separate adjacent parameters using a comma Commas do not affect the current path a Common Commands Common commands such as RST are not part of any subsystem An instrument interprets them in the same way regardless of the current path setting Figure 1 26 shows examples of how to use the colon and semicolon to navigate efficiently through the command tree Getting Started Programming 1 69 BB cc DD EE FF GG HH JJ Q Sets current path to ROOT 1 AA CC M NO change to current path 2 AA BB 0 Set current path DOWN one level 3 AA DD HH JJ PELIPET 4 AA BB EE AA DD JJ Figure 1 26 Proper Use of the Colon and Semicolon In Figure 1 26 notice how proper use of the semicolon can save typing Sending this message AA BB EE FF GG Is the same as sending these three messages AA BB EE AA BB FF AA BB GG 1 70 Getting Started Programming Subsystem Command Tables These parag
249. mizing Swept CW Generator Performance in Chapter 1 CONNECTORS BNC Connectors AUX OUTPUT provides a reference signal from 2 to 26 5 GHz at a typical minimum power level of 10 dBm Nominal input impedance is 50 Q EXT ALC allows the swept CW generator to be externally leveled This input is used for power meter leveling or negative crystal detector leveling Input impedance in crystal or meter leveling modes is nominally 1 MQ See Specifications for the signal requirements Nominal input impedance is 100 kQ SWEEP OUTPUT provides a voltage range of 0 to 10 V When the swept CW generator is sweeping the SWEEP OUTPUT is 0 V at the beginning of the sweep and 10 V at the end of the sweep regardless of the sweep width In CW mode the SWEEP OUTPUT ranges from 0 V at the swept CW generator minimum frequency to 10 V at the specified maximum frequency with a proportional voltage for frequencies between the specified minimum and maximum When the swept CW generator is in manual sweep operation the sweep output voltage is a percentage of the span Minimum load impedance is 3 kQ STOP SWEEP IN OUT stops a sweep when this input is pulled low Retrace does not occur and the sweep resumes when this input is pulled high C 4 Operating and Programming Reference Multi pin Connectors CONNECTORS The open circuit voltage is TTL high and is internally pulled low when the swept CW generator stops its sweep Externally
250. mmand specifies the time between the source settling and the time the trigger out signal is sent Specifying TRIGger ODELay lt num gt time suffix instructs the swept CW generator to set the specified time as the delay necessary to ensure proper settling Sending RST sets ODELay to an instrument dependent value usually zero 1 118 Getting Started Programming SOURce The SOURce command selects the trigger source for an event detection state Only one source can be specified at a time and all others are ignored Sending RST sets SOURce to IMMediate The most commonly used sources are a BUS The event detector is satisfied by either Group Execute Trigger lt GET gt or a TRG command lt GET gt is a low level GPIB message that can be sent using the TRIGGER command in HP BASIC a EXTernal An external signal connector is selected as the source m IMMediate Qualified events are generated automatically There is no waiting for a qualified event Getting Started Programming 1 119 Related Documents The International Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Agilent IEEE Standard 488 1 1987 IEEE Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation New York NY 1987 This standard defines the technical details required to design and build an GPIB interface IEEE 488 1 This standard contains electrical specifications and information on protocol that is beyond the needs of most programmers Ho
251. mmands that you send When you first turn on power to an instrument it is in the idle state You can force the instrument to the idle state using ABORt or RST The initiate and event detection trigger states are essentially a list of conditions that must be satisfied to reach the adjacent states The sequence operation state signals the instrument hardware to take some action and listens for a signal that the action has been taken ABORt RST Event Detection 1 Event Detection N Sequence Instrument Operation Actions Figure 1 35 Generalized Trigger Model Details of Trigger States These paragraphs use flow charts to explain the decision making rules inside each trigger state These rules govern how the instrument moves between adjacent states Some of the flow charts reference commands that have not been discussed yet These commands are explained later in this subsection Keep in mind that this explanation covers the most general case Your particular instrument may not implement all of the commands discussed here 1 110 Getting Started Programming Inside the Idle State Figure 1 36 illustrates the operation of the idle state INIT IMM ABORT RST or INIT CONT ON Figure 1 36 Inside the Idle State Turning power on or sending RST or ABORT forces the trigger system to the idle state The trigger system remains in the idle state until it is initiated by INITiate IMMediate or INITiate CO
252. mming a specific state via SYSTem MM Head SELect sets SYSTem MMHead SELect AUTO to OFF RST value is 1 e SYSTem MMHead SELect FRONt REAR NONE e SYSTem MMHead SELect Sets and queries the active millimeter source module interface Programming a specific state FRONt REAR NONE sets SYSTem MMHead SELect AUTO to OFF Programming a specific state will cause the instrument to examine the selected interface to determine the type of source module connected The instrument Operating and Programming Reference S 45 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY frequency limits and multiplier will be altered accordingly However the leveling point is not changed see POWer ALC SOURce e SYSTem PRESet EXECute Sets the instrument to its local operation state This is the same as pressing the front panel green key There is no corresponding query e SYSTem PRESet SAVE Saves the present state so it can be used whenever the command SYSTem PRESet EXECute is executed or the front panel green key is pressed e SYSTem PRESet TYPE FACTory USER e SYSTem PRESet TYPE Sets and queries the type of preset to execute when the SYSTem PRESet EXECute command is given Factory preset defaults all values to factory specified values User defined preset defaults all values to a specified state of the instrument that you have saved with SYSTem PRESet SAVE e SYSTem SECurity COUNt lt num gt MINimum MAXimum e SYSTem SECurity COUNt MIN
253. moving the Fan Filter 1 111 1 113 1 114 1 115 1 116 1 117 A 5 A 8 C 6 C 7 C 9 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 8 P 12 5 57 2b 3 2b 5 2b 7 2b 9 2b 11 2b 13 2b 15 2b 17 2b 19 3 5 3 7 3 11 3 12 3 16 4 4 4 5 Tables 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 C 1 D 1 S 1 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 Fuse Part Numbers Keys Under Discussion in This Section SWEep Command Table SCPI Data Types Sample Swept CW Generator Commands Pin Description of the Auxiliary Interface Mnemonics used to Indicate Status 8360 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY Adapter Descriptions and Part Numbers Shipped with Each Swept CW Generator Model Language GPIB Addresses Factory Set GPIB Addresses Rack Mount Slide Kit Contents Rack Flange Kit for Swept CW Generators with Handles Removed Contents Rack Flange Kit for Swept CW Generators with Handles Attached Contents Instrument Preset Conditions for the HP Agilent 8360 8340 8341 Numeric Suffixes Lo Programming Language Comparison 1 21 1 71 1 83 1 88 C 6 D 6 5 16 3 2 3 6 3 7 3 10 3 13 3 15 3 20 3 24 3 25 Contents 15 Getting Started What Is In This This chapter contains information on how to use the Agilent Chapter 8360 L Series Swept CW Generator The information is separated into three sections Basic For the novice user unfamiliar with the 8360 L Series Swept CW Generator This section describes the basic features of the
254. must be applied to the 10 MHz REF INPUT BNC connector located on the rear panel If no external signal is applied UNLOCK and EXT REF appears on the message line of the display An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active Operating and Programming Reference T 1 10 MHz Freq Std Extrnl Programming Codes See Also SCPI ROSCillator SOURce EX Ternal Analyzer NONE Ref Osc Menu 10 MHz Freq Std Intrnl Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SYSTEM This softkey sets the swept CW generator to select the internal 10 MHz signal as the frequency reference If the internal signal is disconnected or not working properly UNLOCK appears on the message line of the display An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI ROSCillator 5OURce INTernal Analyzer NONE Ref Osc Menu 10 MHz Freq Std None Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SYSTEM This softkey sets the reference oscillator to a free run state where no frequency reference is used An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI ROSCillator SOURce NONE Analyzer NONE Ref Osc Menu T 2 Operating and Programming Reference TrigOut Delay Tracking Menu Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER USER CAL 5 9 In the menu structure there are t
255. must be entered before a power value can be accepted otherwise the following error message appears ERROR Must first enter a List Frequency The rotary knob and the up down arrow keys let you scroll through the frequency points available to change the default power values An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI NONE see List Menu Analyzer NONE List Menu Optimizing Swept CW Generator Performance in Chapter 1 ENTRY KEYS Function Group Menu Map Description See Also NONE NONE The entry keys consist of the numeric entry keys 0 through 9 the decimal point key the negative sign backspace key and the terminator keys These keys are active whenever the ENTRY ON OFF LED is lit ARROW KEYS ROTARY KNOB Entry Area in Chapter 1 E 4 Operating and Programming Reference Ext Det Cal ENTRY ON OFF Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also ENTRY NONE This softkey lets you turn off blank the active entry area and disable the ARROW keys rotary knob and entry keys When any function key hard or soft is pressed the active entry area is reactivated The yellow LED ENTRY ON next to ENTRY ON OFF indicates whether the entry area is active LED on active SCPI No specific code activates ENTRY ON OFF Analyzer EF off Arrow Keys Entry Area in Chapter 1 Ext Det Cal Function Group Menu Map Descrip
256. n Requires 30 minute warm up from cold start at 0 to 55 C Internal temperature equilibrium reached over 2 hour warm up at stable ambient temperature Frequency Reference Reference time base is kept at operating temperature with the instrument connected to AC power Instruments disconnected from AC power for more than 24 hours require 30 days to achieve time base aging specification Instruments disconnected from AC power for less than 24 hours require 24 hours to achieve time base aging specification 48 to 66 Hz 115 volts 10 25 or 230 volts 10 15 400 VA maximum 30 VA in standby Net Weight 27 kg 60 lb Shipping Weight 36 kg 80 1b Dimensions 178 H x 425 W x 648 mm D 7 0 x 16 75 x 25 5 inches 83623L 83630L Type N female 3 5 mm female Part number 1250 1745 3 5 mm female 3 5 mm female Part number 5061 5311 83640L 83650L 2 4 mm female 2 92 female Part number 1250 2187 2 4 mm female 2 4 mm female Part number 1250 2188 Inputs amp Outputs Auxiliary Output Provides an unmodulated reference signal from 2 to 26 5 GHz at a typical minimum power level of 10 dBm Nominal output impedance 50 ohms SMA female rear panel RF Output Nominal output impedance 50 ohms Precision 3 5 mm male on 20 and 26 5 GHz models 2 4 mm male on 40 and 50 GHz models front panel External ALC Input Used for negative external detector or power meter leveling Nominal input impedance
257. n The RST setting is ON e FREQuency STEP INCRement lt num gt freq suffix MAXimum MINimum e FREQuency STEP INCRement Sets and queries the frequency step size to use for any node in the frequency subsystem that allows UP and DOWN as parameters Setting this value explicitly causes a FREQ STEP AUTO OFF command The RST setting is automatically calculated from span e FREQuency STOP lt num gt freq suffix MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN e FREQuency STOP MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the stop Frequency See FREQ CENTER for more information RST setting is MAX e INITiate CONTinuous ON OFF 1 0 e INITiate CONTinuous Sets and queries the state of the continuous initiation switch This is more commonly known as single or continuous sweep This does not affect a sweep in progress RST setting is OFF e INITiate IMMediate Causes the initiation of a sweep Useful mainly in the INIT CONT OFF mode of operation single sweep By combining the OPC WAI facilities with the INIT IMM command the functionality of the S 32 Operating and Programming Reference SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY analyzer compatible language take sweep and single sweep command can be achieved e LIST DWEL1 lt num gt time suffix MAXimum MINimum 1 801 e LIST DWEL1 MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the amount of time to dwell at each frequency The number of dwells can be queried with LIST DWEL1 POINts This dwell is the time after complet
258. nd Syntax Response Message Syntax SCPI Data Types Parameter Types Numeric Parameters Extended Numeric Parameters Discrete Parameters Boolean Parameters Response Data Types Real Response Data Integer Response Data Discrete Response Data String Response Data Programming Typical Measurements In This Subsection Using the Example Programs Use of the Command Tables GPIB Check Example Program 1 Program Comments Local Lockout Demonstration Example Program 2 Program Comments Setting Up A Typical Sweep Example Program 3 Program Comments oaa Queries Example Program 4 Program Comments Saving and Recalling States Example Program 5 Program Comments Looping and Synchronization Example Program 6 Program Comments Using the WAI Command Example Program 7 Program Comments Using the User Flatness Correction Commands Example Program 8 Programming the Status System In This Subsection General Status Register Model Condition Register Transition Filter Event Register Enable Register 1 75 1 76 1 77 1 77 1 77 1 77 1 78 1 80 1 80 1 80 1 81 1 81 1 82 1 83 1 83 1 83 1 84 1 85 1 85 1 85 1 85 1 86 1 86 1 86 1 87 1 87 1 87 1 88 1 90 1 90 1 91 1 92 1 93 1 93 1 95 1 95 1 97 1 97 1 99 1 99 1 101 1 101 1 103 1 106 1 106 1 106 1 106 1 107 1 107 1 107 Contents 3 Contents 4 An Example Sequence Programming the Trigger System In This Subsection Generalized Trigger Model Overvie
259. nd queries the function switch that controls how the power step size POWer STEP INCRement is determined If in the automatic state then the step size is 1 dB The RST setting is ON e POWer STEP INCRement lt num gt DB MAXimum MINimum e POWer STEP INCRement MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the power step size to be used for any node in the power subsystem that allows UP and DOWN as parameters Setting this value explicitly causes POWer STEP AUTO OFF The RST setting is 10 dB e POWer STOP lt num gt 1lvl suffix MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN e POWer STOP MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the ending power for a power sweep Default units and units for query response are determined by the command UNIT POWer The coupling equations for power sweep are exactly analogous to those for frequency sweep Power sweep is allowed to be negative unlike frequency sweeps RST value is 0 dBm e ROSCillator SOURce e ROSCillator SOURce INTernal EXTernal NONE Operating and Programming Reference S 39 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY Sets and queries the reference oscillator selection switch The command to set the switch will cause ROSC SOUR AUTO OFF to be done also The RST value is automatically determined e ROSCillator SOURce AUTO ON OFF 1 0 ROSCillator SOURce AUTO Sets and queries the automatic reference selection switch The RST value is 1 e STATus OPERation CONDition Queries the Standard Operation Condition re
260. nding trigger systems requires more technical expertise than most other topics covered in this section If you find this subsection difficult keep in mind that you do not have to program the trigger system to make measurements or output signals Using MEASure READ or INITiate you can avoid having to learn the information in this subsection Overview An instrument trigger system synchronizes instrument actions with specified events An instrument action may be to make a measurement or source an output signal The events used to synchronize these actions include software trigger commands changing signal levels and pulses on BNC connectors The trigger system also lets you specify the number of times to repeat certain actions and delays between actions Figure 1 35 shows a simplified view of the generalized SCPI trigger model Instruments may implement some or all of this model to accommodate varying needs Each unshaded block in Figure 1 35 represents a particular trigger state The generalized trigger model allows an arbitrary number of event detection states Note that there can be two paths into a state and two paths out of a state These are called the downward entrance and exit and the upward entrance and exit Upward means moving towards the idle state and downward means moving towards instrument actions Getting Started Programming 1 109 An instrument moves between adjacent states depending on its internal conditions and the co
261. neral programming model 1 110 event register 1 107 in general status register model 1 106 1 107 events event commands 1 72 example program flatness correction 1 103 GPIB check 1 90 local lockout 1 91 looping and synchronization 1 99 setting up a sweep 1 93 synchronous sweep 1 101 use of queries 1 95 use of save recall 1 97 example programs 1 87 105 examples equipment used 1 2 examples simple program messages 1 72 example stimulus response program 1 77 extended numeric parameters discussed in detail 1 84 explained briefly 1 74 extenders GPIB C 8 EX Ternal trigger source defined 1 119 external ALC BNC L 3 L 4 external ALC connector C 4 external detector calibration E 5 external detector leveling L 3 external frequency standard T 1 external leveling 1 23 29 coupling factor C 11 detector calibration E 5 Index 7 Index 8 low output 1 26 theory of A 7 with detectors couplers or splitters 1 23 26 with power meters 1 27 with source modules 1 28 external power meter range P 16 external trigger frequency list L 9 external trigger stepped sweep S 62 external trigger sweep mode S 55 factor coupling C 11 factory preset P 10 factory set interface addresses 3 7 fan filter clean 4 5 fastest sweep retrace cycle S 54 fault information F 1 fault information 1 F 2 fault information 2 F 3 fault menu F 1 fault status clear C 2 feature status D 5 filter transition 1 107 fi
262. nerator REMOTE LED is off Also verify that all sweep functions now can be modified via the front panel controls HINT Note that the swept CW generator LOCAL key produces the same result as programming LOCAL 719 or LOCAL 7 Be careful because the LOCAL 7 command places all instruments on the GPIB in the local state as opposed to just the swept CW generator Program Comments 90 to 120 Print a message on the computer s display then pause 130 Place the source into REMOTE 140 Place the source into LOCAL LOCKOUT mode 150 to 190 Print a message on the computer s display then pause 200 Return the source to local control 210 to 230 Print a message on the computer s display 1 92 Getting Started Programming Setting Up A Typical Sweep Example Program 3 In swept operation the swept CW generator is programmed for the proper sweep frequency range sweep time power level and marker frequencies for a test measurement This program sets up the swept CW generator for a general purpose situation The instrument is the same as in program 1 Clear and reset the controller and type in the following program 10 Source 719 20 ABORT 7 30 LOCAL 7 40 CLEAR Source 50 REMOTE Source 60 OUTPUT Source RST 70 OUTPUT Source FREQuency MODE SWEep 80 OUTPUT Source FREQuency STARt 4 GHZ 90 OUTPUT Source FREQuency STOP 7 GHz 100 OUTPUT Source POWer LEVel 5 DBM 110 OUTPUT Source SWEep TIME SOOMS 120 OUTPUT Sour
263. network analyzer language on the 8360 L Series and the HP Agilent 8340 8341 are identical Table 3 8 lists the 8360 L Series suffixes The default unit for each type of suffix is shown in bold type Table 3 8 Numeric Suffixes Suffix Network Analyzer SCPI Type Language Frequency HZ KZ MZ GZ HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ Power Level DB DBM W MW UW Power Ratio DB DB Time SC MS S MS US NS PS Status Bytes There are two separate and distinct status structures within the 8360 L Series depending on the GPIB language selected When network analyzer language is selected the status structure utilized is structurally and syntactically the same as on the HP Agilent 8340 8341 This greatly enhances programming compatibility between existing HP Agilent 8340 8341 programs and network analyzer programs converted or written for the 8360 L Series In the SCPI language mode the status structure is defined by the SCPI status system All SCPI instruments implement status registers in the same fashion For more information on the status registers refer to ANALYZER STATUS REGISTER and SCPI STATUS REGISTER STRUCTURE in Chapter 2 Table 3 9 Programming Language Comparison Description Network Analyzer Language SCPI Language ALC Leveling mode external Leveling mode internal Leveling mode mm module Leveling mode power meter Enable normal ALC operation Disable ALC and control modulator drive dir
264. nformation each of these keys has a separate entry in Chapter 2 Externally Leveling the Swept CW Generator Leveling with Detectors Couplers Splitters In externally leveled operations the output power from the swept CW generator is detected by an external sensor The output of this detector is returned to the leveling circuitry and the output power is automatically adjusted to keep power constant at the point of detection Figure 1 11 illustrates a typical setup for external leveling When externally leveled the power level feedback is taken from the external negative detector input rather than the internal detector This feedback voltage controls the ALC system to set the desired RF output Refer to Figure A 1 in Chapter 2 for a block diagram of the swept CW generator s ALC circuitry SWEPT CW GENERATOR oa a oa RF OUTPUT DIRECTIONAL COUPLER NEGATIVE DETECTOR LEVELED OUTPUT Figure 1 11 ALC Circuit Externally Leveled Getting Started Advanced 1 23 Note Hint 1 24 Getting Started Advanced To level externally 1 oOo e oN Set up the equipment as shown For this example the detector coupler setup is used Refer to menu map 1 Press ALC Select Leveling Point ExtDet Set the coupling factor Select Coupling Factor 2 0 my Power splitters have a coupling factor of 0 dB Figure 1 12 shows
265. ng Codes See Also POWER and FREQUENCY 2 and 5 This command causes the swept CW generator to examine only the rear panel source module interface connector to determine the type of source module if any connected The instrument frequency limits and multiplier are altered according to the source module connected However the leveling point is not changed See Leveling Point Module to set the swept CW generator to level at the output of the source module An asterisk next to the key label indicates this feature is active SCPI SYSTem MMHead SELect FRONt REAR NONE SYSTem MMHead SELect Analyzer NONE Module Menu more n m Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also ALL FUNCTION GROUPS ALL MENU MAPS The more n m softkey allows you to page through the menus Look at one of the menu maps Notice the line keypath drawn from more n m By selecting this softkey the next page of the menu is revealed If you are viewing the last page of the menu selecting more n m returns the first page of the menu In this softkey n represents the page you are on and m represents the total number of pages in the menu SCPI Not Applicable Analyzer Not Applicable PRIOR Operating and Programming Reference M 13 Mtr Meas Menu Function Group POWER Menu Map 5 Description This softkey accesses the meter measure softkeys Meas Corr All Measures flatness correction values for all
266. ng Reference Programming Codes Fltness Menu When utilizing the user flatness correction feature do not exceed the swept CW generator ALC operating range Exceeding the ALC range causes the output power to become unleveled and eliminates the benefits of user flatness correction The ALC range can be determined by subtracting the minimum output power 20 dBm from the maximum specified power When the optional step attenuator is ordered on a swept CW generator at times it may be necessary to uncouple the attenuator to obtain the full ALC range This can be accomplished by selecting POWER MENU Uncoupl Atten For example an 83630L has an ALC range of gt 30 dB gt 10 to 20 dBm When user flatness correction is enabled the maximum settable test port power is equivalent to the maximum available leveled power minus the maximum path loss Po max Ppath loss For example if an 83630L has a maximum path loss of 15 dB due to system components between the source output and the test port the test port power should be set to 5 dBm When user flatness correction is enabled this provides the maximum available power to the device under test DUT SCPI m CORRection FLATness lt num gt freq suffix lt num gt DB 2 801 The portion of the above command contained in can be entered from one to 801 times This command creates the frequency correction pair array similar to the front panel array The correction entered is at t
267. ns of the above products Conform to the following product specifications EMC IEC 61326 1 1997 A1 1998 EN 61326 1 1997 A1 1998 Standard Limit CISPR 11 1990 EN 55011 1991 Group 1 Class A IEC 61000 4 2 1995 A1998 EN 61000 4 2 1995 4 kV CD 8 kV AD IEC 61000 4 3 1995 EN 61000 4 3 1995 3 V m 80 1000 MHz IEC 61000 4 4 1995 EN 61000 4 4 1995 0 5 kV sig 1 kV power IEC 61000 4 5 1995 EN 61000 4 5 1996 0 5 kV L L 1 kV L G IEC 61000 4 6 1996 EN 61000 4 6 1998 3 V 0 15 80 MHz IEC 61000 4 11 1994 EN 61000 4 11 1998 1 cycle 100 Safety IEC 61010 1 1990 A1 1992 A2 1995 EN 61010 1 1993 A2 1995 CAN CSA C22 2 No 1010 1 92 Suppl ementary Information The products herewith comply with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC and the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC and carry the CE marking accordingly A Santa Rosa CA USA 2 September 2000 Greg Pfeiffer Quality Engineering Manager For further information please contact your local Agilent Technologies sales office agent or distributor Compliance with German Noise Requirements This is to declare that this instrument is in conformance with the German Regulation on Noise Declaration for Machines Laermangabe nach der Maschinenlaermrerordnung 3 GSGV Deutschland Acoustic Noise Emmission Geraeuschemission LpA lt 70 dB LpA lt 70 dB Operator position am Arbeitsplatz Normal position normaler Betrieb per IS 7779 nach DIN 45635 t
268. nt but does not start a sweep Press SINGLE a second time to start the sweep The amber LED above the hardkey is lit when the function is on SCPI INITiate CONTinuous OFF 0 ABORt INITiate IMMediate Analyzer 52 our Continuous Single and Manual Sweep Operation in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 Software Rev Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SYSTEM This softkey displays the swept CW generator s programming language GPIB address and firmware date code SCPI IDN Analyzer OI GPIB Menu SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY S 52 Operating and Programming Reference Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY This hardkey lets you set a value for the frequency span in the center frequency frequency span mode of swept frequency operation Press SPAN and use the entry area to enter the desired value The swept CW generator sweeps from one half the span below to one half above the center frequency Certain center frequency and frequency span combinations cause the swept CW generator to limit the value entered In general any combination that causes the swept CW generator to exceed its minimum or maximum specified frequency is limited SCPI FREQuency SPAN lt num gt freq suffix or MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN FREQuency MODE SWEep Analyzer DF lt num gt Hz kKz Mz Gz CENTER STAR
269. nt Technologies France 1 Avenue Du Canada Zone D Activite De Courtaboeuf F 91947 Les Ulis Cedex France 33 1 69 82 60 60 Germany Agilent Technologies GmbH Agilent Technologies Strasse 61352 Bad Homburg v d H Germany 49 6172 16 0 INTERCON FIELD OPERATIONS Headquarters Agilent Technologies 3495 Deer Creek Road Palo Alto California USA 94304 1316 650 857 5027 China China Agilent Technologies 38 Bei San Huan X1 Road Shuang Yu Shu Hai Dian District Beijing China 86 1 256 6888 Taiwan Agilent Technologies Taiwan 8th Floor H P Building 337 Fu Hsing North Road Taipei Taiwan 886 2 712 0404 Australia Agilent Technologies Australia Ltd 31 41 Joseph Street Blackburn Victoria 3130 61 3 895 2895 Japan Agilent Technologies Japan Ltd 9 1 Takakura Cho Hachioji Tokyo 192 Japan 81 426 60 2111 Canada Agilent Technologies Canada Ltd 17500 South Service Road Trans Canada Highway Kirkland Quebec H9J 2X8 Canada 514 697 4232 Singapore Agilent Technologies Singapore Pte Ltd 150 Beach Road 29 00 Gateway West Singapore 0718 65 291 9088 Contents Getting Started What Is In This Chapter How To Use This Chapter Equipment Used In Examples Introducing the Agilent 8360 L Series Swept CW Generators Display Area Entry Area CW Operation and Start Stop Frequency Sweep CW Operation Lo Start Stop Frequency Sweep Center F
270. o a user specified value Automatically sets the ALC output power correction value for all points in the frequency list to a user specified value Reveals the frequency list in the point trigger menu A frequency list consists of two or more frequency points A frequency point can be any frequency value within the specified frequency range of the swept CW generator and must be entered before a value for either ALC output power offset or dwell time is accepted The maximum number of frequency points in a frequency list is 801 Creating a Frequency List There are two methods of constructing a frequency list 1 Use the Enter List Freq softkey to begin entering frequency points The list will be generated in the order the values are entered L 6 Operating and Programming Reference Note Programming Codes List Menu 2 If the minimum and maximum frequencies of the swept CW generator frequency range are not the endpoints desired for the frequency list use the Auto Fill Start and Auto Fill Stop softkeys to define the frequency list endpoints Then use either the Auto Fill Incr or Auto Fill Pts softkeys to create the list A list created by this method is ordered with the lowest frequency as the first point and the highest frequency as the last point of the frequency list Editing Frequency Points To add a frequency point to the list place the active entry arrow gt where you want the next frequency point to appear T
271. of the ALC system 25 to 20 dBm P 2 Operating and Programming Reference POWER LEVEL When you press POWER LEVEL the active entry area displays gt POWER LEVEL X XX dBm where X represents a numeric value The data display area indicates Power dBm INT X XX In Normal Uncoupled Attenuator the POWER LEVEL key controls the Level DAC and Level Control Circuits see Figure A 1 within the ALC level range 25 to 20 dBm The attenuator is uncoupled from the ALC system and is controlled separately with the Set Atten key When you press POWER LEVEL the active entry area displays gt ATTEN X dB ALC X XX dBm where X represents a numeric value The data display area indicates Power dBm INT X XX In Normal External Detector ExtDet the key controls the output power of the swept CW generator as compared to the external detector feedback voltage The attenuator if present is automatically uncoupled from the ALC system and the POWER LEVEL key controls the Level DAC and Level Control Circuits see Figure A 1 within the ALC level range 25 to 20 dBm This mode of operation requires a feedback connection from a negative output diode detector to the EXT ALC connector When you press POWER LEVEL the active entry area displays gt ATTEN X dB EXT POWER X XX dBm where X represents a numeric value The data display area indicates Power dBm EXT X XX In Normal Power Meter P
272. og signal such as IMMediate BUS or TIMer no further qualifications are required to generate an event If however an INTernal or EXTernal analog signal is chosen additional qualifications may apply You specify these additional qualifications using appropriate LEVel SLOPe and HYSTeresis commands Sending RST sets the SOURce to IMMediate The downward path also provides a command to override normal operation IMMediate The lt state_name gt IMMediate command bypasses event detection ECOunt and DELay qualifications one time The upward path through the event detection state contains only one condition A lt state_name gt COUNt command sets the number of times the trigger system must successfully exit that event detection state on a downward path If this condition is satisfied the trigger system exits upward 1 112 Getting Started Programming loop_ctr 0 INTernal qualified EXTernal event detection LEVel COUPling IMMediate 7 SLOPe e HYSTeresis_ etc lt state_name gt SIGNal increment event_ctr by 1 event_ctr ECOunt YES wait DELay lt state_name gt lMMediate increment loop_ctr by 1 Figure 1 38 Inside an Event Detection State Getting Started Programming 1 113 Inside the Sequence Operation State Figure 1 39 illustrates the operation of the sequence operation state The downward entrance to the Sequence Operation State signals t
273. ogramming Reference S 65 Sweep Mode Ramp Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SWEEP This softkey activates the analog frequency sweep mode Ramp sweep mode is the factory preset state An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI FREQuency MODE SWEep SWEep FREQuency GENeration ANALog Analyzer NONE CONNECTORS conT Manual Sweep SINGLE Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 Sweep Mode Step Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SWEEP This softkey activates the stepped frequency step mode In this mode the swept CW generator steps from the start frequency to the stop frequency by the designated frequency step size Manual continuous and single sweeps can be performed in this mode An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI FREQuency MODE SWEep SWEep FREQuency GENeration STEPped Analyzer NONE CONT Manual Sweep SINGLE Step Swp Menu Using Step Sweep in Chapter 1 S 66 Operating and Programming Reference Swp Span CalOnce Swp Span Cal Always Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also USER CAL This softkey causes a sweep span calibration each time the frequency span is changed An asterisk next to the key label indicates this feature is active SCPI CALibration SPAN AUTO ON OFF 1 0
274. ome computers RESET CONTROL SEND The preceding statements are primarily management commands that do not incorporate programming codes The following two statements do incorporate programming codes and are used for data communication Output Output is used to send function commands and data commands from the controller to the addressed instrument The syntax is device selector numeric line number expression string expression where USING is a secondary command that formats the output in a particular way such as a binary or ASCII representation of numbers The USING command is followed by image items that precisely define the format of the output these image items can be a string of code characters or a reference to a statement line in the computer program Image items are explained in the programming codes where they are needed Notice that this syntax is virtually identical to the syntax for the ENTER statement that follows 1 60 Getting Started Programming A BASIC example 100 OUTPUT 719 programming codes The many programming codes for the swept CW generator are listed in the SCPI Command Summary in Chapter 2 Related statements used by some computers CONTROL CONVERT IMAGE IOBUFFER TRANSFER Enter Enter is the complement of OUTPUT and is used to transfer data from the addressed instrument to the controller The syntax is device selector line number
275. on Network Analyzer Language SCPI Language Set remote knob Request status byte mask Reset sweep Number of steps in a stepped sweep Swap network analyzer channels Test HP IB interface Sets sweep time lower limit RB RE lt num gt RM lt num gt RS SN lt num gt SW lt 1 0 gt TI lt num gt TL lt num gt time_suffix SRE lt num gt SRE ESE lt num gt ESE ABOR SWE POIN lt num gt DIAG TINT lt num gt SWE TIME LLIM lt num gt time_suffix Take sweep TS TSW WAI Instrument State Instrument preset IP SYST PRES Local instrument control LOCAL 7XX LOCAL 7XX XX Source HP IB address Markers n is 1 to 5 1 is default Turn on and set marker Turn off frequency marker Enable M1 M2 sweep Disable M1 M2 sweep Move start gt M1 stop gt M2 Enable delta marker Disable delta marker Move marker to center frequency Turn off all markers Turn on amplitude markers Turn off amplitude markers Mn lt num gt freq_suffix MnMo MP1 MPO SHMP MD1 MDO MC SHMO AK1 AKO MARK n FREQ lt num gt freq_suffix STAT ON MARK n OFF SWE MARK STAT ON SWE MARK STAT OFF SWE MARK XFER MARK n DELT lt num gt lt num gt MARK OFF MARK y FREQ FREQ CENT lt response gt freq_suffix MARK AOFF MARK n AMPL ON AMPL VAL lt num gt DB MARK AMPL OFF Installation 3 27 Table 3 9 Programming Language Comparison con
276. on Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SYSTEM This softkey causes the swept CW generator to return to the factory preset instrument state after writing alternating ones and zeroes over all state information frequency lists and save recall registers You can select the number of times to clear memory When you select Clear Memory the swept CW generator displays the following in the active entry area gt OF TIMES TO CLEAR MEMORY X Enter the number of times the state information should be overwritten While the swept CW generator is working to overwrite the state information it flashes the count on the display This softkey causes the swept CW generator to recall the original calibration data stored in permanent memory EEROM all list and user ALC correction data will be lost SCPI SYSTem SECurity COUNt lt n gt SYSTem SECurity STATe ON SYSTem SECurity 5TATe OFF The transition from on to off triggers the blanking Sending the off message by itself will do nothing Analyzer SHMZ18HZ SHKZOHZ Security Menu Using the Security Features in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference C 3 Clear Point Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER This softkey lets you change the correction value for the active frequency point to the Undefined state SCPI NONE see Fltness Menu Analyzer NONE ALC Fltness Menu Opti
277. on PMETer FLATness INITiate USER DIQDe PMETer MMHead Initiates the specified calibration These calibrations require the use of an external power measurement Once initiated the swept CW generator sets up for the first point to be measured and responds to the query with the frequency at which the power is to be measured The parameters mean USER Initiates a calibration at all of the user flatness points DIODe Initiates a calibration of the external flatness Depends on value of CALibration PMETer RANGe S 24 Operating and Programming Reference SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY PMETer Initiates a calibration of the power meter flatness Depends on value of CALibration PMETer RANGe MMHead Initiates a calibration of the source module flatness Depends on value of CALibration PMETer RANGe e CALibration PMETer FLATness NEXT lt num gt lvl suffix The parameter is the measured power that is currently produced by the swept CW generator You must supply this parameter after measuring the power using an external power meter The query response is issued after the swept CW generator processes the supplied parameter and settles on the next point to be measured The query response is gt 0 The frequency in Hz that is currently produced 0 The calibration is complete lt 0 An error has occurred and the calibration is aborted e CALibration SPAN AUTO ON OFF 1 0 e CALibration SPAN AUTO Sets and queries the automatic sweep span calib
278. ont or Rear depending on where the interface connection is made All of the ALC data necessary to communicate properly with the swept CW generator is exchanged via the SOURCE MODULE INTERFACE To obtain flatness corrected power refer to Creating and Applying the User Flatness Correction Array in the Optimizing Swept CW Generator Performance section Getting Started Advanced 1 29 Working with Mixers Reverse Power Effects Note 1 30 Getting Started Advanced Uncoupled operation applies to Option 001 swept CW generators only Uncoupled operation is useful when working with mixers Figure 1 16 shows a hypothetical setup where the swept CW generator is providing a small signal to a mixer The swept CW generator output is 8 dBm which in Leveling Mode Normal results in ATTEN 0 dB ALC Level 8 dBm The mixer is driven with an LO of 10 dBm and has LO to RF isolation of 15 dB The resulting LO feedthrough of 5 dBm enters the swept CW generator s OUTPUT port goes through the attenuator with no loss and arrives at the internal detector Depending on frequency it is possible for most of this energy to enter the detector Since the detector responds to its total input power regardless of frequency this excess energy causes the leveling circuit to reduce its output In this example the reverse power is actually larger than the ALC level which may result in the swept CW generator output being s
279. operation is the same in both applications This softkey enables the entry of a stop frequency used to determine the ending frequency of the automatic filling array The array is not created until either the increment value or the number of points is assigned The auto fill stop frequency does not affect the swept CW generator stop frequency When Auto Fill Stop is selected the active entry area indicates gt Fill Stop XXXXXXXXX MHz where X represents a numeric value Unless a previous entry was made the display indicates the swept CW generator maximum frequency SCPI NONE see Fltness Menu or List Menu Analyzer NONE Fltness Menu List Menu Optimizing Swept CW Generator Performance in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference A 21 Auto Track Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER USER CAL 5 9 This softkey optimizes the tracking of the swept CW generator s output filter to the oscillator Use it to maximize RF power output The swept CW generator displays Peaking At XXXXX MHz where XXXXX represents frequency values Peaking begins at the low frequency end and steps through to the high end of the frequency range Auto Track is complete when the display returns to its original state On swept CW generators without a step attenuator provide a good source match on the RF connector Use a power sensor or a 10 dB attenuator If a good source match is not provided the
280. opyright Agilent Technologies 1996 1997 1999 2000 All Rights Reserved Reproduction adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited except as allowed under the copyright laws 1400 Fountaingrove Parkway Santa Rosa CA 95403 1799 USA Certification Warranty Agilent Technologies certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment from the factory Agilent Technologies further certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and Technology to the extent allowed by the Institute s calibration facility and to the calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members This Agilent Technologies instrument product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from date of shipment During the warranty period Agilent Technologies will at its option either repair or replace products which prove to be defective For warranty service or repair this product must be returned to a service facility designated by Agilent Technologies Buyer shall prepay shipping charges to Agilent Technologies and Agilent Technologies shall pay shipping charges to return the product to Buyer However Buyer shall pay all shipping charges duties and taxes for products returned to Agilent Technologies from another country Agilent Technologies warrants that its soft
281. or frequency manual sweep POWer MODE SWEep POWer SPAN lt num gt flvl suffix MAXimum MINimum This is the command for power manual sweep LIST MODE MANual This is the command for manual list sweep Analyzer 53 See Also Power Sweep Sweep Mode List Continuous Single and Manual Sweep Operation in Chapter 1 M 2 Operating and Programming Reference MARKER MARKER Function Group Menu Map Description See Also MENU SELECT This hardkey allows Ampl Markers Center Marker Delta Marker Delta Mkr Ref M1 M2 Sweep Marker M1 Marker M2 Marker M3 Marker M4 Marker M5 Markers All Off Start Mi Stop M2 access to the marker functions Causes the swept CW generator to display markers as an amplitude pulse Changes the swept CW generator s center frequency to the value of the most recently activated marker Displays the frequency difference between the active marker and the marker designated by the softkey Delta Mkr Ref Reveals the softkeys in the delta marker reference menu Causes the swept CW generator to sweep from M1 to M2 Makes M1 frequency the active function Makes M2 frequency the active function Makes M3 frequency the active function Makes M4 frequency the active function Makes M5 frequency the active function Turns off all markers Changes the swept CW generator start and stop frequencies to the values of M1 and M2 The markers are functional whenever
282. ormance especially in harsh environments having wide temperature variations Press USER CAL Select Tracking Menu Auto Track Getting Started Advanced 1 49 ALC Bandwidth Selection 1 50 Getting Started Advanced The ALC bandwidth defaults at factory preset to the auto selection ALC Bandwidth Select Auto which selects the appropriate bandwidth high or low for each application To make the bandwidth selection the swept CW generator determines which functions are activated and uses the decision tree shown in Figure 1 23 Low BW Sweep Time Yes lt 5Sec No Low Band Frequency ALC 4OOMHz Search or List No Frequency or Step Sweep High BW Low BW Figure 1 23 Decision Tree for ALC Bandwidth Selection Using Step Sweep Refer to menu map 2 Press FREQUENCY MENU Select Step Swp Menu Select Step Size Enter the desired increment value Select Step Points Enter the number of points desired Determine the dwell time desired select Step Dwell and enter a value or choose the dwell time determined by the ramp mode sweep time select Dwell Coupled Determine the triggering scheme select Step Swp Pt Trig Auto Bus or Ext Press SWEEP MENU Select Sweep Mode Step to activate the step frequency mode Getting Started Advanced 1 51 Creating and Using a Frequency List 1 52 Getting Started Advanced 1 Refer to men
283. oupl Atten Unlock Info Up Down Power Up Dn Size CW Up Dn Size Swept USER DEFINED MENU Usrkey Clear UsrMenu Clear Zero Freq Zoom Error Messages Introduction Front Panel Error Messages i in Alphabetical Order SCPI Error Messages in Numerical Order Swept CW Generator Specific SCPI Error Messages Universal SCPI Error Messages Loe Error Messages From 499 To 400 Error Messages From 399 To 300 Error Messages From 299 To 200 Error Messages From 199 to 100 Menu Maps ALC Menu Frequency Menu Marker Menu Modulation Menu Power Menu Service Menu Sweep Menu System Menu User Cal Menu T 1 T 1 T 2 T 2 T 3 aqnqqndcqqqgqqaqqaa ARON Ny h 1 Or o on Z 1 Z 1 2a 1 2a 1 2a 5 2a 5 2a 6 2a 6 2a 6 2a 6 2a 7 2b 3 2b 5 2b 7 2b 9 2b 11 2b 13 2b 15 2b 17 2b 19 Contents 9 2c Specifications Frequency 2 2 2 ee ee ee 2c 2 Range 2 we a 2c 2 Resolution oL 2c 2 Frequency Bands for CW signals eo 2c 2 Frequency Modes 4 2c 2 CW and Manual Sweep 2 2c 2 Synthesized Step Sweep 2 2 a a 2c 3 Synthesized List Mode 2 1 2c 3 Ramp Sweep Mode 2 2 2c 3 Internal 10 MHz Time Base 2c 3 RF Output 2 2 a 2c 4 Output Power 2 ee 2c 4 Accuracy dB a 2c 5 Flatness dB 2 2 a 2c 5 Analog Power Sweep 20407 2c 6 External Leveling 2 2 2 0204 2c 6 Source Matc
284. our 30 variable declarations 40 50 DIM Err_msg 75 60 INTEGER Err_num 70 80 Part of your program 90 that generates errors 100 110 200 REPEAT 210 OUTPUT Box SYST ERR 220 Query instrument error 230 ENTER Box Err_num Err_msg 240 Read error message 250 PRINT Err_num Err_msg 260 Print error message 270 UNTIL Err_num 0 280 Repeat until no errors 290 300 The rest of your program 310 1 76 Getting Started Programming Example Programs The following is an example program using SCPI compatible instruments The example is written in HP BASIC This example is a stimulus and response application It uses a source and counter to test a voltage controlled oscillator Example Program Description This example demonstrates how several SCPI instruments work together to perform a stimulus response measurement This program measures the linearity of a voltage controlled oscillator VCO A VCO is a device that outputs a frequency proportional to an input signal level Figure 1 28 shows how the hardware is configured Unit Under Test Stimulus Source 0 500mV Response HP IB HP BASIC Controller Figure 1 28 Voltage Controlled Oscillator Test Program Listing INTEGER First Last Testpoint Dummy DIM Id 70 ASSIGN Stimulus TO 717 ASSIGN Response TO 718 First 0 Last 100 CLEAR Stimulus CLEAR Response OUTPUT Stimulus R
285. overs The local operator s check front panel use allows the operator to make a quick check of the main swept CW generator functions prior to use For delete front panel options of the Agilent 8360 L Series use the Front Panel Emulator Software to perform an operator s check If the swept CW generator requires service and the routine maintenance procedures do not clear the problem contact a qualified service technician A list of Agilent Technologies Sales and Support Offices is provided behind the PREFACE tab at the front of this manual To help the service technician identify the problem quickly fill out and attach a service repair tag Service repair tags are provided at the end of this chapter If a self test error occurs note the name of the failure and the referenced paragraph number in the failure symptoms special control settings section of the tag Provide any information that you feel is important to recreate the failure Operator s Check Routine Maintenance 4 1 Local Operator s Check Description The preliminary check provides assurance that most of the internal functions of the swept CW generator are working The main check provides a general check of the overall functions of the swept CW generator No external equipment is needed Preliminary Check Each time the swept CW generator is turned on the swept CW generator performs a series of self tests on the internal CPU power supplies and
286. p An Example Sequence Figure 1 34 illustrates the response of a single bit position in a typical status group for various settings The changing state of the condition in question is shown at the bottom of the figure A small binary table shows the state of the chosen bit in each status register at the selected times T1 to T5 Getting Started Programming 1 107 a a a a a Kowuns o ololo qusaq ololo o uonipuo3 olefe o Kowuns foj Je e 434 o lo uonipuo3 elefela Kowuns fejejeje 44 efefofo uoipuop Kowuns fejejeje xag Jejejeje uompucd olalolo Condition TS T4 TS T2 T1 Figure 1 34 Typical Status Register Bit Changes 1 108 Getting Started Programming Programming the Trigger System In This Subsection Generalized Trigger Model This subsection discusses the layered trigger model used in SCPI instruments It also outlines some commonly encountered trigger configurations and programming methods Trigger system topics are explained in the following paragraphs Generalized Trigger These paragraphs explain the structure and Model components of the layered trigger model used in all SCPI instruments Common Trigger These paragraphs explain the INIT and TRIG Configurations configurations implemented in the swept CW generator Trigger Command These paragraphs provide condensed definitions Definitions for the keywords used in this subsection Understa
287. p MODE Selects and queries the manual sweep mode switch AUTO The sweep is under the control of the INIT and SWEEP subsystems MANual FREQ MANual SWEep MANual RELative and SWEep MANual POINt control the output RST value is AUTO e SWEep POINts lt num gt MAXimum MINimum e SWEep POINts MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the number of points in a step sweep When points is changed SWEep STEP is modified by the equation STEP SPAN POINTS Span is normally an independent variable but is changed to STEP x POINTS if both of these parameters are changed in the same message RST value is 11 Operating and Programming Reference S 43 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY e SWEep STEP lt num gt freq suffix MAXimum MINimum e SWEep STEP MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the size of each frequency step STEP is governed by the equation STEP SPAN POINTS If you change step size then the number of points will be changed to span step and a Parameter Bumped execution error is reported If span or points are changed then STEP SPAN POINTS The step sweep command creates a coupling with sweeptime also If the number of points is changed through this coupling and DWEL1 AUTO is ON and TIME AUTO is ON then dwell is changed to SWEEPTIME POINTS Span is normally an independent variable but is changed to STEP x POINTS if both of these parameters are changed in the same message RST value is StopMax Start Min 10 e SWEep TIME lt num
288. pecified frequency range If the low or high frequency range limits are exceeded the inactive center or span function is reset Experiment with the rotary knob and the arrow keys as alternate methods of data entry mole p Se 0 m a e A amp ee amp asa eet 6 SWEEP LED CENTER SPAN center Figure 1 5 Center Frequency and Span Operation Center Frequency Span Operation Operation 1 Press CENTER 1 Press SPAN 2 Enter value 2 Enter value 3 Press terminator key 3 Press terminator key Getting Started Basic 1 9 Power Level and Sweep Time Operation Power Level Operation Sweep Time Operation 1 10 Getting Started Basic The swept CW generator can produce leveled power for CW swept frequency or power sweep operation The selected power level can range from 20 dBm 110 dBm for Option 001 swept CW generators to 25 dBm For practice Press POWER LEVEL 2 0 B m The active entry area shows gt POWER LEVEL 20 00 dBm If the selected power level is beyond the range of the swept CW generator the closest possible power is shown in both the data display area and the active entry area If the selected power level exceeds the maximum leveled power the swept CW generator is able to produce the unleveled message UNLVLED appears on the message line Experiment with the rotary knob and the arrow keys as alternate methods of data entry In typical applications
289. peration Power Level and Sweep Time Operation Continuous Single and Manual Sweep Operation Marker Operation Saving and Recalling an Instrument State Power Sweep and Power Slope Operation ALC Circuit Externally Leveled Typical Diode Detector Response at 25 C Leveling with a Power Meter MM wave Source Module Leveling MM wave Source Module Leveling Using a Microwave Amplifier Reverse Power Effects Coupled Operation with 8dBm Output Reverse Power Effects Uncoupled Operation with 8dBm Output Creating a User Flatness Array Automatically Creating a User Flatness Array Creating Arbitrarily Spaced Frequency Correction Pairs in a Swept mm wave Environment Scalar System Configuration Automatically Characterizing and Compensating for a Detector Decision Tree for ALC Bandwidth Selection SCPI Command Types A Simplified Command Tree Proper Use of the Colon and Semicolon Simplified SWEep Command Tree Voltage Controlled Oscillator Test Simplified Program Message Syntax Simplified Subsystem Command Syntax Simplified Common Command Syntax Simplified Response Message Syntax Generalized Status Register Model Typical Status Register Bit Changes Generalized Trigger Model Inside the Idle State vil 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 7 1 9 1 11 1 13 1 15 1 17 1 19 1 23 1 25 1 27 1 28 1 31 1 34 1 37 1 40 1 43 1 47 1 50 1 67 1 68 1 70 1 71 1 77 1 80 1 81 1 82 1 82 1 106 1 108 1 110
290. peration the sweeps will continuously sweep retrace sweep retrace until a different sweep mode is selected To choose this sweep mode press CONT To change from continuous sweep to single sweep operation press SINGLE This causes the swept CW generator to abort the sweep in progress and switch to the single sweep mode This initial keystroke causes the swept CW generator to switch sweep modes but it does not initiate a single sweep A second keystroke press SINGLE initiates a single sweep When the swept CW generator is in single sweep operation the amber LED above the key lights When the swept CW generator is actually performing a sweep in single sweep mode the green SWEEP LED lights The manual sweep mode lets you use the rotary knob to either sweep from the start frequency to the stop frequency or to sweep power Refer to menu map 7 SWEEP Press PRESET Press SWEEP MENU Select Manual Sweep The active entry area displays gt SWEPT MANUAL XXXXXXXXX MHz Use the rotary knob to sweep from the start to the stop frequency The green SWEEP LED is off in manual sweep mode because the sweeps are synthesized SWEEP LED SINGLE LED SINGLE CONT SWEEP MENU singlel Figure 1 7 Continuous Single and Manual Sweep Operation Single Sweep Continuous Sweep Manual Sweep 1 Press SINGLE 1 Press CONT 1 Press SWEEP MENU 2 Press Manual Sweep 3 Use the rotary knob to adjust frequency Getting Start
291. peration flag driving OPC WAI and OPC undergoes a transition once the sweep is reset e CALibration PEAKing AUTO ON OFF 1 0 e CALibration PEAKing AUTO Sets and queries the automatic peaking function If AUTO is ON then a peak is done at regular intervals automatically After RST the setting is OFF e CALibration PEAKing EXECute Peaks the SYTM e CALibration PMETer DETector INITiate IDETector DI0De Initiates the specified calibration These calibrations require the use of an external power measurement Once initiated the swept CW generator sets up for the first point to be measured and responds to the query with the frequency at which the power is to be measured The parameters mean IDETector Initiates a calibration of the internal detector logger breakpoints and offsets DIODe Initiates a calibration of an external detector s logger breakpoints and offsets e CALibration PMETer DETector NEXT lt num gt 1v1 suffix The parameter is the measured power that is currently produced by the swept CW generator You must supply this parameter after measuring the power using an external power meter The query response is issued after the swept CW generator processes the supplied parameter and settles on the next point to be measured The query response is gt 0 The frequency in Hz that is currently produced 0 The calibration is complete lt 0 An error has occurred and the calibration is aborted e CALibrati
292. pment was put into circulation and has been granted the right to check the product type for compliance with these requirements Note If test and measurement equipment is operated with unshielded cables and or used for measurements on open set ups the user must insure that under these operating conditions the radio frequency interference limits are met at the border of his premises Model 8360 L Series Swept CW Generator Hiermit wird bescheinigt dass dieses Gerat System in Ubereinstimmung mit den Bestimmungen von Postverftigung 1046 84 funkentst rt ist Der Deutschen Bundespost wurde das Inverkehrbringen dieses Gerates Systems angezeight und die Berechtigung zur Uberpriifung der Serie auf Einhaltung der Bestimmungen einger umt Zustzinformation fir Mess und Testgerate Werden Mess und Testgerate mit ungeschirmten Kabeln und oder in offenen Messaufbauten verwendet so ist vom Betreiber sicherzustellen dass die Funk Entst rbestimmungen unter Betriebsbedingungen an seiner Grundstiicksgrenze eingehalten werden Declaration of Conformity DECL ARATION OF CONF OR MITY According to ISO IEC Guide 22 and CEN CENELEC EN 45014 Manufacturer s Name Agilent Technologies Inc Manufacturer s Address 1400 Fountaingrove Parkway Santa Rosa CA 95403 1799 USA Declares that the products Product Name Synthesized Sweeper Model Number 83623L 83630L 83640L 83650L Product Options This declaration covers all optio
293. point is reached and continuous sweep is selected the next trigger causes the step sweep to return to the start frequency Connect the trigger signal to the TRIGGER INPUT BNC An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI SWEep TRIGger SOURce EXT Analyzer TS Step Swp Menu Sweep Mode Step Using Step Sweep in Chapter 1 ror Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes FREQUENCY NONE This hardkey activates swept frequency mode and makes the stop frequency parameter the active function The start stop frequency must be separated by at least 2 Hz in order to remain in the frequency sweep mode If start stop frequency then the zero span mode is entered SCPI FREQuency STOP lt num gt freq suffix or MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN FREQuency MODE 5 WEep Analyzer FB lt num gt Hz Kz Mz Gz Operating and Programming Reference S 63 See Also CENTER Cw FREQUENCY menu SPAN START CW Operation and Start Stop Frequency Sweep in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 SWEEP Function Group SWEEP Menu Map 7 Description This hardkey accesses the sweep menu softkeys Manual Sweep Start Sweep Trigger Auto Start Sweep Trigger Bus Start Sweep Trigger Ext Sweep Mode List Sweep Mode Ramp Sweep Mode Step Swplime Auto TrigQut Delay S 64 Operating and Programming Reference Activates manual swe
294. prets commands A special part of the instrument firmware a parser decodes each message sent to the instrument The parser breaks up the message into component commands using a set of rules to determine the command tree path used The parser keeps track of the current path the level in the command tree where it expects to find the next command you send This is important because the same keyword may appear in different paths The particular path you use determines how the keyword is interpreted The following rules are used by the parser m Power On and Reset After power is cycled or after RST the current path is set to the root a Message Terminators A message terminator such as a lt new line gt character sets the current path to the root Many programming languages have output statements that send message terminators automatically The paragraph titled Details of Commands and Responses discusses message terminators in more detail 1 68 Getting Started Programming a Colon When it is between two command mnemonics a colon moves the current path down one level in the command tree For example the colon in MEAS VOLT specifies that VOLT is one level below MEAS When the colon is the first character of a command it specifies that the next command mnemonic is a root level command For example the colon in INIT specifies that INIT is a root level command a Semicolon A semicolon separates two commands in the same
295. pt CW generator system two tone measurement system facilitates accurate device characterizations by providing one timebase reference for both sources This technique reduces instabilities from temperature or line voltage fluctuations or drift The swept CW generators can be operated in either ramp sweep or step sweep modes for both fixed offset and swept offset measurements Figure S 1 shows the connections required for a two tone system S 56 Operating and Programming Reference SWEEP IN SCALAR NETWORK ANALYZER POS Z BLANK Z AXIS BLANK MKRS STOP SWEEP STOP SWEEP 8757 SYSTEM INTERFACE HP IB Step Control Master AUXILIARY INTERFACE AUXILIARY 10MHz 10MHz INTERFACE REF OUTPUT REF INPUT SWEEP OUTPUT oooo oooo0o00 oooo ooo OOOO oooo oooo0o00 oooo ooo O0O00 MASTER SLAVE SYNTHESIZER SYNTHESIZER Figure S 1 Connections Required for a Two Tone Scalar Network Analyzer Measurement System Programming Codes See Also 1 Designate one swept CW generator as the master the other as the slave 2 Make the connections 3 To avoid synchronization problems always set up the slave frequency and power before setting up the master 4 Set up the master frequency power and sweep time 5 Set the sweep time on the slave 6 Configure the swept CW generators for step sweep or ramp sweep
296. r Range Enter the range value set for the power meter as noted in step 1 6 Select Coupling Factor press 0 4B m Unlike detector leveling power meter leveling provides calibrated power out of the leveled RF port Hint To obtain flatness corrected power refer to Creating and Applying the User Flatness Correction Array in the Optimizing Swept CW Generator Performance section Getting Started Advanced 1 27 Leveling with MM wave Millimeter wave source module leveling is similar to power meter Source Modules leveling The following figures illustrate the setups for leveling with a mm wave source module SWEPT CH GENERATOR RF OUT ADAPTER IF REQUIRED MM HAVE SOURCE MODULE LEVELED OUTPUT SOURCE MODULE INTERFACE Figure 1 14 MM wave Source Module Leveling High power model swept CW generators can externally level mm wave source modules to maximum specified power without a microwave amplifier 1 28 Getting Started Advanced SWEPT CH GENERATOR RF OUT ADAPTER IF REQUIRED MICROWAVE AMPLIFIER RF OUT MM WAVE SOURCE MODULE RF_IN LEVELED OUTPUT SOURCE MODULE INTERFACE Figure 1 15 MM wave Source Module Leveling Using a Microwave Amplifier Hint Set up the equipment as shown Refer to menu map 1 Select Leveling Point Module Select Module Menu o e WN Select Module Select Auto or Fr
297. raphs introduce a more complete compact way of documenting subsystems using a tabular format The command table contains more information than just the command hierarchy shown in a graphical tree In particular these tables list command parameters for each command and response data formats for queries To begin this exploration of command tables consider a simplified SWEep subsystem for the swept CW generator in both the graphical and tabular formats SWEep DWELI GENeration MANual AUTO POINt RELative Figure 1 27 Simplified SWEep Command Tree Table 1 2 SWEep Command Table Command Parameters Parameter Type SWEep DWELI AUTO state Boolean ONCE GENeration MANual POINt RELative Reading the Command Table Note the three columns in the command table labeled Command Parameters and Parameter Type Commands closest to the root level are at the top of the table Commands in square brackets are implied commands which are discussed in later paragraphs If a command requires one or more parameters in addition to the keyword the parameter names are listed adjacent to the command Parameters in square brackets are optional parameters which are discussed in later paragraphs If the parameter is not in square brackets it is required and you must send a valid setting for it with Getting Started Programming 1 71 the matching command The parameter type is listed adjacent to each named parameter
298. ration ON A calibration is done whenever the sweep span is changed OFF A calibration is done only when CALibration SPAN EXECute is sent After RST the setting is OFF e CALibration SPAN EXECute Causes a sweep span calibration e CALibration TRACk Causes an automatic tracking calibration procedure e CORRection ARRay i lt num gt DB 1601 1601 e CORRection ARRay i Sets and queries the entire 1601 point array of correction values that can be added to the internal flatness correction array The 1601 points are added to the internal flatness array synchronized on the trigger output lus pulses These TTL level pulses are 1601 evenly spaced points across an analog sweep or at each point in step or list mode Entering this array causes the CORRection SOURce i command to set to ARRay There is one array for the foreground state i 0 and one for the background state i 1 If the i is not specified the default value is i 0 After RST these arrays are cleared e CORRection FLATness lt num gt freq suffix lt num gt DB 2 801 e CORRection FLATness Sets and queries an array of up to 801 frequency correction Operating and Programming Reference S 25 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY pairs This correction information is used to create a correction array that can be added to the internal calibration array The correction entered is at the associated frequency Frequencies in between frequency correction pair values are
299. rator may be operated at pressure altitudes up to 4572 meters approximately 15 000 feet Cooling The swept CW generator obtains all cooling airflow by forced ventilation from the fan mounted on the rear panel Information on cleaning the fan filter is located in Routine Maintenance in Chapter 4 Ensure that all airflow passages at the rear and sides of the swept CW generator are clear before installing the instrument in its operating environment This is especially important in a rack mount configuration Installation 3 9 Chassis Kits Rack Mount Slide Kit Option 806 swept CW generators are supplied with rack mount Option 806 slides and the necessary hardware to install them on the swept CW generator The following table itemizes the parts in this kit Table 3 4 Rack Mount Slide Kit Contents Quantity Description Rack Mount Kit Includes the following parts 2 Rack Mount Flanges 8 Screws Slide Kit Includes the following parts 2 Slide Assemblies 4 Screws Inner Slide Assembly 8 Screws Outer Slide Assembly 8 Nuts Outer Slide Assembly Slide Adapter Kit NON HP includes the following parts 4 Adapter Brackets Adapter Bar 4 8 Screws Bracket to Bar 8 Nuts Bracket to Slide Assembly CAUTION Ventilation Requirements When installing the instrument in a cabinet the convection into and out of the instrument must not be restricted The ambient temperature outside
300. rce is sweeping 180 PRINT Press Continue 190 PAUSE 200 OUTPUT Source RCL 2 210 PRINT Register 2 recalled 220 PRINT Verify source is in CW mode 230 END Run the program Program Comments 10 Assign the source s GPIB address to a variable 20 to 50 Abort any GPIB activity and initialize the GPIB interface 60 Clear the computer s display 70 Set up the source for a sweeping state Note the combination of several commands into a single message This single line is equivalent to the following lines OUTPUT Source RST OUTPUT Source FREQ MODE SWEep OUTPUT Source FREQ STARt 4 GHZ OUTPUT Source FREQ STOP 5 GHZ OUTPUT Source INIT CONT ON 80 Save this state into storage register 1 Getting Started Programming 1 97 90 Clear the computer display 100 Print a message on the computer display 110 Set up the source for a CW state Note the combination of several commands into a single message This single line is equivalent to the following lines OUTPUT Source RST OUTPUT Source FREQ CW 1 23456 GHZ OUTPUT Source POWer LEVel 1 DBM 120 Save this state into storage register 2 130 to 150 Print a message on the computer display and pause 160 Recall the instrument state from register 1 It should contain the sweeping state 170 to 190 Print a message on the computer display and pause 200 Recall the instrument state from register 2 It should contain the CW state 210 and 220
301. rd chosen automatically T 1 external T 1 internal T 2 none chosen T 2 frequency standard functions R 1 frequency start 5 53 frequency start stop markers 1 2 5 54 frequency step stepped sweep activate S 66 frequency stepped mode dwell time 5 59 frequency stepped mode number of points 59 frequency stepped sweep step size S 60 frequency stop S 63 frequency sweep 1 6 manually M 1 markerl to marker2 M 1 frequency sweep functions S 64 frequency sweep once S 51 frequency sweep stop frequency S 63 frequency sweep sweep time S 67 frequency value dwell time E 2 flatness E 2 front panel checks 4 2 front panel connectors C 4 front panel error messages 2a 1 front panel operation L 9 Index 9 Index 10 full selftest 50 full selftest command S 15 fullusr cal F 14 function locked out message 2a 3 fuse part numbers 4 4 fuse replace 4 4 fuse selection 3 3 global dwell list array G 1 global offset list array G 1 GPIB analyzer language P 13 CIIL language P 13 printer address P 11 SCPI programming P 14 technical standard 1 120 trigger frequency list L 8 GPIB address changes to 3 8 factory set 3 7 power meter M 8 swept CW generator A 1 E 1 GPIB address identify 52 GPIB address menu A 1 GPIB check example program 1 90 GPIB connecting cables 1 56 GPIB connector C 6 GPIB connector mnemonics C 8 GPIB control functions H 1 GPIB definition of 1 5
302. re Atten Atten Power Slope 1 3 CD cDo Ca m Tracking Power Fitness Power more Menu Offset Menu Sweep 2 3 CD Cc am Auto we Peak RF Doubler Amp Mode Track Always Once AUTO On Off m co C Ga cD D C am CD CD Gaiss Enter Delete Clear more Freq Corr Menu Point 1 3 Copy Freq Mtr Meas CorPair more List Follow Menu Disable 3 3 Measure Corr Undef Current Undef POWER MENU 5 MENU SELECT USER CAL Selftest Fault Unlock Full Menu Info Fault Fault Fault Clear Info1 Info2 info3 Fault SERVICE MENU 5 SwpTime Start Sweep Trigger more Auto sAuto Bus Ext 2 3 Manual ln Sweep Mode more Sweep Step List Romp 1 3 Step Step Step Dwell more w Step Swp Pt Trig more Step Control Size Points Dwell Coupled 1 3 Auto Bus Ext 2 3 Master Slave m C c Cc C Cc cc CT Cy cD SWEEP MENU Fi SYSTEM HP IB Altrnate Disp UsrKey more UsrMenu Ref Osc Security Software more Preset Mode Save User Dim more Menu Regs Status Cleor 1 3 Clear Menu Menu Rev 2 3 Factory User Preset Display 3 3 co Co m m coD m D aam CE Ca cD Adrs Programming Language 10MHz Freq Standard Zero Save Clear Blonk Menu SCPI Analyzr CIL inten Extrni None Auto Freq Lock Memory Display 8360 Meter Printer Adrs Adrs Adrs Ld wae Cd RENE E
303. refer to the entry in the A section of this manual The factory generated internal calibration data of the swept CW generator is digitally segmented into 1601 data points across the start stop frequency span chosen Subsequently these points are converted into 1601 reference voltages for the ALC system The digital ALC control scheme not only delivers excellent power accuracy and flatness at the output port of the swept CW generator but also provides the means to execute the user flatness correction feature Generally a power meter is required to create a table of correction data that produces flat power at the test port You may measure and enter correction data for up to 801 points The correction data contained in the table is linearly interpolated to produce a 1601 point data array across the start stop frequency span set on the swept CW generator The 1601 point data array is summed with the internal calibration data of the swept CW generator Figure F 3 When user flatness correction is enabled the sum of the two arrays produces the 1601 reference voltages for the ALC system Operating and Programming Reference F 7 Fltness Menu 1601 Equadistant Point Array CorPair Accessible Only Disable From a Computer Complete 1601 Point On O User Flatness Correction Array Array oA Q 1 to 801 Point Frequency Linear FLTNESS ON OFF Correction Pairs Entered From a Computer or Interpolation the
304. requency Span Operation Power Level and Sweep Time Operation Power Level Operation Sweep Time Operation Continuous Single and Manual Sweep Operation Marker Operation Saving and Recalling an Instrument State Power Sweep and Power Slope Operation Power Sweep Operation Power Slope Operation Getting Started Advanced Externally Leveling the Swept CW Generator Leveling with Detectors Couplers Splitters External Leveling Used With the Optional Step Attenuator Leveling with Power Meters Leveling with MM wave Source Modules Working with Mixers Reverse Power Effects Working with Spectrum Analyzers Reverse Power Effects Optimizing Swept CW Generator Performance Creating and Applying the User Flatness Correction Array Creating a User Flatness Array Automatically Example 1 Creating a User Flatness Array Example 2 Swept mm wave Measurement with Arbitrary Correction Frequencies Example 3 Scalar Analysis Measurement with User Flatness Corrections Example 4 Using Detector Calibration 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 8 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 12 1 14 1 16 1 18 1 18 1 19 1 21 1 23 1 23 1 26 1 27 1 28 1 30 1 32 1 33 1 43 1 47 Contents 1 Using the Tracking Feature Peaking Tracking ALC Bandwidth Selection Using Step Sweep Creating and Using a Frequency List Using the Security Features Changing the Preset Parameters Getting Started Programming GPIB Gen
305. ribed completely in the IEEE Std 488 1978 document published by The Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers Inc 345 East 47th Street New York New York 11017 SOURCE MODULE INTERFACE sends and receives digital and analog signals to and from an HP Agilent 83550 Series millimeter wave source module With the source module connected the swept CW generator assumes the characteristics of the source module Refer to Leveling Point Module for more information MOD C1 5V RESERVED MOD ANLG GND ANGL GND MOD D2 MOD CO 8V 15V RESERVED CLAMP CNTL RET SHELL ONG 9990900 J 15 1413 1211 y 09000 J 00000 ZAZLL TANS MOD D3 MOD DO RESERVED EXT LVL RET L MOD RF OFF 0 5V GHz MOD SENSE MOD D1 DIG GND EXT LVL COAX 15V RESERVED Figure C 3 Interface Signals of the Source Module Connector The codes indicated on the illustration above translate as follows MOD D0 Source module data line zero Signals MOD DO through MOD D3 are the mm source module data bus lines bi directional MOD D1 Data line one MOD D2 Data line two MOD D3 Data line three MOD C0 Source module control line zero Signals MOD C0 and MOD C1 are the control lines for the read write to and from the mm source module MOD C1 Control line one CLAMP CNTL Source module clamp control not used MOD SENSE Source module sense A 1 mA current is injected on this line by the mm source module to indicate its presence This signa
306. ries the ALC leveling source selection switch The RST value is INTernal e POWer ALC STATe ON OFF 1 0 e POWer ALC STATe Sets and queries the state switch of the ALC The positions are ON normal ALC operation OFF open loop ALC mode When on the power can be programmed in fundamental units as selected by the UNIT POWer command When off the power is no longer calibrated in absolute units and is set in units of dB of arbitrary modulator setting e POWer AMPLifier STATE ON OFF O 1 e POWer AMPLifier STATE Sets and queries the state of the amplifier contained in the doubler for those models with a doubler installed Programming a specific value for POWer AMPLifier STATE sets POWer AMPLifier STATE AUTO to OFF e POWer AMPLifier STATE AUTO ON OFF O 1 e POWer AMPLifier STATE AUTO Sets and queries the automatic selection of the doubler amplifier S 36 Operating and Programming Reference SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY state Programming a specific value for POWer AMPLifier STATE sets POWer AMPLifier STATE AUTO to OFF RST value is ON e POWer ATTenuation lt num gt DB MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN e POWer ATTenuation MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the output attenuation level Note that when setting the attenuator level to 10 dB the output power is decreased by 10 dB Programming a specified attenuation sets POWer ATTenuation AUTO OFF e POWer ATTenuation AUTO ON OFF 1 0 e POWer ATTenuation AUTO
307. rmware datecode identify S 52 flatness array frequency value E 2 user F 4 flatness corrected power 1 33 flatness correction clear value C 3 copy frequency list C 10 frequency increment A 18 HP Agilent 437B measure at one frequency M 7 M 8 HP Agilent 437B measure functions M 13 HP Agilent HP Agilent 437B measure at all frequencies M 7 number of points A 19 start frequency A 20 stop frequency A 21 flatness correction example program 1 103 flatness menu F 4 flatness on off F 10 FNxfer fail F 3 forgiving listening 1 66 1 83 frequency center C 1 coupled to center C 12 CW C 12 difference marker D 3 display zero Z 1 stepped sweep functions S 60 sweep mode define start S 53 frequency calibration menu F 10 frequency correction pair E 2 frequency follow F 11 frequency increment A 18 frequency list dwell time E 2 dwell time all points G 1 frequency increment A 18 frequency value E 3 number of points A 18 A 19 E 3 offset value all points G 1 power offset E 3 start frequency A 20 step sweep activate S 65 stop frequency A 21 trigger external L 9 trigger functions P 14 trigger interface bus L 8 trigger point automatic L 8 frequency list copy C 10 frequency list functions L 5 frequency list number of points L 6 frequency markers 1 14 frequency menu F 11 frequency multiplier F 12 frequency offset F 13 frequency softkeys F 11 frequency span 5 52 frequency standa
308. rol CF and the up down arrow keys control AF Optimizing Swept CW Generator Performance in Chapter 1 F 12 Operating and Programming Reference Freq Mult Freq Mult Function Group FREQUENCY Menu Map 2 Description This softkey lets you set a frequency multiplier value and applies it to all frequency parameters Any integer value between and including 36 is accepted Changing the multiplier value changes the display it does not affect the output of the swept CW generator For example 1 Set the start frequency to 4 GHz 2 Set the stop frequency to 10 GHz 3 Set the frequency multiplier to 5 Note that the display indicates start 20 GHz stop 50 GHz and asterisks appear next to the frequency data 4 Now set the stop frequency to 30 GHz The swept CW generator frequency is 6 GHz or 30 GHz 5 Frequency multiplier and offset are related as shown by the following equation Entered value or Displayed Frequency Frequency Generated x Multiplier Offset value The factory preset value is 1 An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active Programming Codes SCPI FREQuency MULTiplier lt num gt MAXimum Minimum FREQuency MULTiplier STATe ON OFF 1 0 lt num gt will be rounded to the nearest integer Analyzer SHFA lt n gt See Also FREQUENCY wenu Freq Offset Operating and Programming Reference F 13 Freq Uffset Function Group Menu Map Description Programm
309. roup Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY This softkey is used to set a dwell time value for all points in the frequency list array SCPI NONE see List Menu Analyzer NONE Enter List Dwell List Menu Optimizing Swept CW Generator Performance in Chapter 1 Global Offset Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY This softkey is used to set an offset value for all points in the frequency list array SCPI NONE see List Menu Analyzer NONE Enter List Offset List Menu Optimizing Swept CW Generator Performance in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference G 1 H GPIB Address To set the swept CW generator s GPIB address refer to Address in this manual HP IB Menu Function Group Menu Map Description See Also SYSTEM This softkey reveals the softkeys in the GPIB control menu Adrs Menu Programming Language Analyzr Programming Language CIIL Programming Language SCPI Reveals the softkeys that allow GPIB addresses to be changed Sets analyzer as the external interface language Sets CIIL as the external interface language Sets SCPI as the external interface language Three different programming languages are available a SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments is the instrument control programming language developed by Agilent to conform to the IEEE 488 2 st
310. rrection frequency without exiting the correction table To further simplify the data entry process the swept CW generator allows you to enter correction data into the user flatness correction table by adjusting the front panel knob until the desired power level is displayed on the power meter The user flatness correction algorithm automatically calculates the appropriate correction and enters it into the table If you already have a table of correction data prepared it can be entered directly into the correction table using the front panel keypad of the swept CW generator With the list mode feature you may enter the test frequencies into a table in any order and specify an offset power and or a dwell time for each frequency When list mode is enabled the swept CW generator steps through the list of frequencies in the order entered The user flatness correction feature has the capability of copying and entering the frequency list into the correction table Since the offset in the list mode table is not active during the user flatness correction data entry process the value of the correction data is determined as if no offset is entered When user flatness correction and list mode with offsets are enabled the swept CW generator adjusts the output power by an amount equivalent to the sum of the correction data and offset for each test frequency You must make sure that the resulting power level is still within the ALC range of the swep
311. rround the instrument with at least 3 to 4 inches of packing material or enough to prevent the instrument from moving in the carton If packing foam is not available the best alternative is SD 240 Air Cap from Sealed Air Corporation Hayward CA 94545 Air Cap looks like a plastic sheet covered with 1 1 4 inch air filled bubbles Use the pink Air Cap to reduce static electricity Wrap the instrument several times in the material to both protect the instrument and prevent it from moving in the carton 4 Seal the shipping container securely with strong nylon adhesive tape 5 Mark the shipping container FRAGILE HANDLE WITH CARE to ensure careful handling 6 Retain copies of all shipping papers In any correspondence refer to the swept CW generator by model number and full serial number Converting HP Agilent 8340 41 Systems to 8360 L Series Systems The following paragraphs are intended to assist you in converting existing HP Agilent 8340 8341 based systems to 8360 L Series swept CW generator based systems The 8360 L series swept CW generator may be used where no modulation requirements are needed Both manual and remote operational differences are addressed Manual operation topics are a functional compatibility m front panel operation m conditions upon instrument preset m connections to other instruments Remote operation topics are a language compatibility m status structure m programming language
312. rs in more detail Getting Started Programming 1 65 Essentials for Beginners Program and Response Messages This subsection discusses elementary concepts critical to first time users of SCPI Read and understand this subsection before going on to another This subsection includes the following topics Program and Response These paragraphs introduce the Messages basic types of messages sent between instruments and controllers Subsystem Command Trees These paragraphs describe the tree structure used in subsystem commands Subsystem Command Tables These paragraphs present the condensed tabular format used for documenting subsystem commands Reading Instrument Errors These paragraphs explain how to read and print an instrument s internal error messages Example Programs These paragraphs contain two simple measurement programs that illustrate basic SCPI programming principles To understand how your instrument and controller communicate using SCPI you must understand the concepts of program and response messages Program messages are the formatted data sent from the controller to the instrument Conversely response messages are the formatted data sent from the instrument to the controller Program messages contain one or more commands and response messages contain one or more responses The controller may send commands at any time but the instrument sends responses only when specifically instructed to do so The sp
313. ry of correction values The swept CW generator generates the corresponding CW frequency at the set power level as you scroll the correction cells of the flatness array An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI NONE see Fltness Menu Analyzer NONE Fltness Menu Optimizing Swept CW Generator Performance in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference F 11 FREQUENCY menu Function Group FREQUENCY Menu Map 2 Description This hardkey allows access to the frequency functions listed below CW CF Coupled Freq Mult Freq Offset List Menu Step Swp Menu Up Down Size CW Up Down Size Swept Zoom See Also Softkeys listed above When this feature is on the center frequency and the CW frequency is kept equal Changing either the center frequency or the CW frequency causes the other to change to the same value An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active Sets the frequency multiplier value and applies it to all frequency parameters Sets the frequency offset value and applies it to all frequency parameters Displays the frequency list create edit softkeys Reveals the stepped frequency sweep edit softkeys Sets the frequency step size in the CW frequency mode Sets the frequency step size in the swept frequency mode Places the swept CW generator in the CF AF sweep mode where the rotary knob and numeric entry keys cont
314. s Installation 3 19 3 20 Manual Operation Installation Compatibility The 8360 L Series swept CW generators are designed to be in all but very few cases a complete feature superset of the HP Agilent 8340 8341 synthesized sweepers The most notable omissions are that the 8360 L Series does not accept m line triggers ie 50 or 60 Hz line frequency m an external leveling input from positive diode detectors Front Panel Operation The 8360 L Series uses a softkey menu driven approach toward accessing instrument functions versus a front panel key or shift key sequence as with the HP Agilent 8340 8341 Instrument Preset Conditions The factory defined preset conditions for the 8360 L Series are identical to those for the HP Agilent 8340 8341 The 8360 L Series also allows you to define a different set of preset conditions Refer to Changing the Preset Parameters in Chapter 1 for examples and more information Table 3 7 illustrates the factory instrument preset conditions for the 8360 L Series and the HP Agilent 8340 8341 An instrument preset turns off all the functions and then sets the following Table 3 7 Instrument Preset Conditions for the 8360 8340 8341 Function Condition Sweep Mode Full Span Sweep Continuous Auto Trigger Free Run Markers All Off Modulation Off Frequency Step Size 10 of span Status Bytes Cleared Leveling Internal RF Output On Power
315. s 8360 B Series Swept Signal Generator 8360 L Series Swept CW Generator Troubleshooting Guide Cycling power with the POWER switch does not have the same effect as presetting the swept CW generator Cycling power causes the swept CW generator to display the programming language the GPIB address and the firmware revision date After the swept CW generator displays this data it restores its configuration to the state before power was turned off SCPI SYSTem PRESet EXECute Analyzer IP Preset Mode Factory Preset Mode User Changing the Preset Parameters in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference P 9 Preset Mode Factory Function Group SYSTEM Menu Map 8 Description This softkey sets the standard starting configuration of the swept CW generator when the PRESET key is pressed as set by the manufacturer An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active The following is a description of the configuration Start sweep at the minimum specified frequency Stop sweep at the maximum specified frequency Power level set at 0 dBm Sweep time set to auto CONT sweep Sweep mode ramp ALC leveling point internal ALC leveling mode normal Markers set to activate at the center frequency of the sweep All function values stored in memory registers 1 through 9 remain in their previous states The checksum of the calibration data is ca
316. s menu The maximum number of correction points has been reached or the addition of the points requested will exceed the maximum The maximum number of points available is 801 TOO MANY LIST POINTS REQUESTED This error occurs in association with the frequency list menu The maximum number of list points has been reached or the addition of the points requested will exceed the maximum The maximum number of points available is 801 TRACE EXCEPTION This can only be caused by an internal processor error Refer to Chapter 4 for instructions on contacting a qualified service technician TRAPO EXCEPTION This can only be caused by an internal processor error Refer to Chapter 4 for instructions on contacting a qualified service technician TRAP3 EXCEPTION This can only be caused by an internal processor error Refer to Chapter 4 for instructions on contacting a qualified service technician Too many test patches This error will only occur if the service adjustment menu is accessed Specifically the maximum number of test patches has been reached and can accept no more WAIT SAVING CALIBRATION This error will only occur if the service adjustment menu is accessed Specifically a save calibration has been initiated and not yet completed when another request is made WRONG PASSWORD This error occurs when the service adjustment menu password is entered incorrectly or the wrong password has been used Qualified service technicians ref
317. s sweep time for a system controlled by an analyzer SweepTimemaster X 1 03 SweepTimestaye Setting the slave s sweep time 1 03 times greater the master s sweep time results in the slave sweep being 97 of the set value When a reduced sweep is not acceptable sweep times can be set to the same value Lock ups can be cleared by reentering the slave s sweep time For fixed offset ramp sweep measurements the same sweep time must S 58 Operating and Programming Reference Programming Codes See Also Step Dwell be set on both the master and the slave Since the master s sweep time is typically determined by the measurement configuration set the slave to match the master For more accurate ramp sweeps select Swp Span Cal Always on both the master and slave swept CW generators When this feature is active it calibrates the frequency at the end of every frequency band SCPI SWEep CONTrol STATe ON OFF 1 0 SWEep CONTrol TYPE SLAVe Analyzer NONE Step Control Master Step Swp Menu step Dwell Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY This softkey lets you set dwell times for points in the stepped frequency mode of sweep operation The dwell time for points in step frequency sweep may range from 100 ys to 3 2s The actual time between points is the sum of dwell and phase lock times Select Step Dwell then use the entry area to enter the desired value SCPI S
318. scussed 1 111 IM Mediate initiateimm usage discussed 1 111 initiate trigger state details of operation 1 111 INIT trigger configuration example commands using 1 115 instruments defined 1 63 instrument state A 12 instrument state recall R 1 instrument state recall command S 13 instrument state restore string S 12 instrument state save S 1 instrument state save command S 14 integer response data discussed in detail 1 86 integers rounding 1 84 interface address change 3 8 factory set 3 7 power meter M 8 printer P 11 view 3 8 interface bus trigger frequency list L 8 interface bus connector C 6 Index 11 Index 12 interface bus softkeys H 1 interface bus trigger stepped sweep S 62 interface bus trigger sweep mode S 55 interface language analyzer P 13 CIIL P 13 SCPI P 14 interface language selection 3 6 internal frequency standard T 2 internal leveling A 5 internal leveling point L 3 internal selftest S 50 internal timebase warmup time 3 8 invalid language message 2a 3 invalid save recall register message 2a 3 key arrow 1 5 backspace 1 5 negative sign 1 5 numeric entry 1 5 terminator 1 5 keys entry area E 4 knob R 2 language compatibility 3 23 language compatibility analyzer to SCPI conversion 3 23 language identify S 52 language selection 3 6 left arrow A 16 LEVel trigger command discussed 1 112 leveling flatness correction F 10 theory of A 4 9 leve
319. sented in previous subsections apply to programming real measurements To introduce you to programming with SCPI we must list the commands for the swept CW generator We will begin with a simplified example The example programs are interactive They require active participation by the operator If you desire to get an understanding of the principles without following all of the instructions read the Program Comments paragraphs to follow the programmed activity The GPIB select code is assumed to be preset to 7 All example programs in this section expect the swept CW generator s GPIB address to be decimal 19 To find the present GPIB address use the front panel Press SYSTEM MENU Select GPIB Menu Adrs Menu My Adrs The active entry area indicates the present decimal address If the number displayed is not 19 reset it to 19 Press 1 9 ENTER If the swept CW generator does not respond to a front panel address change set the GPIB address switch rear panel to 31 all ones enabling front panel changes to both address and interface language Now check that the interface language is set to SCPI Press PRIOR An asterisk denotes the selected interface language If an asterisk is not next to the SCPI key label select Power Up Language SCPI Getting Started Programming 1 87 Use of the Command Tables In Table 1 4 notice that a new column titled Allowed Values has been added to the command table Th
320. ses For this example refer to the Menu Map section Press Power Slope the active entry area displays gt RF SLOPE X XX dB GHz where X is a numeric value Power slope is now active notice that an asterisk is next to the key label Use the entry keys rotary knob or arrow keys to enter a value for the linear slope Press Power Slope again to turn this feature off SWEPT CW GENERATOR POWER METER ao oa oo ofa 20 o aq o0 oooa a ooog oooo oooo0o0o oo00 RF OUTPUT ADAPTER POWER SENSOR Figure 1 10 Power Sweep and Power Slope Operation Power Sweep Power Slope 1 Press POWER MENU 2 Select Power Sweep 3 Enter a value 4 Press terminator key 1 Press POWER MENU 2 Select Power Slope 3 Enter a value 4 Press terminator key Getting Started Basic 1 19 Getting Started Advanced Advanced This section of Chapter 1 describes the use of many of the unique features of the 8360 L Series Swept CW Generators The format used is similar to the one used on the previous pages When referred to a menu map number go to the Menu Map tab and unfold the menu map so that you can view it together with the text Some menus have more than one page of softkeys Select the more m n softkey to view the next page of softkeys more m n is not included in the keystrokes given in these procedures Tab
321. signals Frequency Modes CW and Manual Sweep 2c 2 Specifications Agilent 83623L Agilent 83630L Agilent 83640L Agilent 83650L 10 MHz to 20 GHz High Power 10 MHz to 26 5 GHz 10 MHz to 40 GHz 10 MHz to 50 GHz Standard 1 kHz Option 008 1 Hz Band Frequency Range AO oF WwW NR 10 MHz to lt 2 GHz 2 GHz to lt 7 GHz 7 GHz to lt 13 5 GHz 13 5 GHz to lt 20 GHz 20 GHz to lt 26 5 GHz 26 5 GHz to lt 33 5 GHz 33 5 GHz to lt 38 GHz 38 GHz to 50 GHz WOanrnbwmwmrere 1 This band is 20 GHz to lt 25 5 GHz on the 83640L 2 This band is 25 5 GHz to lt 32 GHz on the 83640L 3 This band is 32 GHz to lt 40 GHz on the 83640L Accuracy Same as time base Switching Time For Steps Within a Frequency Band 15 ms step size 1 GHz x 5 ms Maximum or Across Band Switch Points 50 ms Step or List Modes within a frequency band 5 ms step size 1 GHz x 5 ms 1 Frequencies lt 2 GHz switching time 6 ms step size 1 GHz x 5 ms Synthesized Step Sweep Synthesized List Mode Ramp Sweep Mode Internal 10 MHz Time Base Accuracy Same as time base Minimum Step Size Same as frequency resolution Number of Points 2 to 801 Switching Time Same as CW Dwell Time 100 jus to 3 2 s Accuracy Same as time base Minimum Step Size Same as frequency resolution Number of Points 1 to 801 Switching Time Same as CW Dwell Time 100 pus to 3 2 s Accuracy sweep time gt 100 ms
322. swept CW generator operates As the filter collects dust the fan speed increases to maintain airflow as the fan speed increases so does the fan noise If the filter continues to collect dust after the fan reaches maximum speed airflow is reduced and the swept CW generator s internal temperature increases If the internal temperature reaches 90 C the swept CW generator will automatically turn off and the amber STANDBY LED will turn on Clean the fan filter as follows 1 Turn off the swept CW generator 2 Remove the ac line cord The detachable power cord is the instrument disconnecting device It disconnects the mains circuits from the mains supply before other parts of the instrument The front panel switch is only a standby switch and is not a LINE switch 3 Remove the screws holding the fan cage See Figure 4 2 4 Remove the fan cage from the rear panel 5 Rinse the fan cage filter and the filter retainer in warm water then dry 6 Reverse the removal procedure to reassemble the swept CW generator FAN RETAINER FAI FILTER FAN D CAGE a p FAN CAGE SCREWS Figure 4 2 Removing the Fan Filter Operator s Check Routine Maintenance 4 5 How to Clean the Cabinet WARNING To prevent electrical shock disconnect the 8360 L series swept CW generator from the mains before cleaning Use a dry cloth or one slightly dampened with water to clean the e
323. t time suffix MAXimum MINimum e SWEep DWEL1 MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the amount of time in seconds that the instrument stays dwell at each step after reporting a source settled SRQ and pulsing the Trigger Out line low This one value is used at each step when in the SWE TRIG SOUR IMM mode of a stepped sweep Setting SWEep DWELL sets SWEep DWEL1 AUTO OFF RST value is 100 ps e SWEep DWEL1 AUTO ON OFF 1 0 e SWEep DWEL1 AUTO Sets and queries the state of the automatic dwell calculation switch Setting SWEep DWELL sets SWEep DWEL1 AUTO OFF RST state is OFF Combining the Sweep Mode With the Sweep Generation Command to Obtain the Desired Sweep Condition Description of sFREQ POW SWE LIST SWE Sweep Condition MODE MODE MODE MODE GEN CW Non swept CW FIX ignored ignored ignored Analog freq sweep SWE FIX AUTO ignored ANAL Manual analog freq sweep SWE FIX MAN ignored ANAL Stepped freq sweep SWE FIX AUTO ignored STEP Manual step freq sweep SWE FIX MAN ignored STEP CW with analog power CW SWE AUTO ignored ANAL sweep CW with manual analog CW SWE MAN ignored ANAL power sweep CW with stepped power CW SWE AUTO ignored STEP sweep CW with manual stepped CW SWE MAN ignored STEP power sweep Analog frequency and SWE SWE AUTO ignored ANAL power sweep Manual analog frequency SWE SWE MAN ignored ANAL and power sweep Stepped frequency and SWE SWE AUTO ignored STEP power sweep Manual stepped frequency
324. t CW generator SWEPT CW GENERATOR T i SOURCE EXT ALC l I 0 MODULE 1 INTERFACE 14 INPUT POWER METER l PORT ATTN l CABLES AND OTHER CO __ Jj DEVICES ne l FLATNESS 1 CORRECTED OUTPUT PORT POWER SENSOR L A DEVICE UNDER TEST Figure 1 19 Creating a User Flatness Array For this example refer to menu map 5 POWER 1 The equipment setup shown in Figure 1 19 assumes that if your setup has an external leveling configuration the steps necessary to correctly level have been followed If you have questions about external leveling refer to Externally Leveling the Swept CW Generator Set up Power Meter 2 Zero and calibrate the power meter sensor 3 Connect the power sensor to the point where flatness corrected power is desired Set up Swept CW Generator Parameters 4 On the swept CW generator press PRESET 5 POWER LEVEL 6 dB m This sets the test port power to 5 dBm Po max Ppath loss Create A Frequency List 6 On the swept CW generator press FREQUENCY MENU T Select List Menu Enter List Freq 5 GHz This enters 5 GHz as the first frequency in the list array Entering a frequency automatically sets the offset to 0 dB and the dwell to 10 ms 8 Enter 18 13 11 and 20 GHz to complete this example array Getting Started Advanced 1 37 1 38 Getting Started Advanced 10 11 12
325. t data logging or looping and returns one of the following error codes Error Code Definition 0 Test passed 1 Test failed 2 Test not run yet This is an unlikely event 3 Test aborted 4 Can not execute the test 5 Can not execute the test test skipped 1 Unrecognized result software defect e WAI This causes the swept CW generator to wait for the pending commands to be completed before executing any other commands For example sending the command TSW WAI allows for synchronous sweep operation It causes the swept CW generator to start a sweep and wait until the sweep is completed before executing the next command Operating and Programming Reference S 15 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY Table S 1 8360 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY Command Parameters Parameter Type Allowed Values ABORt CALibration PEA King AUTO auto RF peak Boolean ON OFF 1 0 EXECute PMETer DETector INITiate type of discrete IDETector DIODe det cal NEXT power correction extended numeric lt num gt lvl suffix value FLATness INITiate flatness array discrete USER DIODE PMETer MMHead to cal NEXT measured power extended numeric lt num gt lvl suffix SPAN AUTO auto calibrate Boolean ON OFF 1 0 state EXECute TRACK CORRection ARRay 0 1 1601 pts of extended numeric lt num gt DB 1601 1601 correction FLATness 801 freq extended numeric lt num gt freq suffix correction pairs DB 2 801 PO
326. t panel methods of creating a flatness correction array The first and quickest method is to use an HP Agilent 437B power meter Refer to Figure 1 18 for the setup The second method is just as accurate but requires a little more interaction between the operator and the instruments Figure 1 19 shows the setup for the second method Getting Started Advanced 1 33 Creating a User Flatness Array Automatically Example 1 In this example a flatness array containing correction frequencies from 4 to 10 GHz at 1 GHz intervals is created An HP Agilent 437B power meter controlled by the swept CW generator through the interface bus is used to enter the correction data into the flatness array For this example refer to menu map 5 POWER 1 The equipment setup shown in Figure 1 18 assumes that if the setup has an external leveling configuration the steps necessary to correctly level have been followed If you have questions about external leveling refer to Externally Leveling the Swept CW Generator Set up Power Meter 2 Zero and calibrate the power meter sensor 3 Enter the appropriate power sensor calibration factors into the power meter 4 Enable the power meter sensor cal factor array For operating information on the HP Agilent 437B power refer to its operating and service manual 5 Connect the power sensor to the point where corrected power is desired SWEPT CW GENERATOR source MODULE INTERFAC
327. t some frequencies this level is beyond the range of the ALC modulator alone If so the LOW UNLVLED warning message is displayed Inserting 40 dB of attenuation results in an ALC level of 0 dBm which is well within the range of the ALC At 20 GHz 30 dB attenuation is a better choice as it results in an ALC level of 10 dBm This gives a margin for AM or other functions that vary the power level For optimum display accuracy and minimum noise the ALC level should be greater than 10 dBm This is achieved by using attenuation equal to the tens digit of output power Example desired output power 43 dBm use gt ATTEN 40 dB ALC 3 dBm 1 Press POWER MENU 2 Select Set Atten 4 0 4B m To obtain flatness corrected power refer to Creating and Applying the User Flatness Correction Array in the Optimizing Swept CW Generator Performance section Leveling with Power Leveling with a power meter is similar to leveling with a diode Meters detector Figure 1 13 shows the setup for power meter leveling SWEPT CW GENERATOR ool SS LEVELED OUTPUT RF OUTPUT POWER SPLITTER OR DIRECTIONAL COUPLER POWER SENSOR Figure 1 13 Leveling with a Power Meter 1 Set up the equipment as shown Be sure to set the power meter to manual range mode and note the range Refer to menu map 1 Press ALC Select Leveling Point PwrMtr oOo e oN Select Pwr Mt
328. t which the swept CW generator expects to see a printer See Table 3 3 for factory set addresses bj see a power meter Table 3 3 Factory Set GPIB Addresses N N a 2T Slo v bis Sla 4 o od aa a Oo pan 2 fas pan vo F 5 El O j E l 5 A O 2 pa S E z gm n a amp Installation 3 7 3 8 Note Remember Mating Connectors 10 MHz Frequency Reference Selection and Warmup Time Installation How to View or Change an GPIB Address from the Front Panel To set an GPIB address from the front panel the instrument address on the rear panel GPIB switch Figure 3 2 must be set to 31 all 1s 1 Press SYSTEM MENU 2 Select GPIB Menu Adrs Menu 3 The swept CW generator displays the three address softkeys 8360 Adrs Meter Adrs and Printer Adrs 4 Select the desired softkey 5 The swept CW generator displays the address selected for that instrument 6 If you want to change the address use the keypad to enter the desired address 0 to 30 then press ENTER If the swept CW generator displays Rear panel GPIB address must be 31 11111 in order to change current address XX the address on the rear panel GPIB switch Figure 3 2 is set to something other than 31 all 1s How to Prevent a Front Panel Change to an GPIB Address To disable the address softkeys set the instrument address on the rear panel GPIB switch Figure 3 2 to any a
329. tal command statements are as follows Abort Abort abruptly terminates all listener talker activity on the interface bus and prepares all instruments to receive a new command from the controller Typically this is an initialization command used to place the bus in a known starting condition The syntax is interface ABORT select code where the interface select code is the computer s GPIB I O port which is typically port 7 Some BASIC examples 10 ABORT 7 100 IF gt 20 THEN ABORT 7 Related statements used by some computers ABORTIO used by HP 80 series computers HALT RESET Getting Started Programming 1 57 Remote Remote causes an instrument to change from local control to remote control In remote control the front panel keys are disabled except for the key and the POWER switch and the amber REMOTE annunciator is lighted The syntax is REMOTE device selector where the device selector is the address of the instrument appended to the GPIB port number Typically the GPIB port number is 7 and the default address for the swept CW generator is 19 so the device selector is 719 Some BASIC examples 10 REMOTE 7 which prepares all GPIB instruments for remote operation although nothing appears to happen to the instruments until they are addressed to talk or 10 REMOTE 719 which affects the GPIB instrument located at address 19 or 10 REMOTE 719 721 726 715 which effects four instruments th
330. tem command tree 1 71 sweep complete wait command S 15 sweep example program 1 93 sweep functions S 64 sweep LED 1 6 1 12 sweep mode stepped functions S 60 sweep mode ramp S 65 sweep modes 1 12 sweep mode step S 66 sweep mode stepped frequency list 5 65 sweep once S 51 sweep output connector C 4 sweep span calibrate always S 66 sweep span calibrate once S 67 sweep span calibration F 10 sweep time 1 10 sweep time coupled to stepped sweep D 8 sweep time key S 67 Index 21 Index 22 sweep time set automatically S 68 swept CW generator as controller 3 7 swept CW generator no front panel change address 3 8 swept CW generator remote address A 1 E 1 swept CW generator reset command S 13 swept CW generator status D 5 swept offset measurement 5 58 swept operation center frequency C 1 swept power 1 18 switch line L 5 synchronization command S 12 synchronization example program 1 99 synchronous sweep example program 1 101 synchronous sweep operation interface bus 15 syntax diagrams commands 1 81 message terminators 1 80 program message 1 80 response message 1 82 syntax drawings 1 57 system controller on bus message 2a 4 system interface connector C 6 system language SCPI P 14 system menu keys 69 tab proper use of 1 69 talker definition of 1 56 temperature operating 3 9 terminators program message 1 64 1 81 program message use in examples 1 64 response message
331. tered Reveals the softkeys in the power meter measure correction menu Operating and Programming Reference F 5 Fltness Menu DEVICE UNDER TEST The softkeys in this menu help front panel users enter and edit flatness correction parameters These editing softkeys are not accessible over GPIB To load correction arrays over GPIB the correction arrays must be created in the controlling program and then downloaded to the swept CW generator The corresponding SCPI array creation and control commands are given after the description of this feature The 8360 L Series Swept CW Generator provide extremely flat power to a test port for testing power sensitive devices such as amplifiers mixers diodes or detectors The user flatness correction feature of the swept CW generator compensates for attenuation and power variations created by components between the source and the test device User flatness correction allows the digital correction of up to 801 frequency points 1601 points via GPIB in any frequency or sweep mode i e start stop CW power sweep etc Using a power meter to calibrate the measurement system as shown in Figure F 1 a table of power level corrections is created for the frequencies where power level variations or losses occur see Figure F 2 These frequencies may be sequential linear steps or arbitrarily spaced To allow for the correction of multiple test setups or frequency ranges you may save as many as
332. terns as data not commands and relies on the GPIB EOI end or identify line for correct end of data termination Related statements used by some computers CONVERT IMAGE IOBUFFER ON TIMEOUT SET TIMEOUT TRANSFER This completes the GPIB Command Statements subsection The following material explains the SCPI programming codes and shows how they are used with the OUTPUT and ENTER GPIB command statements 1 62 Getting Started Programming Getting Started with SCPI This section of Chapter 1 describes the use of the Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments language SCPI This section explains how to use SCPI commands in general The instrument command summary at the end of this chapter lists the specific commands available in your instrument This section presents only the basics of SCPI If you want to explore the topic in greater depth see the paragraph titled Related Documents Definitions of Terms This section defines most terms when they are first used you need a general understanding of the terms listed below before you continue controller instrument program message response message command query A controller is any computer used to communicate with a SCPI instrument A controller can be a personal computer a minicomputer or a plug in card in a card cage Some intelligent instruments can also function as controllers An instrument is any device that implements SCPI
333. the output statement appropriate to your application programming language If you encounter problems study the details of how the output statement handles message terminators such as lt new line gt If you are using simple OUTPUT statements in HP BASIC this is taken care of for you In HP BASIC you type OUTPUT Source FREQuency CW Command examples do not show message terminators because they are used at the end of every program message Details of 1 64 Getting Started Programming Commands and Responses discusses message terminators in more detail Response Examples Response examples look like this 1 23 These are the characters you would read from an instrument after sending a query command To actually pull them from the instrument into the controller use the input statement appropriate to your application programming language If you have problems study the details of how the input statement operates In particular investigate how the input statement handles punctuation characters such as comma and semicolon and how it handles lt new line gt and EOL To enter the previous response in HP BASIC you type ENTER Source CW_frequency Response examples do not show response message terminators because they are always lt new line gt lt END gt These terminators are typically automatically handled by the input statement The paragraph titled Details of Commands and Responses discusses message terminato
334. the cabinet must be less than the maximum operating temperature of the instrument by 4 C for every 100 watts dissipated in the cabinet If the total power dissipated in the cabinet is greater than 800 watts then forced convection must be used 3 10 Installation Installation Procedure 1 Refer to Figure 3 3 Remove handle trim strips 2 Remove four screws per side 3 Using the screws provided attach the rack mount flanges to the outside of the handles 4 Remove the side straps and end caps 5 Remove the bottom and back feet and the tilt stands Figure 3 3 Removing the Side Straps and Feet Installation 3 11 6 Refer to Figure 3 4 Remove the inner slide assemblies from the outer slide assemblies 7 To secure the side covers in place mount the inner slide assemblies to the instrument with the screws provided 8 With the appropriate hardware install the outer slide assemblies to the system enclosure 9 Lift the swept CW generator into position Align the inner and outer slide assemblies and slide the instrument into the rack Realign the hardware as needed for smooth operation MOUNTING HARDWARE N Ny FOR Agilent SYSTEMS ENCLOSURES Ma N N S _ MOUNTING HARDWARE FOR NON Agilent SYSTEMS ENCLOSURES slide Figure 3 4 Chassis Slide Kit 3 12 Installation Rack Flange Kit for Swept CW Generators with Handles Removed Option 908 CAUTION Option 908 swept CW generators are supplied with ra
335. the input power versus output voltage characteristics for typical HP diode detectors From the chart the leveled power at the diode detector input resulting from any external level voltage setting may be determined The range of power adjustment is approximately 30 dBm to 18 dBm Automatically characterize and compensate for the detector used by performing a detector calibration Refer to Using Detector Calibration in the Optimizing Swept CW Generator Performance section DETECTOR OUTPUT VOLTAGE 10 V 20 dBV 10 dBV 5 lt 6 dBV 1 0V 0 dBV LINEAR ASYMPTOTE 10 dBV 100 mV SQUARE LAW ASYMPTOTE eet 208V 30 dBV 10 mV 40 dBV 50 dBV 1 mV 60 dBV 66 dBV 70 dBV Amv 80 dBV 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 DETECTOR INPUT POWER dBm Figure 1 12 Typical Diode Detector Response at 25 C Getting Started Advanced 1 25 Hint 1 26 Getting Started Advanced External Leveling Used With the Optional Step Attenuator Some external leveling applications require low output power from the swept CW generator The swept CW generator automatically uncouples the attenuator from the ALC system for all external leveling points Press POWER LEVEL Note the display It shows gt ATTEN O dB POWER LEVEL 0 00 dBm For example leveling the output of a 30 dB gain amplifier to a level of 10 dBm requires the output of the swept CW generator to be around 40 dBm when leveled A
336. the instrument control programming language adopted by Agilent Technologies SCPI provides commands that are common from one Agilent Technologies product to another eliminating device specific commands This softkey lets you select SCPI as the swept CW generator s external interface language This is the default language set at the factory Any commands issued within 100 ms of a change in language may be ignored or lost An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI SYSTem LANGuage SCPI Analyzer SYST or SCPI Adrs Menu SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY SCPI STATUS REGISTER STRUCTURE Getting Started Programming in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 P 14 Operating and Programming Reference Pulse On OffScalar Pt Trig Menu Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY This softkey accesses the list mode point trigger softkeys Automatically steps the swept CW generator to the next point in the frequency list List Mode Pt Trig Auto Steps the swept CW generator to the next point in the frequency list when an GPIB trigger is received List Mode Pt Trig Bus Steps the swept CW generator to the next point in the frequency list when an external hardware trigger is received List Mode Pt Trig Ext SCPI NONE Analyzer NONE Softkeys listed above List Menu Pulse On Off Scalar Function Group Menu Map
337. the program was entered incorrectly If the controller accepts the REMOTE statement but the swept CW generator REMOTE LED does not turn on perform the operational checks as outlined in the respective Operating and Service Manuals to find the defective device Program Comments 10 Set up a variable to contain the GPIB address of the source 20 Abort any bus activity and return the GPIB interfaces to their reset states 30 Place the source into LOCAL to cancel any Local Lockouts that may have been set up 40 Reset the source s parser and clear any pending output from the source Prepare the source to receive new commands 50 Place the source into REMOTE 60 Clear the display of the computer 70 Print a message to the computer s display 1 90 Getting Started Programming Local Lockout Demonstration Example Program 2 When the swept CW generator is in REMOTE mode all the front panel keys are disabled except the LOCAL key But when the LOCAL LOCKOUT command is set on the bus even the LOCAL key is disabled The LOCAL command executed from the controller is then the only way to return all or selected instruments to front panel control Continue example program 1 Delete line 90 END and type in the following commands 90 PRINT Verify that all keys are ignored except the LOCAL key 100 PRINT Verify that LOCAL causes the REMOTE LED to go OFF 110 PRINT press CONTINUE 120 PAUSE 130 R
338. the sweep time can vary tremendously from milliseconds in a network analyzer system to more than a minute in thermistor based power meter systems Press GTR Gz Press STOP Gra Press SWEEP TIME O0 Watch the green SWEEP LED it blinks every 2 5 seconds The LED blinks at each retrace For the fastest sweep speed for which all specifications are guaranteed the swept CW generator must be in automatic sweep time selection Refer to menu map 7 SWEEP Press SWEEP MENU Select more 1 3 Select SwpTime Auto Notice that the active entry area indicates gt SWEEP TIME 100 0 mSec AUTO When the swept CW generator is in automatic sweep time selection the active entry area displays AUTO along with the current sweep time Faster sweep speeds than this are possible turn the rotary knob counter clockwise until the display no longer changes Notice that AUTO is no longer displayed SWEEP TIME SWEEP LED POWER LEVEL powerl Figure 1 6 Power Level and Sweep Time Operation Power Level Sweep Time Operation Operation 1 Press POWER LEVEL 1 Press SWEEP TIME 2 Enter value 2 Enter value 3 Press dB m 3 Press terminator key Getting Started Basic 1 11 Continuous Single and Manual Sweep Operation 1 12 Getting Started Basic Continuous sweep is the operation mode set when the swept CW generator is preset It simply means that when the swept CW generator is performing a swept o
339. tinued Description Network Analyzer SCPI Language Language Modulation Scalar pulse modulation SHPM PULS SOUR SCAL STAT ON Power Set power level PL lt num gt DB POW lt num gt DBM Activate power sweep PS1 POW MODE SWE Deactivate power sweep PSO POW MODE FIX RF output On RF1 POW STAT ON RF output Off RFO POW STAT OFF Uncouple internal SHPS POW ATT AUTO OFF attenuator and ALC Couple internal attenuator PL POW ATT AUTO ON and ALC Set attenuator value and uncouple attenuator Set power step size Activate power slope function Do auto track Continuously peak RF Peak RF once SHSL AT lt num gt DB SHPL SP lt num gt DB SL1 lt num gt DB SHRP RP1 SHAK POW ATT lt num gt DB POW STEP lt num gt DB freq_suffix POW SLOP lt num gt freq suffix STAT ON CAL TRAC CAL PEAK AUTO ON CAL PEAK Sweep Set sweep time Sweep once Single sweep Sweep continuously Sweep manually Activate step sweep mode Activate ramp sweep mode Trigger external Trigger free run Trigger step ST lt num gt time_sufhix S2 SG S2 SG S1 SM S53 SN SEST FA FB CF DF 1 S2 T3 Tl TRSB SWE TIME lt num gt time_suffix INIT INIT CONT OFF ABOR INIT INIT CONT ON SWE MODE MAN SWE GEN STEP MODE MAN FREQ MODE SWE SWE GEN ANAL FREQ MODE SWE TRIG SOUR EXT TRIG SOUR IMM 3 28 Installation Table 3 9 Programming Language Comparison continued Description Net
340. tion Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY When this softkey is selected the swept CW generator automatically steps to the next point in the stepped frequency sweep until all points are swept The time between points is equal to the sum of the dwell and phase lock times An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI SWEep TRIGger SOURce IMMediate Analyzer NONE Step Swp Menu Sweep Mode Step Using Step Sweep in Chapter 1 Step Swp Pt Trig Bus Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY When this softkey is selected the swept CW generator steps to the next point in a stepped frequency sweep when an GPIB trigger TRG lt GET gt is received leading edge TTL When the last frequency point is reached and continuous sweep is selected the next trigger causes the step sweep to return to the start frequency Connect the trigger signal to the TRIGGER INPUT BNC An asterisk next to the key label indicates this feature is active SCPI SWEep TRIGger SOURce BUS Analyzer TS Step Swp Menu Sweep Mode Step S 62 Operating and Programming Reference Step Swp Pt Trig Ext Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY When this softkey is selected the swept CW generator steps to the next point in the stepped frequency sweep when an external hardware trigger is received When the last frequency
341. tion Programming Codes See Also USER CAL This softkey enables the swept CW generator to act as a controller to an HP Agilent 437B power meter This softkey causes an immediate execute on the interface bus and generates an GPIB error if no power meter is present on the interface bus or if the swept CW generator is unable to address the power meter Use external detector calibration to characterize and compensate for an external negative diode detector used in an external leveling configuration SCPI CALibration P METer DETector INITiate DIODe CALibration P METer DETector NEXT lt num gt lvl suffix Analyzer NONE Optimizing Swept CW Generator Performance in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference E 5 Fault Menu Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes SERVICE This softkey accesses the fault information softkeys Use this softkey if a fault is indicated on the message line Fault Info 1 Fault Info 2 Fault Info 8 Clear Fault Indicates the latched status of PEAK TRACK RAMP SPAN V GHZ and ADC Indicates the latched status of EEROM PWRON CALCO PLLZERO PLLWAIT and FNXFER Indicates the latched status of CALYO CALMAN TMR CNFLCT and SEARCH Clears all latched fault status messages SCPI DIAGnostics 0UTput FAULts This command produces a string of ones and zeroes 16 bits separated by commas to indicate the latched status of the different fault indicators
342. tion on calibration constants Softkeys listed above Using the Security Features in Chapter 1 S 50 Operating and Programming Reference Set Atten Selftest Full Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SERVICE This softkey activates the self test function of the swept CW generator SCPI TST Analyzer NONE Fault Menu SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY Chapter 4 OPERATOR S CHECK and ROUTINE MAINTENANCE Set Atten Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER This softkey lets you set the attenuator separately from the rest of the ALC system When an entry is made using this key the attenuator is automatically uncoupled from the ALC system so that the POWER LEVEL key controls the ALC system apart from the attenuator SCPI POWer ATTenuation lt num gt DB or MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN Analyzer SHLS lt num gt DB DM ALC POWER LEVEL Uncoupl Atten Working with Mixers Reverse Power Effects in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference S 51 GiNGtE Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SWEEP This hardkey selects single sweep mode aborts any sweep in progress and initiates a single sweep at a rate determined by the sweep time function If you press SINGLE in the middle of a continuous sweep the sweep is aborted and the swept CW generator retraces to the starting poi
343. to 8 e RST The swept CW generator is set to a predefined condition as follows CALibration PEAKing AUTO OFF CALibration POWer ATTenation 0O DBM CALibration POWer RANGe 1 CALibration SPAN AUTO OFF CORRection FLATness returns a 0 CORRection ARRay clear CORRection FLATness POINts returns a 0 CORRection STATe OFF DIAGnostics ABUS AVERage 1 DIAGnostics TEST ENABle ALL DIAGnostics TEST LOG SOURce FAIL DIAGnostics TEST LOG STATe OFF DIAGnostics TEST LOOP OFF DISPlay STATe ON FREQuency CENTer value is MAX MIN 2 FREQuency FREQuency FREQuency FREQuency FREQuency FREQuency FREQuency FREQuency CW value is MAX MIN 2 CW AUTO OFF MANual value is MAX MIN 2 MODE CW MULTiplier 1 MULTiplier STATe OFF OFFSet O OFFSet STATe OFF STARt MINimum STEP calculated from span FREQuency STEP AUTO ON FREQuency STOP MAXimum INITiate CONTinuous OFF LIST DWEL1 value is 100 us MINimum LIST DWEL1 POINts returns a 1 LIST FREQuency value is MAX MIN 2 LIST FREQuency POINts returns a 1 LIST MANual 1 LIST MODE AUTO LIST POWer CORRection 0 LIST POWer CORRection POINts returns a 1 LIST TRIGger SOURce IMMediate MARKer n AMPLitude STATe OFF MARKer n AMPLitude VALue 2 DBM MARKer n FREQuency value same as FREQ CENT RST value FREQuency FREQuency Operating and Programming Reference S 13 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY MARKer n MODE FREQuency MARKer n STATe OFF P
344. to be held off it has no effect on the transfer of commands over the GPIB The commands continue to be accepted by the source and are buffered until they can be executed 180 Toggle the RF STATE to OFF 190 Repeat the sample exercise 200 and 210 Print messages on the computer display 1 102 Getting Started Programming Using the User Flatness The following program interrogates the swept CW generator and an Correction Commands HP Agilent 437B power meter for frequency and power information Example Program 8 respectively The swept CW generator is programmed to sweep 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 from 2 to 20 GHz with frequency correction pairs every 100 MHz and 5 dBm leveled output power For this example we assume that the path losses do not exceed 5 dBm and that the HP Agilent 437B power meter already has its power sensor s calibration factors stored in sensor data table 0 If another power meter is used the power sensor s calibration factors will have to be stored in a look up table Modify the program to suit your particular measurement requirements Up to 801 points may be entered in the user flatness correction table with this program SCPI commands are used to set up the source parameters and enter correction frequencies and data into the correction table ASSIGN THE ADDRESS T
345. tor The equation used to determine the displayed value is Entered or Displayed Power Hardware Power ALC Active Offset SCPI POWer OF Fset STATe ON OFF 1 0 POWer OF Fset lt num gt DB MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN Analyzer NONE POWER LEVEL and POWER MENU P 6 Operating and Programming Reference Power Slope Power Slope Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER This softkey lets you compensate for system cable and waveguide variations due to changes in frequency by linearly increasing or decreasing power output as the frequency increases RF slope values may range from 2 50 to 2 50 dB per GHz The power at the beginning of the sweep equals the current power level An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI POWer SLOPe STATe ON OFF 1 0 POWer SLOPe lt num gt DB MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN Analyzer SL1 function on SLO function off Note that because SL functions in the fundamental units of dB Hz you program the SL code SLmdt where m is 1 on or 0 off d is the numerical value in dB Hz and t is either DB or the ASCII LF terminator For example for a slope of 1 5 dB GHz use this procedure 1 1 5 dB GHz 1 5 dB 1 000 000 000 Hz 2 1 5 dB 1E9 Hz 1 5E 9 dB Hz 3 The programming code is SL11 5E 9 DB POWER LEVEL Power Sweep Power Sweep and Power Slope Operation in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Ref
346. tting Started Programming Table 1 4 Sample Swept CW Generator Commands continued time Command Parameters Parameter Type Allowed Values POWer AT Tenuation atten setting extended numeric 0 to 90 DB or MA Ximum MINimum UP DOWN AUTO coupled atten Boolean ONJOFF 1 0 LEVel output level extended numeric specified power range or MA Ximum MINimum UP DOWN STATe RF on off Boolean ONJOFF 1 0 5WEep GENeration type of sweep discrete STEPped ANALog TIME sweep time extended numeric 200s to 133 ms or MA Ximum MINimum AUTO auto sweep Boolean ON OFF 1 0 time switch LLIMit fastest sweep extended numeric lt num gt time suffix or MA Ximum MINimum Getting Started Programming 1 89 GPIB Check Example This first program is to verify that the GPIB connections and Program 1 interface are functional Connect a controller to the swept CW generator via an GPIB cable Clear and reset the controller and type in the following program 10 Source 719 20 ABORT 7 30 LOCAL Source 40 CLEAR Source 50 REMOTE Source 60 CLS 70 PRINT The source should now be in REMOTE 80 PRINT Verify that the REMOTE LED is on 90 END Run the program and verify that the REMOTE LED is lit on the swept CW generator If it is not verify that the swept CW generator address is set to 19 and that the interface cable is properly connected If the controller display indicates an error message it is possible that
347. u map 2 2 Press FREQUENCY menu 3 Select List Menu To use the frequency points of a frequency list to create the frequency portion of the user flatness correction array 1 Refer to menu map 5 Press POWER MENU Select Fitness Menu e WwW hd Select Copy List Using the Security To access the security menu Features 1 Refer to menu map 8 2 Press SYSTEM MENU 3 Select Security Menu Getting Started Advanced 1 53 Changing the Preset Parameters 1 54 Getting Started Advanced 1 Set up the swept CW generator in the desired operation state to be used as the preset state Refer to menu map 8 Press SYSTEM MENU Select Save User Preset oOo WwW bh Select Preset Mode User Whenever the PRESET key is pressed the swept CW generator will return to the operation state setup and saved in steps 1 and 4 The swept CW generator displays USER DEFINED PRESET RECALLED and also gives you the option of selecting the factory preset state by creating a factory preset softkey Programming Getting Started Programming Modulation Commands GPIB the General Purpose Interface Bus is the instrument to instrument communication system between the swept CW generator and up to 14 other instruments Any instrument having GPIB capability can be interfaced to the swept CW generator including non HP instruments that have GPIB TEEE 488 ANSI MC1 1 or IE
348. ugh 31 RST or power on does not effect this value Default is 13 It is defaulted only when memory is initialized e DIAGnostics INSTrument PRINter ADDRess lt num gt e DIAGnostics INSTrument PRINter ADDRess S 26 Operating and Programming Reference SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY Sets the GPIB address of the printer to use during some of the calibration procedures when the swept CW generator assumes GPIB control RST and power on do not effect this command The default is 1 The default value is set at memory initialization only e DIAGnostics IORW lt num gt lt num gt Performs a write to the I O Device number specified in the first lt num gt and sets it to the value in the second lt num gt e DIAGnostics IORW lt num gt Reads from the specified I O device number and returns the response data e DIAGnostics OUTPut FAULt Returns a string of 16 1s and 0s that are equivalent to the fault display Bit 0 PEAK Bit 1 TRACK Bit 2 RAMP Bit 3 SPAN Bit 4 V GHz Bit 5 ADC Bit 6 EEROM Bit 7 PWRON Bit 8 CALCO Bit 9 PLLZERO Bit 10 PLLWAIT Bit 11 FNXFER Bit 12 CAL YO Bit 13 CAL MAN Bit 14 TMR CNFLCT Bit 15 SEARCH e DIAGnostics RESult Returns the following information lt result gt lt test failure gt lt manual entry point gt where lt result gt is one of the following 0 Diagnosis successful 1 Cannot diagnose full selftest must be executed first 2 No failures found
349. ument damage The offset prong of the three prong connector is the grounding pin The protective grounding feature is preserved when operating the swept CW generator from a two contact outlet by using a three prong to a two prong adapter and connecting the green wire of the adapter to ground An adapter is available for US connectors only as part number 1251 0048 Install the instrument so that the detachable power cord is readily identifiable and is easily reached by the operator The detachable power cord is the instrument disconnecting device It disconnects the mains circuits from the mains supply before other parts of the instrument The front panel switch is only a standby switch and is not a LINE switch Alternately an externally installed switch or circuit breaker which is readily identifiable and is easily reached by the operator may be used as a disconnecting device CABLE CABLE PLUG TYPE PART DESCRIPTION 2 LENGTH FOR USE IN COUNTRY NUMBER2 inches 8120 1351 Straight BS1363A Mint Gray United Kingdom 8120 1703 90 Mint Gray Cyprus Nigeria Zimbabwe Singapore 8120 1369 Straight ZNSS198 ASC 112 Australia 8120 0696 90 New Zealand 8120 1689 Straight CEE7 VII Mint Gray East and West Europe 8120 1692 90 Mint Gray Soudi Arabia Egypt Republic of So Africa India unpolarized in many nations 8120 1348 Straight NEMA5 15P Black United States 8120 1398 90 Black Canada Japan 8120 1754 Straight NEMA5
350. unctions while the sweep speed is controlled by the sweep time function The green LED located above this key lights when the swept CW generator is performing a list step or analog sweep The LED is off during all of the following retrace band crossings phase locking at the start frequency of each new sweep and during manual sweeps SCPI INITiate CONTinuous ON 1 Analyzer 51 Manual Sweep SINGLE Continuous Single and Manual Sweep Operation in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 C 10 Operating and Programming Reference CorPair Disable Copy List Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER This softkey lets you copy the frequency information of the frequency list to the flatness correction menu If there is no frequency list to copy nothing happens SCPI NONE see Fltness Menu Analyzer NONE atc Fltness Menu CorPair Disable Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER This softkey lets you disable the user flatness array frequency correction pairs so that the 1601 point flatness array will be applied when is on The 1601 point flatness array is accessible only through the GPIB interface SCPI CORRection SOURce 0 1 ARRay Analyzer NONE Fltness Menu Optimizing Swept CW Generator Performance in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference C 11 Coupling Factor Function
351. use of other fuses or material is prohibited Refer to Routine Maintenance in Chapter 4 for information on changing fuses Before switching on this product make sure that the line voltage selector switch is set to the voltage of the power supply and the correct fuse is installed Assure the supply voltage is in the specified range Installation 3 3 3 4 Power Cable WARNING CAUTION Installation In accordance with international safety standards this instrument is equipped with a three wire power cable When connected to an appropriate power line outlet this cable grounds the instrument cabinet Figure 3 1 shows the styles of plugs available on power cables supplied with Agilent instruments The part numbers indicated are part numbers for the complete power cable plug set The specific type of power cable plug shipped with the instrument depends upon the country of shipment destination This is a Safety Class product provided with a protective earthing ground incorporated in the power cord The mains plug shall only be inserted in a socket outlet provided with a protective earth contact Any interruption of the protective conductor inside or outside the instrument is likely to make the instrument dangerous Intentional interruption is prohibited Always use the three prong ac power cord supplied with this instrument Failure to ensure adequate earth grounding by not using this cord may cause instr
352. used This is an unspecified mode of operation since the output power may not be at the maximum leveled output power specification at frequencies generated in the doubled mode This softkey has no effect on instruments without a doubler An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active Operating and Programming Reference D 7 Doubler Amp Mode Off Programming Codes SCPI POWer AMPLifier STATE ON OFF 0 1 POWer AMPLifier STATE Analyzer NONE See Also Dblr Amp Menu Doubler Amp Mode On Function Group POWER Menu Map 5 Description This softkey is applicable to instrument models with a doubler installed The doubler has an integral amplifier whose operation is controlled by the instrument firmware This softkey turns off the automatic mode of operation and turns on the amplifier so that it is always used This is an unspecified mode of operation since it can cause increased harmonics and degraded dynamic range at some frequencies This softkey has no effect on instruments without a doubler An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active Programming Codes SCPI POWer AMPLifier STATE ON OFF 0 1 POWer AMPLifier STATE Analyzer NONE See Also Dbir Amp Menu D 8 Operating and Programming Reference Dwell Coupled Dwell Coupled Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY This softkey lets you couple the dwell time for points in t
353. ust be connected to the EXT ALC input Sets the swept CW generator to level power internally Sets the swept CW generator to level power at the output of a millimeter wave module Either an HP Agilent 8349B or 8355X series millimeter wave source module must be connected to the SOURCE MODULE INTERFACE Sets the swept CW generator to level power at an external power meter A power meter s recorder output must be connected to the EXT ALC input Operating and Programming Reference A 3 ALC Pwr Mtr Range Specifies the operating range of an external power meter used in an external leveling setup This causes the swept CW generator display to agree with the power meter s power indication The following paragraphs explain the power control leveling function of the swept CW generator in detail ALC SYSTEM OVERVIEW The ALC system referred to as a system because it encompasses more than one functional area is shown as a simplified block diagram in Figure A 1 The purpose of this system is to control the amplitude or power level of the RF energy generated by the swept CW generator It is a feedback control system in which the output power is measured and compared to the desired power level If the output power does not equal the desired power level the ALC system changes the output until they are equal Desired power level can be set by either front panel or remote operation As shown in Figure A 1 the inputs and calibr
354. uted The power meter is ready to measure the power level relative to a starting point of 0 dBm Press POWER MENU Select Power Sweep and enter 7 4B m asterisk on Press SINGLE Watch the relative power indication on the power meter At the end of the sweep the power meter indicates 7 dB The active entry area on the swept CW generator indicates gt POWER SWEEP 7 00 dB SWP Now enter 2 G power sweep is still the active entry function Press SINGLE This time the power meter indicates less than the power sweep requested Note that the swept CW generator is unleveled UNLVD This happens because the swept CW generator s output power at the start of the sweep is 0 dB and the requested power sweep takes the swept CW generator beyond the range where it is able to produce leveled power The range of the power sweep is dependent on the ALC range and can be offset if a step attenuator Option 001 is present Select Power Sweep to turn this function off no asterisk Press POWER LEVEL 2 0 On the power meter press dB REF to reset the reference level Power Slope Operation Select Power Sweep asterisk on Press SINGLE The swept CW generator performs a power sweep beginning at 20 dBm and ending at 5 dBm The power meter indicates 25 dB This function allows for compensation of high frequency system or cable losses by linearly increasing the power output as the frequency increa
355. uto Fill Pts Auto Fill Pts Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY POWER 2 5 This softkey is used in two locations Fltness Menu and List Menu Flatness Menu When selected the swept CW generator waits for a numeric value representing the number of correction points to be entered gt Number of Correction Points is displayed in the active entry area A list of frequencies containing the number of specified points is created automatically The list begins at the auto fill start frequency and ends at the auto fill stop frequency The rest of the points are equally spaced between them A minimum of two points must be entered If the number of points requested creates a list that exceeds the number of elements available 801 the following message appears TOO MANY CORRECTION PTS REQUESTED List Menu When selected the swept CW generator waits for a numeric value representing the number of list points to be entered gt Number of List Frequencies is displayed in the active entry area A list of frequencies containing the number of specified points is created automatically The list begins at the auto fill start frequency and ends at the auto fill stop frequency The rest of the points are equally spaced between them A minimum of two points must be entered If the number of points requested creates a list that exceeds the number of points available 801 the following messa
356. values Discrete parameters use mnemonics to represent each valid setting They have a long and a short form just like command mnemonics You can used mixed upper and lower case letters for discrete parameters Examples of discrete parameters used with the ROSCillator subsystem INTernal internal frequency standard EXTernal external frequency standard NONE no frequency standard free run mode Although discrete parameters values look like command keywords do not confuse the two In particular be sure to use colons and spaces properly Use a colon to separate command mnemonics from each other Use a space to separate parameters from command mnemonics Boolean Parameters Boolean parameters represent a single binary condition that is either true or false There are only four possible values for a Boolean parameter Examples of Boolean parameters ON Boolean TRUE upper lower case allowed OFF Boolean FALSE upper lower case allowed 1 Boolean TRUE 0 Boolean FALSE Response Data Types Real Response Data A large portion of all measurement data are formatted as real response data Real response data are decimal numbers in either fixed decimal notation or scientific notation In general you do not need to worry about the rules for formatting real data or whether fixed decimal or scientific notation is used Most high level programming languages that support instrument I O handle either type transparently Examples of real response d
357. w Details of Trigger States Inside the Idle State Inside the Initiate State Inside Event Detection States Inside the Sequence Operation State Common Trigger Configurations The INIT Configuration The TRIG Configuration Description of Triggering in the 8360 L Series Swept CW Generators Advanced Trigger Configurations Trigger Keyword Definitions ABORt IM Mediate ODELay SOURce Related Documents The International Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Hewlett Packard Company Operating and Programming Reference How To Use This Chapter Address Adrs Menu tc ALC Bandwidth Select Auto ALC Bandwidth Select High ALC Bandwidth Select Low ALC BW Menu Altrnate Regs Ampl Markers ANALYZER STATUS REGISTER Arrow Keys T Auto Fill Incr Auto Fill Pts Auto Fill Start Auto Fill Stop Auto Track 1 107 1 109 1 109 1 109 1 109 1 110 1 111 1 111 1 112 1 114 1 115 1 115 1 116 1 117 1 118 1 118 1 118 1 118 1 118 1 119 1 120 1 120 1 120 2 1 A 1 A 1 A 3 A 10 A 10 A 11 A 11 A 12 A 13 A 13 A 16 A 17 A 18 A 19 A 20 A 21 A 22 C Blank Disp CENTER Center Marker Clear Fault Clear Memory Clear Point CONNECTORS our Copy List CorPair Disable Coupling Factor CW CW CF Coupled Dblr Amp Menu Delete Menu Delete All Delete Current Delete Undef Delta Marker Delta Mkr Ref Disp Status Doubler Amp
358. ware and firmware designated by Agilent Technologies for use with an instrument will execute its programming instructions when properly installed on that instrument Agilent Technologies does not warrant that the operation of the instrument or software or firmware will be uninterrupted or error free LIMITATION OF WARRANTY The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by Buyer Buyer supplied software or interfacing unauthorized modification or misuse operation outside of the environmental specifications for the product or improper site preparation or maintenance NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AGILENT TECHNOLOGIES SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES AGILENT TECHNOLOGIES SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT TORT OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY Assistance Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available for Agilent Technologies products For any assistance contact your nearest Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Office Safety Notes WARNING CAUTION The following safety notes are used throughout this manual Familiarize yourself with each of the notes and its meaning b
359. wept CW generator to exceed its minimum or maximum specified frequency will be limited SCPI FREQuency CENTer lt num gt freq suffix or MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN FREQuency MODE SWEep Analyzer CF SPAN START STOP Center Frequency Span Operation in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference C 1 Center Marker Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also MARKER This softkey sets the center frequency of the sweep to the frequency of the most recently activated marker Select any marker Mi M5 then select Center Marker to change the center frequency of the sweep to that of the marker The frequency span does not change unless the new sweep limits fall outside the frequency range of the swept CW generator In that case the swept CW generator automatically scales the frequency span to be within the swept CW generator s operating frequency range SCPI MAR Ker n FREQuency FREQuency CENTer lt freq from above gt freq suffix Analyzer MC MARKER Marker Operation in Chapter 1 Clear Fault Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SERVICE This softkey clears all the latched fault status indicators SCPI DIAGnostics OUTPut FAULts The above command relays the fault information and clears all faults Analyzer NONE Fault Menu C 2 Operating and Programming Reference Clear Memory Clear Memory Functi
360. wever it can be useful to clarify formal definitions of certain terms used in related documents IEEE Standard 488 2 1987 IEEE Standard Codes Formats Protocols and Common Commands For Use with ANSI IEEE Std 488 1 1987 New York NY 1987 This document describes the underlying message formats and data types used in SCPI It is intended more for instrument firmware engineers than for instrument user programmers However you may find it useful if you need to know the precise definition of certain message formats data types or common commands To obtain a copy of either of these documents write to The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Inc 345 East 47th Street New York NY 10017 USA BASIC 5 0 5 1 Interfacing Techniques Vol 2 Specific Interfaces 1987 This HP BASIC manual contains a good non technical description of the GPIB IEEE 488 1 interface in chapter 12 The GPIB Interface Subsequent revisions of HP BASIC may use a slightly different title for this manual or chapter This manual is the best reference on instrument I O for HP BASIC programmers Agilent Tutorial Description of the General Purpose Interface Bus 1987 This book provides a thorough overview of GPIB basics for the GPIB system designer programmer or user To obtain a copy of either of these documents contact the Agilent representative listed in your telephone directory 1 120 Getting Started Programming Operating and
361. wo occurrences of this softkey One occurs in the POWER MENU the other occurs in the USER CAL MENU Both softkeys operate the same way These softkeys access the tracking menu Realigns the swept CW generator s output filter and oscillator to maximize output power for the swept frequency mode Auto Track Peak RF Always Periodically realigns the swept CW generator s output filter and oscillator to maximize output power for the CW frequency mode Peak RF Once Realigns the swept CW generator s output filter and oscillator to maximize output power for the CW frequency mode SCPI NONE Analyzer NONE Softkeys listed above Using the Tracking Feature in Chapter 1 TrigOut Delay Function Group Menu Map Description SWEEP This softkey lets you specify the amount of time after phase lock before a trigger pulse is sent out of the TRIGGER OUTPUT BNC The delay can be set from 0 to 3 2 seconds An asterisk next to the key label indicates this feature is active Operating and Programming Reference T 3 TrigOQut Delay Programming Codes SCPI TRIGger ODELay lt num gt time suffix Analyzer NONE See Also Start Sweep Trigger Auto Start Sweep Trigger Bus Start Sweep Trigger Ext T 4 Operating and Programming Reference Uncoupl Atten Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER This softkey uncouples the attenuator if there is one from the ALC system It a
362. work Analyzer Language SCPI Language System Recall an instrument state Save an instrument state Activate alternate state sweep Deactivate alternate state sweep Display software revision Select an internal frequency reference Select an external frequency reference Display set HP IB address Select SCPI Select network analyzer language Select CIIL Lock save recall registers Unlock save recall registers Purge all instrument memory Blank instrument display RC lt 0 9 gt SV lt 1 9 gt ALI lt 1 9 gt ALO cycle power hardware hardware front panel hardware SYST SCPI SYST LANG COMP CIIL Or hardware SHSV SHRC SHMZ18HZ SHKZOHZ DUO RCL lt 0 8 gt SAV lt 1 8 gt SYST ALT lt 1 8 gt ALT STAT ON SYST ALT STAT OFF IDN See SCPI common commands ROSC INT ROSC EXT SYST COMM GPIB ADR lt num gt or hardware switch SYST LANG SCPI or hardware switch SYST LANG comp SYST LANG CIIL or hardware switch SYST KEY DIS SAVE SYST KEY ENAB SAVE SYST SEC ON SEC OFF DISP OFF 1 Wait one second after executing this command before sending any additional commands or they may be lost or ignored Installation 3 29 Operator s Check and Routine Maintenance WARNING Operator s Checks Service Information No operator serviceable parts inside Refer servicing to qualified personnel To prevent electrical shock do not remove c
363. wrMtr the POWER LEVEL key controls the output power of the swept CW generator as compared to the feedback voltage of the power meter The attenuator if present is automatically uncoupled from the ALC system and the POWER LEVEL key controls the Level DAC and Level Control Circuits see Figure A 1 within a more restricted range of the ALC level Instead of the 45 dB range of the ALC in other modes 12 dB is available in this mode with the upper end of the range set by the Pwr Mtr Range softkey This mode of operation requires a feedback connection from the recorder output of a power meter Operating and Programming Reference P 3 POWER LEVEL Programming Codes When you press POWER LEVEL the active entry area displays gt ATTEN X dB POWER LEVEL X XX dBm where X represents a numeric value The data display area indicates Power dBm MTR X XX In Normal Module the POWER LEVEL key controls the output power of the swept CW generator as compared to the feedback voltage from a millimeter wave source module The attenuator if present is automatically uncoupled from the ALC system and the POWER LEVEL key controls the Level DAC and Level Control Circuits see Figure A 1 within the ALC level range 25 to 20 dBm This mode of operation requires a feedback connection from the module to the swept CW generator through the SOURCE MODULE INTERFACE When you press POWER LEVEL the active entry area displays gt
364. xadecimal Octal Binary Notice that each parameter type has one or more corresponding response data types For example a setting that you program using a numeric parameter returns either real or integer response data when queried Whether real or integer response data is returned depends on the instrument used However precise talking requires that the response data type be clearly defined for a particular instrument and query The instrument command dictionary generally contains information about data types for individual commands The following paragraphs explain each parameter and response data type in more detail Parameter Types Numeric Parameters Numeric parameters are used in both subsystem commands and common commands Numeric parameters accept all commonly used decimal representations of numbers including optional signs decimal points and scientific notation If an instrument setting programmed with a numeric parameter can only assume a finite number of values the instrument automatically Getting Started Programming 1 83 rounds the parameter For example if an instrument has a programmable output impedance of 50 or 75 ohms you specified 76 1 for output impedance the value is rounded to 75 If the instrument setting can only assume integer values it automatically rounds the value to an integer For example sending ESE 10 123 is the same as sending ESE 10 Examples of numeric parameters 100 no dec
365. xtended numeric MA Ximum MINimum MANual num of points numeric 1 to maximum defined to lock on MODE list sweep mode discrete AUTO MANual PO Wer CORRection correction level extended numeric 40 to 40 DB 1 801 or MA Ximum MINimum 1 801 POINts num of corr levels numeric MA Ximum MINimum TRIGger SOURce list trig source discrete IMMediate BUS EX Ternal MARKer n n is 1 to 5 1 is the default AMPLitude STATe state Boolean ON OFF 1 0 VA Lue amp marker extended numeric 10 to depth 10DB MAXimum MINimum AOFF DELTa difference between numeric lt num gt lt num gt 1 to 5 two markers FREQuency marker frequency extended numeric specified freq range or MAXimum MINimum MODE marker mode discrete FREQuency DELTa REFerence delta marker ref numeric 1to5 STATe state Boolean ON OFF 1 0 Operating and Programming Reference S 19 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY Table S 1 8360 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY continued Command Parameters Parameter Type Allowed Values POWer ALC BANDwidth ALC bwidth extended numeric lt num gt freq suffix or MAXimum MINimum AUTO bwidth selection Boolean ON OFF 1 0 CFACtor coupling factor extended numeric 0 to 90 DB or MA Ximum MINimum UP DOWN SOURce leveling point discrete INTernal DIO De P METer MMHead STATe state Boolean ON OFF 1 0 AMPLifier STATE Boolean ON OFF 1 0 AUTO Boolean ON OFF 1 0 AT Tenuation atten setting extended numeric 0 to 90 DB or
366. xternal case parts Do not attempt to clean internally How to Clean the The display of the swept CW generator is protected by a plastic Display Filter display filter To clean the display filter use mild soap or detergent and water or a commercial window cleaner ammonia does not hurt the plastic surface Use a soft lint free cloth Do not use abrasive cleaners tissues or paper towels which can scratch the plastic 4 6 Operator s Check Routine Maintenance Instrument History This chapter is left blank until this manual requires changes Instrument History 5 1 Address Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SYSTEM The 8360 Adrs softkey lets you change the GPIB address of the swept CW generator Enter the address desired using the numeric entry keys or the up down arrow keys The address value may be set between 0 and 30 The swept CW generator stores the address value in non volatile memory The default address of the swept CW generator is 19 SCPI SYSTem COM Municate GPIB ADDRess Analyzer NONE Connectors HP IB Menu Instrument Addresses in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 Adrs Menu Function Group Menu Map Description SYSTEM This softkey accesses the GPIB address menu Meter Adrs Controls the system power meter address 8360 Adrs Can control the swept CW generator s address depending on the setting of the rear panel GPIB swit
367. y A frequency point must be entered before a dwell value can be accepted otherwise the following error message appears ERROR Must first enter a List Frequency The rotary knob and the up down arrow keys let you scroll through the frequency points available to change the default dwell values The range of values is 100 us to 3 2 s An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI NONE see List Menu Analyzer NONE List Menu Optimizing Swept CW Generator Performance in Chapter 1 Enter List Freq Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY This softkey lets you enter a frequency point into the frequency list array The frequency list may contain as few as one and as many as 801 points The order frequencies are entered is the order they are listed Additions to an existing list are placed as indicated by the active entry arrow The rotary knob and the up down arrow keys let you scroll through the frequencies points An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI NONE see List Menu Analyzer NONE List Menu Optimizing Swept CW Generator Performance in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference E 3 Enter List Offset Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY This softkey lets you enter an offset value for a frequency in the frequency list A frequency point
368. y the colon used between keywords as in FREQuency CW Each command subsystem is a set of commands that roughly corresponds to a functional block inside the instrument For example the POWer subsystem contains commands for power generation while the STATus subsystem contains commands for accessing status registers Common Subsystem Commands Commands RST MEAS VOLT IDN FREQ 1KHz po75b Figure 1 24 SCPI Command Types The remaining paragraphs in this subsection discuss subsystem commands in more detail Remember some commands are implemented in one instrument and not in another depending on its measurement function Getting Started Programming 1 67 Subsystem Command Trees The Command Tree Structure Most programming tasks involve subsystem commands SCPI uses a hierarchical structure for subsystem commands similar to the file systems on most computers In SCPI this command structure is called a command tree root AA level 1 BB cc DD level 2 EE FF GG HH JJ Figure 1 25 A Simplified Command Tree In the command tree shown in Figure 1 25 the command closest to the top is the root command or simply the root Notice that you must follow a particular path to reach lower level subcommands For example if you wish to access the GG command you must follow the path AA to BB to GG Paths Through the Command Tree To access commands in different paths in the command tree you must understand how an instrument inter
369. yzer ST lt num gt sc ms Power Sweep Power Level and Sweep Time Operation in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 SwpTime Auto Function Group Menu Map Description SWEEP This softkey lets you set the swept CW generator s sweep time to a minimum value for a chosen span and meet all specifications The sweep time is limited by a 300 MHz ms sweep rate An asterisk next to the key label indicates this feature is active S 68 Operating and Programming Reference Programming Codes See Also SYSTEM SCPI SWEep TIME AUTO ON OFF 1 0 Analyzer NONE SWEEP TIME Power Level and Sweep Time Operation in Chapter 1 SYSTEM Function Group Menu Map Description SYSTEM This hardkey reveals the system menu Alternate Regs Causes the swept CW generator to alternate on successive sweeps between the present instrument state and a second instrument state stored in an internal register Dim Display Dims the swept CW generator s display Disp Status Displays the present status of the swept CW generator GPIB Menu Reveals the GPIB control menu Preset Mode Factory Sets the preset state as defined by the manufacturer to be recalled by the PRESET key Preset Mode User Sets the preset state as defined by the user to be recalled by PRESET Ref Osc Menu Reveals the frequency standard options menu Save User Preset Stores the present instrument state in a spec

Agilent Technologies Portable Generator 8360 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents